AT7A1818OM
User Manual: 2018 Honda HR-V Owners Manual PDF | SERVICE MANUAL OWNERS
Open the PDF directly: View PDF 
.
Page Count: 503 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]
2018
OWNER’S MANUAL
Event Data Recorders
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR).
The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near
crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a
road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s
systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related
to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of
time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is
designed to record such data as:
•How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
•Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were
buckled/fastened;
3
WARNING
California Proposition 65 Warning
Operating, servicing and maintaining a
passenger vehicle or off-road vehicle can
expose you to chemicals including engine
exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates, and
lead, which are known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth defects or
other reproductive harm. To minimize
exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not
idle the engine except as necessary, service
your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and
wear gloves or wash your hands frequently
when servicing your vehicle. For more
information go to
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/
passenger-vehicle
.
•How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator
and/or brake pedal; and,
•How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of the
circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data
are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation
occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving
conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and
crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law
enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of
personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash
investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required,
and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the
vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that
have the special equipment, can read the information if they have
access to the vehicle or the EDR.
The data belongs to the vehicle owner and may not be accessed by
anyone else except as legally required or with the permission of the
vehicle owner.
Service Diagnostic Recorders
This vehicle is equipped with service-related devices that record
information about powertrain performance. The data can be used
to verify emissions law requirements and/or help technicians
diagnose and solve service problems. It may also be combined with
data from other sources for research purposes, but it remains
confidential. Some diagnostic and maintenance information is
uploaded to Honda upon vehicle start up.
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 0 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
California Perchlorate Contamination Prevention Act
The airbags, seat belt tensioners, and CR type batteries in this
vehicle may contain perchlorate materials - special handling may
apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/
As you read this manual, you will find information that is preceded
by a symbol. This information is intended to help you avoid
damage to your vehicle, other property, or the environment.
Software End User License Agreement
Your vehicle comes equipped with software, which is governed by
the End User License Agreement in Owner’s Manual, and which
contains a binding arbitration clause. Please refer to the End User
License Agreement for the terms and conditions governing your
use of the installed software, as well as the applications, services,
functions, and content provided through the software. Your use of
the installed software will serve as your consent to the terms and
conditions of the End User License Agreement.
You may opt out within 30 days of your initial use of the Software
by sending a signed, written notice to HONDA at American Honda
Motor Co., Inc. Honda Automobile Customer Services Mail Stop
100-5E-8A, 1919 Torrance Blvd. Torrance, CA 90501-2746.
Privacy Notice
This vehicle may share location and usage information. To manage
this setting, visit www.hondalink.com/vehicle-data-choices.
A Few Words About Safety
Your safety, and the safety of others, is very important. And
operating this vehicle safely is an important responsibility.
NOTICE
To help you make informed decisions about safety, we have
provided operating procedures and other information on labels and
in this manual. This information alerts you to potential hazards that
could hurt you or others.
Of course, it is not practical or possible to warn you about all the
hazards associated with operating or maintaining your vehicle. You
must use your own good judgment.
You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms,
including:
●Safety Labels - on the vehicle.
●Safety Messages - preceded by a safety alert symbol 3 and
one of three signal words: DANGER, WARNING, or CAUTION.
These signal words mean:
●Safety Headings - such as Important Safety Precautions.
●Safety Section - such as Safe Driving.
●Instructions - how to use this vehicle correctly and safely.
This entire book is filled with important safety information - please
read it carefully.
3DANGER
You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLY HURT if
you don’t follow instructions.
3WARNING
You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLY HURT if
you don’t follow instructions.
3CAUTION
You CAN be HURT if you don’t follow
instructions.
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 1 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
Contents
This owner’s manual should be considered a permanent part of the
vehicle and should remain with the vehicle when it is sold.
This owner’s manual covers all models of your vehicle. You may find
descriptions of equipment and features that are not on your
particular model.
Images throughout this owner’s manual (including the front cover)
represent features and equipment that are available on some, but
not all, models. Your particular model may not have some of these
features.
This owner’s manual is for vehicles sold in the United States and
Canada.
The information and specifications included in this publication were
in effect at the time of approval for printing. Honda Motor Co., Ltd.
reserves the right, however, to discontinue or change specifications
or design at any time without notice and without incurring any
obligation.
2Safe Driving P. 29
For Safe Driving P. 30 Seat Belts P. 35 Airbags P. 44
2Instrument Panel P. 73
Indicators P. 74 Gauges and Displays P. 90
2Controls P. 95
Clock P. 96 Locking and Unlocking the Doors P. 98
Opening and Closing the Windows P. 121
Operating the Switches Around the Steering Wheel P. 124
Interior Lights/Interior Convenience Items P. 152
2Features P. 177
Audio System P. 178 Audio System Basic Operation P. 184, 205
Customized Features P. 252 Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® P. 274, 297
2Driving P. 327
Before Driving P. 328 Towing a Trailer P. 333
Parking Your Vehicle P. 385 Multi-View Rear Camera P. 386
2Maintenance P. 391
Before Performing Maintenance P. 392 Maintenance MinderTM P. 395
Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades P. 419
Heating and Cooling System*/Climate Control System* Maintenance P. 437
2Handling the Unexpected P. 445
Tools P. 446 If a Tire Goes Flat P. 448
Overheating P. 463 Indicator, Coming On/Blinking P. 465 Fuses P. 470
2Information P. 479
Specifications P. 480 Identification Numbers P. 482
Emissions Testing P. 485 Warranty Coverages P. 487
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 2 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
Contents
Child Safety P. 57 Exhaust Gas Hazard P. 70 Safety Labels P. 71
Opening and Closing the Tailgate P. 115 Security System P. 118
Opening and Closing the Moonroof* P. 123
Adjusting the Mirrors P. 140 Adjusting the Seats P. 142
Heating and Cooling System* P. 163 Climate Control System* P. 167
Audio Error Messages P. 233 General Information on the Audio System P. 237
Off-Highway Driving Guidelines P. 337 When Driving P. 339 Braking P. 377
Refueling P. 388 Fuel Economy and CO2 Emissions P. 390
Maintenance Under the Hood P. 399 Replacing Light Bulbs P. 411
Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 423 Battery P. 433 Remote Transmitter Care P. 435
Cleaning P. 438 Accessories and Modifications P. 443
Engine Does Not Start P. 457 Jump Starting P. 460 Shift Lever Does Not Move P. 462
Emergency Towing P. 475 When You Cannot Open the Tailgate P. 476
Devices that Emit Radio Waves P. 483 Reporting Safety Defects P. 484
Authorized Manuals P. 489 Customer Service Information P. 490
Quick Reference Guide P. 4
Safe Driving P. 29
Instrument Panel P. 73
Controls P. 95
Features P. 177
Driving P. 327
Maintenance P. 391
Handling the Unexpected P. 445
Information P. 479
Index P. 492
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 3 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
4
Quick Reference Guide
Quick Reference Guide
Visual Index
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
❙ENGINE START/STOP Button*1 (P125)
❙Steering Wheel Adjustments (P139)
❙Hazard Warning Button
❙Ignition Switch* (P124)
❙Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Button* (P374)
❙ (Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA®) System OFF) Button (P369)
❙Heated Windshield Button* (P138)
❙Lane Departure Warning (LDW) Button* (P366)
❙Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Button* (P363)
❙ECON Button* (P357)
❙System Indicators (P74)
❙Gauges (P90)
❙Information Display (P91)
❙Audio/Information Screen (P185, 206)
❙Audio System (P178)
❙Navigation System*
() See the Navigation System Manual
❙Heating and Cooling System*
(P163)
❙Climate Control System * (P167)
❙Rear Window Defogger (P137)
❙Heated Mirror Icon* (P137)
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 4 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
5
Quick Reference Guide
❙Wipers/Washers (P134)
❙Paddle Shifter (Shift Up)* (P353)
❙ (Display) Button* (P206)
❙Paddle Shifter (Shift Down)* (P 353)
❙Audio Remote Control Buttons (P182)
❙Headlights/Turn Signals (P129)
❙Fog Lights* (P132)
❙LaneWatchTM* (P370)
❙ (Select/Reset) Knob (P91)
❙Brightness Control (P136)
❙Cruise Control Buttons (P358)
❙Horn (Press an area around .)
❙Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® System
(P274, 297)
❙Voice Control Buttons (P274, 297)
❙Navigation System Voice Control Buttons*
() See the Navigation System Manual
* Not available on all models
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 5 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
Visual Index
6
Quick Reference Guide
❙Electric Parking Brake Switch (P377)
❙Hood Release Handle (P400)
❙Fuel Fill Door Release Handle (P389)
❙Passenger’s Front Airbag (P47)
❙Interior Fuse Boxes (P472)
❙Driver’s Front Airbag (P47)
❙Power Window Switches (P121)
❙Power Door Lock Master Switch (P109)
❙Door Mirror Controls (P141)
❙Automatic Brake Hold Button (P380)
❙Seat Heater Icons* (P162)
❙Glove Box (P154)
❙Accessory Power Socket (P158)
❙USB Port(s) (P179)
❙HDMI® Port* (P180)
❙Auxiliary Input Jack* (P180)
❙Shift Lever
Continuously Variable
Transmission* (P348, 350)
Manual Transmission* (P354)
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 6 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
7
Quick Reference Guide
❙Front Seat (P142)
❙Rearview Mirror (P140)
❙Side Airbags (P51)
❙Accessory Power Socket
(P158)
❙Side Curtain Airbags (P53)
❙Ceiling Light (P152)
❙Seat Belts (P35)
❙Seat Belts (Installing a Child Seat) (P64)
❙Seat Belt to Secure a Child Seat (P66)
❙Seat Belt with Detachable Anchor (P41)
❙Cargo Area Light (P153)
❙Cargo Cover* (P161)
❙Cargo Floor Box (P157)
❙Accessory Power Socket* (P158)
❙Rear Seat (P148)
❙LATCH to Secure a Child Seat (P62)
❙Map Lights (P153)
❙Moonroof Switch* (P123)
❙Sun Visors
❙Vanity Mirrors
❙Grab Handle
❙Coat Hook (P159)
* Not available on all models
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 7 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
Visual Index
8
Quick Reference Guide
❙Power Door Mirrors (P141)
❙Maintenance Under the Hood (P399)
❙Windshield Wipers (P134, 419)
❙Headlights (P129, 411)
❙Front Turn Signal/Parking Lights (P129, 412)
❙Front Side Marker Lights (P129, 413)
❙Tires (P423, 448)
❙Fog Lights* (P132, 413)
❙Rear Wiper (P135, 421)
❙How to Refuel (P389)
❙Multi-View Rear Camera (P386)
❙Back-Up Lights (P416)
❙Brake/Tail/Rear Side Marker Lights (P417)
❙Rear Turn Signal Lights (P415)
❙Rear License Plate Lights (P418)
❙High-Mount Brake Light (P417)
❙Side Turn Signal Lights* (P129, 414)
❙Door Lock/Unlock Control (P101)
❙Opening/Closing the Tailgate (P115)
❙Tailgate Release Button (P116)
❙Lock Button (P101)
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 8 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
9
Quick Reference Guide
Eco Assist® System
Ambient Meter
●Changes color to reflect your driving style.
Green: Fuel efficient driving
Light green: Moderate acceleration/deceleration
White: Aggressive acceleration/deceleration
●The ambient meter color changes in accordance with
your brake or accelerator pedal operation.
●You can change color while the vehicle is at a stop in
ACCESSORY (q, LOCK (0 or VEHICLE OFF with the
ambient meter on. Press the select/reset knob
repeatedly; the color changes from white*1, blue,
purple, pink, red, amber to yellow.
*1: Default setting
2Changing Ring Color (P94)
ECON Mode Indicator*
(P83)
Comes on when the ECON button is
pressed.
ECON Button* (P357)
Helps maximize your fuel economy.
* Not available on all models
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 9 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
10
Quick Reference Guide
Safe Driving (P 29)
Airbags (P44)
●Your vehicle is fitted with airbags to help protect you and
your passengers during a moderate-to-severe collision.
Child Safety (P57)
●All children 12 and younger should be seated in the rear seat.
●Smaller children should be properly restrained in a forward-facing child seat.
●Infants must be properly restrained in a rear-facing child seat.
Exhaust Gas Hazard (P70)
●Your vehicle emits dangerous exhaust gases that contain
carbon monoxide. Do not run the engine in confined spaces
where carbon monoxide gas can accumulate.
Before Driving Checklist (P34)
●Before driving, check that the front seats, head restraints,
steering wheel, and mirrors have been properly adjusted.
Seat Belts (P35)
●Fasten your seat belt and sit upright well
back in the seat.
●Check that your passengers are wearing
their seat belts correctly.
Fasten your lap belt as
low as possible.
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 10 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
11
Quick Reference Guide
Instrument Panel (P73)
Lights Indicators
Malfunction Indicator
Lamp
Low Oil Pressure
Indicator
Anti-lock Brake System
(
ABS
) Indicator
Vehicle Stability Assist
(VSA
®
) System Indicator
VSA® OFF Indicator
Electric Power Steering
(EPS) System Indicator
Lights On Indicator
High Beam Indicator
Immobilizer System
Indicator
Seat Belt Reminder
Indicator
System Indicators
CRUISE MAIN
Indicator
Supplemental Restraint
System Indicator
Starter System
Indicator*
Door and Tailgate
Open Indicator
Tachometer Speedometer
Fuel Gauge
Security System
Alarm Indicator
Shift Lever Position Indicator*
Low Fuel Indicator
Gauges (P90)/Information Display (P91)/System Indicators (P74)
Turn Signal and
Hazard Warning
Indicators
High Temperature
Indicator (Red)
Low Temperature
Indicator (Blue)
System Indicators
System Indicators
Low Tire Pressure/TPMS
Indicator
U.S. models only
Brake System Indicator
(Red)
CRUISE CONTROL
Indicator
System Indicators
Charging System
Indicator
U.S.
U.S.
Canada
Smart Entry System
Indicator*
Washer Level Indicator
*
ECON Mode
Indicator*
Maintenance Minder
Indicator
Fog Light Indicator*
Canada
Brake System Indicator
(Amber)
Canada
U.S.
M (7-speed manual shift mode)
Indicator/Shift Indicator*
Information Display
Automatic Brake Hold
System Indicator
Automatic Brake Hold
Indicator
U.S.
Canada
Electric Parking Brake
System Indicator
Electric Parking Brake
Indicator
U.S.
Canada
All-Wheel Drive (AWD)
System Indicator*
Forward Collision
Warning (FCW)
Indicator*
Lane Departure
Warning (LDW)
Indicator*
Brake Depressing
Indicator
Continuously variable
transmission models
Brake Depressing
Indicator
Manual transmission models
* Not available on all models
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 11 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
12
Quick Reference Guide
Controls (P95)
Clock (P96)
The navigation system receives signals from
GPS satellites, updating the clock
automatically.
The clock in the information display is
automatically updated along with the audio
system’s clock display.
Models with navigation system
Models without navigation system
Clock
aSelect the (HOME) icon, then select
Settings.
bSelect System, Clock, then Clock
Adjustment.
cTouch the / icon to adjust the
numbers up or down.
dSelect OK.
Models with display audio system
VOL
HOME
MENU
BACK
3
4
aPress and hold the MENU/CLOCK
button.
bRotate to change hour, then press
.
cRotate to change minute, then
press .
dSelect SET, then press .
These indications are used to show how to
operate the LIST/SELECT (List/Selector) knob.
•Rotate to select.
•Press to enter.
Models with color audio system
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 12 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
13
Quick Reference Guide
ENGINE START/STOP
Button* (P125)
Press the button to change the vehicle’s
power mode.
Turn Signals (P129)
Lights (P129)
Turn Signal Control Lever
Right
Left
Light Control Switches
Low Beam
High Beam
Flashing
Wipers and Washers
(P134)
Wiper/Washer Control Lever
MIST
OFF
INT: Low speed with intermittent
LO: Low speed wipe
HI: High speed wipe
Pull toward
you to spray
washer fluid.
Adjustment Ring*
: Lower speed, fewer sweeps
: Higher speed, more sweeps
* Not available on all models
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 13 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
14
Quick Reference Guide
Steering Wheel (P139)
●To adjust, pull the adjustment lever
towards you, adjust to the desired
position, then lock the lever back in place.
To adjust
To lock
Unlocking the Front
Doors from the Inside
(P108)
●Pull either front door inner handle to
unlock and open it in one motion.
●Unlocking and opening the driver’s door
from the inner handle unlocks all the
other doors.
Tailgate (P115)
●With all the doors unlocked, press the
tailgate release button and lift open the
tailgate.
●Press the tailgate release button to
unlock and open the tailgate when you
carry the smart entry remote.
Models without smart entry system
Models with smart entry system
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 14 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
15
Quick Reference Guide
Power Door Mirrors
(P141)
●With the ignition switch in ON (w*1, move
the selector switch to L or R.
●Push the appropriate edge of the
adjustment switch to adjust the mirror.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an
ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition
switch.
Selector Switch
Adjustment Switch
Power Windows (P121)
●With the ignition switch in ON (w*1, open
and close the power windows.
●If the power window lock button is in the
off position, each passenger’s window
can be opened and closed with its own
switch.
●If the power window lock button is in the
on position (indicator on), each
passenger’s window switch is disabled.
Power Window Lock Button
Window Switch Indicator
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 15 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
16
Quick Reference Guide
Heating and Cooling System* (P163)
●Rotate the fan control dial to adjust the fan speed.
●Rotate the mode control dial ( / / / / ) to select the vents air flows from.
●Rotate the temperature control dial to adjust the temperature.
●Rotate the fan control dial to OFF to turn the system off.
●Rotate the mode control dial to to defrost the windshield.
Fan Control Dial
A/C (Air Conditioning) Button
Air flows from
windshield
defroster
vents.
Air flows
from floor
vents.
Air flows from
floor and
dashboard
vents.
Air flows
from
dashboard
vents.
Temperature Control Dial
Air flows from
floor and
windshield
defroster vents.
Mode Control Dial
(Recirculation) Button
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 16 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
17
Quick Reference Guide
Climate Control System* (P167)
●Select the AUTO icon to activate the climate control system.
●Select the icon to turn the system on or off.
●Select the icon to defrost the windshield.
●The climate control system is voice operable.
() See the Navigation System Manual for complete details.
Models without SYNC icon
AUTO Icon
A/C (Air Conditioning) Icon
Air flows from
floor and
windshield
defroster vents.
Air flows from
floor vents.
Air flows from
floor and
dashboard vents.
Air flows from
dashboard
vents.
Temperature Control Icons Fan Control Icons
(Recirculation) Icon
(On/Off) Icon
(Fresh Air) Icon
Mode Control Icon
(Windshield Defroster) Icon
* Not available on all models
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 17 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
18
Quick Reference Guide
Models with SYNC icon
AUTO Icon
SYNC (Synchronization) Icon
Air flows from
floor and
windshield
defroster vents.
Air flows from
floor vents.
Air flows from
floor and
dashboard vents.
Air flows from
dashboard
vents.
Driver Side Temperature
Control Icons
Passenger Side
Temperature Control
Icons
(Recirculation) Icon
(On/Off) Icon
Mode Control Icon
(Windshield Defroster) Icon
A/C (Air Conditioning) Icon
Fan Control Icons
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 18 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
19
Quick Reference Guide
Features (P177)
Audio Remote Controls
(P182)
●(+ / (- Button
Press to adjust the volume up/down.
●SOURCE Button
Press to change the audio mode: FM/AM/
CD/USB/iPod/Bluetooth® Audio/Pandora®*/
AhaTM*/Apps*, *1/AUX*/AUX HDMI®*.
● / Button
*1: Appears only when connected to HondaLink®.
Radio:Press to change the preset station.
Press and hold to select the next or
previous strong station.
CD/USB device:
Press to skip to the beginning of
the next song or return to the
beginning of the current song.
Press and hold to change a folder.
(+ / (- / / Buttons
SOURCE Button
Audio System (P178)
For navigation system operation () See the Navigation System Manual
(P184)
Models with color audio system
MENU/CLOCK Button
LIST/SELECT Knob
(Day/Night)
Button
(Back) Button
(Sound) Button
VOL /
(Volume/Power)
Knob
CD Slot
(CD Eject) Button
Preset Buttons (1-6)
(Phone) Button
RADIO Button
/
(Skip/Seek) Buttons
CD/AUX Button
Audio/Information Screen
* Not available on all models
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 19 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
21
Quick Reference Guide
Driving (P327)
Depress the brake pedal and press
the release button to move out of (P.
Manual Transmission* (P354)
Continuously Variable Transmission*
(P348, 350)
●Shift to (P and depress the brake pedal when starting the engine.
Shifting
Park
Turn off or start the engine.
Transmission is locked.
Reverse
Used when reversing.
Neutral
Transmission is not locked.
Drive
Normal driving.
On models with paddle shifters,
7-speed mode can be used
temporarily.
Drive (S)
●Better acceleration
●Used to increase engine braking
●Used when going up or down hills
Models without paddle shifters
Low
●Used to further increase engine braking
●Used when going up or down hills
Models without paddle shifters
Drive (S)
7-speed manual shift mode can
be used.
Models with paddle shifters
Move the shift lever without
pressing the release button.
Press the release button to move
the shift lever.
7-Speed Manual Shift Mode* (P352)
●Allows you to manually shift the transmission up or
down without removing your hands from the steering
wheel.
When the shift lever is in (S
●Pulling a paddle shifter changes the mode from
continuously variable transmission to 7-speed manual
shift mode.
●The M indicator and the selected speed number are
displayed in the shift indicator.
When the shift lever is in (D
●Pulling a paddle shifter temporarily changes the mode
from continuously variable transmission to 7-speed
manual shift mode. The selected speed number is
displayed in the shift indicator.
Shift Down (-
Paddle Shifter
Shift Up (+
Paddle Shifter
(M Indicator
Models with
paddle shifters
Models without
paddle shifters
Shift Lever
Release
Button Shift Indicator
* Not available on all models
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 21 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
22
Quick Reference Guide
VSA® On and Off (P369)
●The vehicle stability assist (VSA®) system
helps stabilize the vehicle during
cornering, and helps maintain traction
while accelerating on loose or slippery
road surfaces.
●VSA® comes on automatically every time
you start the engine.
●To partially disable or fully restore VSA®
function, press and hold the button until
you hear a beep.
Cruise Control (P358)
●Cruise control allows you to maintain a
set speed without keeping your foot on
the accelerator pedal.
●To use cruise control, press the CRUISE
button, then press the -/SET button once
you have achieved the desired speed
(above 25 mph or 40 km/h).
Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) (P373)
●Detects a change in tire conditions and
overall dimensions due to decrease in tire
pressures.
●TPMS is turned on automatically every
time you start the engine.
●A calibration procedure must be
performed when certain conditions arise.
U.S. models only
Refueling (P388)
Fuel recommendation: Unleaded gasoline, pump octane number 87 or higher
Fuel tank capacity: 13.2 US gal (50 L)
aPull the fuel fill door
release handle.
bTurn the fuel fill cap
slowly to remove the
cap.
cPlace the cap in the
holder on the fuel fill
door.
dAfter refueling, screw
the cap back on until it
clicks at least once.
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 22 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
23
Quick Reference Guide
Maintenance (P391)
Under the Hood (P399)
●Check engine oil, engine coolant, and window washer fluid.
Add when necessary.
●Check brake fluid.
●Check the battery condition monthly.
aPull the hood release handle under the corner of the
dashboard.
bLocate the hood latch lever, push it to the side, and then
raise the hood. Once you have raised the hood slightly,
you can release the lever.
cWhen finished, close the hood and make sure it is firmly
locked in place.
Lights (P411)
●Inspect all lights regularly.
Wiper Blades (P419)
●Replace blades if they leave streaks
across the windshield.
Tires (P423)
●Inspect tires and wheels regularly.
●Check tire pressures regularly.
●Install snow tires for winter driving.
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 23 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
24
Quick Reference Guide
Handling the Unexpected (P445)
Flat Tire (P448)
●Park in a safe location and replace the
flat tire with the compact spare tire in the
cargo area.
Indicators Come On
(P465)
●Identify the indicator and consult the
owner’s manual.
Engine Won’t Start (P457)
●If the battery is dead, jump start using a
booster battery.
Blown Fuse (P470)
●Check for a blown fuse if an electrical
device does not operate.
Overheating (P463)
●Park in a safe location. If you do not see
steam under the hood, open the hood,
and let the engine cool down.
Emergency Towing (P475)
●Call a professional towing service if you
need to tow your vehicle.
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 24 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
25
Quick Reference Guide
What to Do If
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
The ignition switch does
not turn from (0 to (q*1.
Why?
●The steering wheel may be locked.
●Try to turn the steering wheel left and
right while turning the ignition key.
●Move the steering wheel left and right
after pressing the ENGINE START/STOP button at the same
time.
The ignition switch does
not turn from (q to (0 and
I cannot remove the key.
Why?
The power mode does not
change from ACCESSORY
to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK).
Why?
The shift lever should be moved to (P.
Why does the brake pedal
pulsate slightly when
applying the brakes?
This can occur when the ABS activates and does not indicate a
problem. Apply firm, steady pressure on the brake pedal. Never
pump the brake pedal.
2Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) (P383)
U.S. models with manual transmission
U.S. models without smart entry system
Canadian models
Models without smart entry system
Models with smart entry system
Models without smart entry system
Models with smart entry system
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 25 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
26
Quick Reference Guide
The rear door cannot be
opened from inside the
vehicle. Why?
Check if the childproof lock is in the
lock position. If so, open the rear door
with the outside door handle.
To cancel this function, push the lever
to the unlock position.
Why do the doors lock
after I unlocked the doors?
If you do not open the doors within 30 seconds, the doors are
relocked automatically for security.
Why does the beeper
sound when I open the
driver’s door?
The beeper sounds when:
●The exterior lights are left on.
●The key is left in the ignition switch.
●The power mode is in ACCESSORY.
Why does the beeper
sound when I start driving?
The beeper sounds when the driver and/or front passenger are
not wearing their seat belts.
Why do I hear a screeching
sound when I apply the
brake pedal?
The brake pads may need to be replaced. Have your vehicle
inspected by a dealer.
Models without smart entry system
Models with smart entry system
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 26 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
27
Quick Reference Guide
Pressing the electric
parking brake switch does
not release the parking
brake. Why?
Press the electric parking brake switch with the brake pedal
depressed.
Depressing the accelerator
pedal does not release the
parking brake
automatically. Why?
●Fasten the driver’s seat belt.
●Check if the transmission is in (P or (N. If so, select any other
position.
I’m seeing an amber
indicator of a tire with an
exclamation point. What is
that?
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) needs attention. If
you recently inflated or changed a tire, you have to recalibrate
the system.
2Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) (P373)
U.S. models only
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 27 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
28
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 28 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
29
Safe Driving
You can find many safety recommendations throughout this chapter, and throughout this manual.
For Safe Driving
Important Safety Precautions.............. 30
Important Handling Information......... 32
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features............ 33
Safety Checklist ................................. 34
Seat Belts
About Your Seat Belts........................ 35
Fastening a Seat Belt.......................... 38
Seat Belt Inspection............................ 43
Airbags
Airbag System Components............... 44
Types of Airbags ................................ 47
Front Airbags (SRS) ............................ 47
Side Airbags....................................... 51
Side Curtain Airbags .......................... 53
Airbag System Indicators.................... 54
Airbag Care ....................................... 56
Child Safety
Protecting Child Passengers ............... 57
Safety of Infants and Small Children... 59
Safety of Larger Children ................... 68
Exhaust Gas Hazard
Carbon Monoxide Gas....................... 70
Safety Labels
Label Locations .................................. 71
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 29 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
30
Safe Driving
For Safe Driving
The following pages explain your vehicle’s safety features and how to use them
properly. The safety precautions below are ones that we consider to be among the
most important.
Important Safety Precautions
■Always wear your seat belt
A seat belt is your best protection in all types of collisions. Airbags are designed to
supplement seat belts, not replace them. So even though your vehicle is equipped
with airbags, make sure you and your passengers always wear your seat belts, and
wear them properly.
■Restrain all children
Children ages 12 and under should ride properly restrained in a back seat, not the
front seat. Infants and small children should be restrained in a child seat. Larger
children should use a booster seat and a lap/shoulder seat belt until they can use the
belt properly without a booster seat.
■Be aware of airbag hazards
While airbags can save lives, they can cause serious or fatal injuries to occupants
who sit too close to them, or are not properly restrained. Infants, young children,
and short adults are at the greatest risk. Be sure to follow all instructions and
warnings in this manual.
■Don’t drink and drive
Alcohol and driving don’t mix. Even one drink can reduce your ability to respond to
changing conditions, and your reaction time gets worse with every additional drink.
So don’t drink and drive, and don’t let your friends drink and drive, either.
1Important Safety Precautions
Some states, provinces and territories prohibit the use
of cell phones other than hands-free devices by the
driver while driving.
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 30 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
31
uuFor Safe DrivinguImportant Safety Precautions
Safe Driving
■Pay appropriate attention to the task of driving safely
Engaging in cell phone conversation or other activities that keep you from paying
close attention to the road, other vehicles, and pedestrians could lead to a crash.
Remember, situations can change quickly, and only you can decide when it is safe to
divert some attention away from driving.
■Control your speed
Excessive speed is a major factor in crash injuries and deaths. Generally, the higher
the speed, the greater the risk, but serious injuries can also occur at lower speeds.
Never drive faster than is safe for current conditions, regardless of the maximum
speed posted.
■Keep your vehicle in safe condition
Having a tire blowout or a mechanical failure can be extremely hazardous.
To reduce the possibility of such problems, check your tire pressures and condition
frequently, and perform all regularly scheduled maintenance.
■Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle
Children left unattended in the vehicle may be injured if they activate one or more
of the vehicle controls. They may also cause the vehicle to move, resulting in a crash
in which the children and/or another person(s) can be injured or killed. Also,
depending on the ambient temperature, the temperature of the interior may reach
extreme levels, which can result in injury or death. Even if the climate control system
is on, never leave children in the vehicle unattended as the climate control system
can shut off at any time.
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 31 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
32
uuFor Safe DrivinguImportant Handling Information
Safe Driving
Important Handling Information
Your vehicle has higher ground clearance than a passenger vehicle designed for use
only on pavement. Higher ground clearance has many advantages for off-highway
driving. It allows you to travel over bumps, obstacles, and rough terrain. It also
provides good visibility so you can anticipate problems earlier.
These advantages come at some cost. Because your vehicle is taller and rides higher
off the ground, it has a higher center gravity making it more susceptible to tipping
or roll over if you make abrupt turns. Utility vehicles have a significantly higher
rollover rate than other types of vehicles. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is
significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. As a reminder,
make sure you and your passengers always wear seat belts.
1Important Handling Information
For information on how to reduce the risk of rollover,
read:
2Driving Guidelines for Your Utility Vehicle
P. 346
2Off-Highway Driving Guidelines P. 337
Failure to operate your vehicle correctly might result
in a crash or a rollover.
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 32 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
33
uuFor Safe DrivinguYour Vehicle’s Safety Features
Safe Driving
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
The following checklist will help you take an active role in protecting yourself and
your passengers.
1Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
Your vehicle is equipped with many features that
work together to help protect you and your
passengers during a crash.
Some features do not require any action on your part.
These include a strong steel framework that forms a
safety cage around the passenger compartment,
front and rear crush zones, a collapsible steering
column, and tensioners that tighten the front seat
belts in a sufficient crash.
However, you and your passengers cannot take full
advantage of these features unless you remain seated
in the correct position and always wear your seat
belts. In fact, some safety features can contribute to
injuries if they are not used properly.
6
7
8
9
10
11
Crush Zones
Seats and Seat-Backs
Head Restraints
Collapsible Steering Column
Seat Belts
Front Airbags
Side Curtain Airbags
Seat Belt Tensioners
Side Airbags
6
7
7
8
8
9 9
10
11
Door Locks
10
Safety Cage
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 33 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
34
uuFor Safe DrivinguSafety Checklist
Safe Driving
Safety Checklist
For the safety of you and your passengers, make a habit of checking these items
each time before you drive.
•After everyone has entered the vehicle, be sure all doors and the tailgate are
closed and locked. Locking the doors and the tailgate helps prevent an occupant
from being ejected and an outsider from unexpectedly opening a door or the
tailgate.
2Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside P. 107
•Adjust your seat to a position suitable for driving. Be sure the front seats are
adjusted as far to the rear as possible while allowing the driver to control the
vehicle. Sitting too close to a front airbag can result in serious or fatal injury in a
crash.
2Adjusting the Seats P. 142
•Adjust head restraints to the proper position. Head restraints are most effective
when the center of the head restraint aligns with the center of your head. Taller
persons should adjust their head restraint to the highest position.
2Adjusting the Head Restraints P. 144
•Always wear your seat belt, and make sure you wear it properly. Confirm that any
passengers are properly belted as well.
2Fastening a Seat Belt P. 38
•Protect children by using seat belts or child seats according to a child’s age, height
and weight.
2Child Safety P. 57
1Safety Checklist
If the door and tailgate open indicator is on, a door
and/or the tailgate is not completely closed. Close all
doors and the tailgate tightly until the indicator goes
off.
2Door and Tailgate Open Indicator P. 80
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 34 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
35
Continued
Safe Driving
Seat Belts
About Your Seat Belts
Seat belts are the single most effective safety device because they keep you
connected to the vehicle so that you can take advantage of many built-in safety
features. They also help keep you from being thrown against the inside of the
vehicle, against any passengers, or out of the vehicle. When worn properly, seat
belts also keep your body properly positioned in a crash so that you can take full
advantage of the additional protection provided by the airbags.
In addition, seat belts help protect you in almost every type of crash, including:
-frontal impacts
-side impacts
-rear impacts
-rollovers
■Lap/shoulder seat belts
All five seating positions are equipped with lap/shoulder seat belts with emergency
locking retractors. In normal driving the retractor lets you move freely while keeping
some tension on the belt. During a collision or sudden stop the retractor locks to
restrain your body. The rear seat belts also have a lockable retractor for use with
child seats.
2Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt P. 64
1About Your Seat Belts
Seat belts cannot completely protect you in every
crash. But in most cases, seat belts can reduce your
risk of serious injury.
Most states and all Canadian provinces and territories
require you to wear seat belts.
If you extend the seat belt too quickly, it will lock in
place. If this happens, slightly retract the seat belt,
then extend it slowly.
3
WARNING
Not wearing a seat belt properly increases
the chance of serious injury or death in a
crash, even though your vehicle has
airbags.
Be sure you and your passengers always
wear seat belts and wear them properly.
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 35 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
uuSeat BeltsuAbout Your Seat Belts
36
Safe Driving
■Proper use of seat belts
Follow these guidelines for proper use:
•All occupants should sit upright, well back in the seat, and remain in that position
for the duration of the trip. Slouching and leaning reduce the effectiveness of the
belt and can increase the chance of serious injury in a crash.
•Never place the shoulder part of a lap/shoulder seat belt under your arm or
behind your back. This could cause very serious injuries in a crash.
•Two people should never use the same seat belt. If they do, they could be very
seriously injured in a crash.
•Do not put any accessories on the seat belts. Devices intended to improve comfort
or reposition the shoulder part of a seat belt can reduce the protective capability
and increase the chance of serious injury in a crash.
Your vehicle monitors front seat belt use. If
the ignition switch is turned to ON (w*1
before the driver’s seat belt is fastened, the
beeper will sound and the indicator will blink.
If the driver does not fasten the belt before
the beeper stops, the indicator will remain on.
The beeper will periodically sound and the
indicator will blink while driving until the
driver’s and/or the front passenger’s seat belt
is fastened.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.
■Seat Belt Reminder
1About Your Seat Belts
If a rear seat passenger moves around and extends
the seat belt, the lockable retractor may activate. If
this happens, release the retractor by unfastening the
seat belt and allow the belt to retract completely.
Then refasten the belt.
1Seat Belt Reminder
The indicator will also come on if a front passenger
does not fasten their seat belt within six seconds after
the ignition switch is turned to ON (w*1.
When no one is sitting in the front passenger’s seat,
the indicator will not come on and the beeper will not
sound.
The indicator also may not come on and the beeper
may not sound when the occupant is not heavy
enough to trigger the weight sensor. Such occupants
(e.g., infants and smaller children) should be moved
to the rear seat as a deploying front airbag likely will
injure or kill them.
2Protecting Child Passengers P. 57
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 36 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
37
uuSeat BeltsuAbout Your Seat Belts
Safe Driving
The front seats are equipped with automatic seat belt tensioners to enhance safety.
The tensioners automatically tighten the front seat belts during a moderate-to-
severe frontal collision, sometimes even if the collision is not severe enough to
inflate the front airbags.
■Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners
1Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners
The seat belt tensioners can only operate once.
If a tensioner is activated, the SRS indicator will come
on. Have a dealer replace the tensioner and
thoroughly inspect the seat belt system as it may not
offer protection in a subsequent crash.
During a moderate-to-severe side impact, the
tensioner on that side of the vehicle also activates.
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 37 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
38
uuSeat BeltsuFastening a Seat Belt
Safe Driving
Fastening a Seat Belt
After adjusting a front seat to the proper position, and while sitting upright and well
back in the seat:
2Adjusting the Seats P. 142
1. Pull the seat belt out slowly.
2. Insert the latch plate into the buckle, then
tug on the belt to make sure the buckle is
secure.
uMake sure that the belt is not twisted or
caught on anything.
1Fastening a Seat Belt
No one should sit in a seat with an inoperative seat
belt or one that does not appear to be working
correctly. Using a seat belt that is not working
properly may not protect the occupant in a crash.
Have a dealer check the belt as soon as possible.
Never insert any foreign objects into the buckle or
retractor mechanism.
Pull out slowly.
Correct
Seated
Posture.
Latch
Plate
Buckle
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 38 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
Continued 39
uuSeat BeltsuFastening a Seat Belt
Safe Driving
3. Position the lap part of the belt as low as
possible across your hips, then pull up on
the shoulder part of the belt so the lap part
fits snugly. This lets your strong pelvic
bones take the force of a crash and reduces
the chance of internal injuries.
4. If necessary, pull up on the belt again to
remove any slack, then check that the belt
rests across the center of your chest and
over your shoulder. This spreads the forces
of a crash over the strongest bones in your
upper body.
1Fastening a Seat Belt
To release the belt, push the red PRESS button and
then guide the belt by hand until it has retracted
completely.
When exiting the vehicle, be sure the belt is properly
stowed so that it will not get caught in the closing
door.
3
WARNING
Improperly positioning the seat belts can
cause serious injury or death in a crash.
Make sure all seat belts are properly
positioned before driving.
Lap belt
as low as
possible
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 39 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
uuSeat BeltsuFastening a Seat Belt
40
Safe Driving
The front seats have adjustable shoulder anchors to accommodate taller and shorter
occupants.
1. Move the anchor up and down while
pulling the release outward.
2. Position the anchor so that the belt rests
across the center of your chest and over
your shoulder.
■Adjusting the Shoulder Anchor
1Adjusting the Shoulder Anchor
The shoulder anchor height can be adjusted to four
levels. If the belt contacts your neck, lower the height
one level at a time.
After an adjustment, make sure that the shoulder
anchor position is secure.
Pull outward
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 40 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
Continued 41
uuSeat BeltsuFastening a Seat Belt
Safe Driving
1. Pull out the seat belt’s small latch plate and
the latch plate from each holding slot in the
ceiling.
2. Line up the triangle marks on the small
latch plate and anchor buckle. Make sure
the seat belt is not twisted. Attach the belt
to the anchor buckle.
3. Insert the latch plate into the buckle.
Properly fasten the seat belt the same way
you fasten the lap/shoulder seat belt.
■Seat Belt with Detachable Anchor
1Seat Belt with Detachable Anchor
To unlatch the detachable anchor, insert the latch
plate into the slot on the side of the anchor buckle.
3
WARNING
Using the seat belt with the detachable
anchor unlatched increases the chance of
serious injury or death in a crash.
Before using the seat belt, make sure the
detachable anchor is correctly latched.
Anchor
Buckle Latch Plate
Small Latch Plate
Latch Plate
Anchor
Buckle
Latch Plate
Buckle
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 41 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
uuSeat BeltsuFastening a Seat Belt
42
Safe Driving
If you are pregnant, the best way to protect yourself and your unborn child when
driving or riding in a vehicle is to always wear a seat belt and keep the lap part of the
belt as low as possible across the hips.
■Advice for Pregnant Women
1Advice for Pregnant Women
Each time you have a checkup, ask your doctor if it is
okay for you to drive.
To reduce the risk of injuries to both you and your
unborn child that can be caused by an inflating front
airbag:
•When driving, sit upright and adjust the seat as far
back as possible while allowing full control of the
vehicle.
•When sitting in the front passenger’s seat, adjust
the seat as far back as possible.
Wear the shoulder belt
across the chest avoiding
the abdomen.
Wear the lap part of the
belt as low as possible
across the hips.
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 42 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
43
uuSeat BeltsuSeat Belt Inspection
Safe Driving
Seat Belt Inspection
Regularly check the condition of your seat belts as follows:
•Pull each belt out fully, and look for frays, cuts, burns, and wear.
•Check that the latch plates and buckles work smoothly and the belts retract
easily.
uIf a belt does not retract easily, cleaning the belt may correct the problem. Only
use a mild soap and warm water. Do not use bleach or cleaning solvents. Make
sure the belt is completely dry before allowing it to retract.
Any belt that is not in good condition or working properly will not provide proper
protection and should be replaced as soon as possible.
A belt that has been worn during a crash may not provide the same level of
protection in a subsequent crash. Have your seat belts inspected by a dealer after
any collision.
1Seat Belt Inspection
3
WARNING
Not checking or maintaining seat belts can
result in serious injury or death if the seat
belts do not work properly when needed.
Check your seat belts regularly and have
any problem corrected as soon as possible.
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 43 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
44
Safe Driving
Airbags
Airbag System Components
6
78
9
12
810
8
8
8
8
11
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 44 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
45
uuAirbagsuAirbag System Components
Continued
Safe Driving
The front, front side, and side curtain
airbags are deployed according to the
direction and severity of impact. Both side
curtain airbags are deployed in a rollover.
The airbag system includes:
aTwo SRS (Supplemental Restraint System)
front airbags. The driver’s airbag is stored
in the center of the steering wheel; the
front passenger’s airbag is stored in the
dashboard. Both are marked SRS
AIRBAG.
bTwo side airbags, one for the driver and
one for a front passenger. The airbags are
stored in the outer edges of the seat-
backs. Both are marked SIDE AIRBAG.
cTwo side curtain airbags, one for each
side of the vehicle. The airbags are stored
in the ceiling, above the side windows.
The front and rear pillars are marked
SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG.
dAn electronic control unit that, when the
vehicle is on, continually monitors
information about the various impact
sensors, seat and buckle sensors, rollover
sensor, airbag activators, seat belt
tensioners, and other vehicle
information. During a crash event the
unit can record such information.
eAutomatic front seat belt tensioners. In
addition, the driver’s and front
passenger’s seat belt buckles incorporate
sensors that detect whether or not the
belts are fastened.
fA driver’s seat position sensor. If the seat
is too far forward, the airbag will inflate
with less force.
gWeight sensors in the front passenger’s
seat. The front passenger’s airbag will be
turned off if the weight on the seat is
approximately 65 lbs (29 kg) or less (the
weight of an infant or small child).
hImpact sensors that can detect a
moderate-to-severe front or side impact.
iAn indicator near the shift lever that
alerts you that the front passenger’s front
airbag has been turned off.
jAn indicator on the instrument panel that
alerts you to a possible problem with your
airbag system or seat belt tensioners.
kSafing Sensor
lA rollover sensor that detects if your
vehicle is about to roll over and signal the
control unit to deploy both side curtain
airbags.
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 45 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
uuAirbagsuAirbag System Components
46
Safe Driving
Airbags can pose serious hazards. To do their job, airbags must inflate with
tremendous force. So, while airbags help save lives, they can cause burns, bruises,
and other minor injuries, sometimes even fatal ones if occupants are not wearing
their seat belts properly and sitting correctly.
What you should do: Always wear your seat belt properly, and sit upright and as
far back from the steering wheel as possible while allowing full control of the
vehicle. A front passenger should move their seat as far back from the dashboard as
possible.
Remember, however, that no safety system can prevent all injuries or deaths that
can occur in a severe crash, even when seat belts are properly worn and the airbags
deploy.
Do not place hard or sharp objects between yourself and a front airbag.
Carrying hard or sharp objects on your lap, or driving with a pipe or other sharp
object in your mouth, can result in injuries if your front airbag inflates.
Do not attach or place objects on the front airbag covers. Objects on the
covers marked SRS AIRBAG could interfere with the proper operation of the airbags
or be propelled inside the vehicle and hurt someone if the airbags inflate.
■Important Facts About Your Airbags
1Important Facts About Your Airbags
Do not attempt to deactivate your airbags. Together,
airbags and seat belts provide the best protection.
When driving, keep hands and arms out of the
deployment path of the front airbag by holding each
side of the steering wheel. Do not cross an arm over
the airbag cover.
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 46 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
47
uuAirbagsuTypes of Airbags
Continued
Safe Driving
Types of Airbags
Your vehicle is equipped with three types of airbags:
•Front airbags: Airbags in front of the driver’s and front passenger’s seats.
•Side airbags: Airbags in the driver’s and front passenger’s seat-backs.
•Side curtain airbags: Airbags above the side windows.
Each is discussed in the following pages.
Front Airbags (SRS)
The front SRS airbags inflate in a moderate-to-severe frontal collision to help protect
the head and chest of the driver and/or front passenger.
SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) indicates that the airbags are designed to
supplement seat belts, not replace them. Seat belts are the occupant’s primary
restraint system.
The front airbags are housed in the center of the steering wheel for the driver, and
in the dashboard for the front passenger. Both airbags are marked SRS AIRBAG.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.
■Housing Locations
1Types of Airbags
The airbags can inflate whenever the ignition switch
is in ON (w*1.
After an airbag inflates in a crash, you may see a
small amount of smoke. This is from the combustion
process of the inflator material and is not harmful.
People with respiratory problems may experience
some temporary discomfort. If this occurs, get out of
the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.
1Front Airbags (SRS)
During a frontal crash severe enough to cause one or
both front airbags to deploy, the airbags can inflate
at different rates, depending on the severity of the
crash, whether or not the seat belts are latched, and/
or other factors. Frontal airbags are designed to
supplement the seat belts to help reduce the
likelihood of head and chest injuries in frontal
crashes.
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 47 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
uuAirbagsuFront Airbags (SRS)
48
Safe Driving
Front airbags are designed to inflate during moderate-to-severe frontal collisions.
When the vehicle decelerates suddenly, the sensors send information to the control
unit which signals one or both front airbags to inflate.
A frontal collision can be either head-on or angled between two vehicles, or when a
vehicle crashes into a stationary object, such as a concrete wall.
While your seat belt restrains your torso, the
front airbag provides supplemental protection
for your head and chest.
The front airbags deflate immediately so that
they won’t interfere with the driver’s visibility
or the ability to steer or operate other
controls.
The total time for inflation and deflation is so fast that most occupants are not
aware that the airbags deployed until they see them lying in front of them.
■Operation
■How the Front Airbags Work
1How the Front Airbags Work
Although the driver’s and front passenger’s airbags
normally inflate within a split second of each other, it
is possible for only one airbag to deploy. This can
happen if the severity of a collision is at the margin,
or threshold, that determines whether or not the
airbags will deploy. In such cases, the seat belt will
provide sufficient protection, and the supplemental
protection offered by the airbag would be minimal.
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 48 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
49
uuAirbagsuFront Airbags (SRS)
Continued
Safe Driving
■When front airbags should not deploy
Minor frontal crashes: Front airbags were designed to supplement seat belts and
help to save lives, not to prevent minor scrapes, or even broken bones that might
occur during a less than moderate-to-severe frontal crash.
Side impacts: Front airbags can provide protection when a sudden deceleration
causes a driver or front passenger to move towards the front of the vehicle. Side
airbags and side curtain airbags have been specifically designed to help to reduce
the severity of injuries that can occur during a moderate-to-severe side impact which
can cause the driver or passenger to move towards the side of the vehicle.
Rear impacts: Head restraints and seat belts are your best protection during a rear
impact. Front airbags cannot provide any significant protection and are not designed
to deploy in such collisions.
Rollovers: In a rollover, your best form of protection is a seat belt or, if your vehicle
is equipped with a rollover sensor, both a seat belt and a side curtain airbag. Front
airbags, however, are not designed to deploy in a rollover as they would provide
little if any protection.
■When front airbags deploy with little or no visible damage
Because the airbag system senses sudden deceleration, a strong impact to the
vehicle framework or suspension might cause one or more of the airbags to deploy.
Examples include running into a curb, the edge of a hole, or other low fixed object
that causes a sudden deceleration in the vehicle chassis. Since the impact is
underneath the vehicle, damage may not be readily apparent.
■When front airbags may not deploy, even though exterior damage
appears severe
Since crushable body parts absorb crash energy during an impact, the amount of
visible damage does not always indicate proper airbag operation. In fact, some
collisions can result in severe damage but no airbag deployment because the airbags
would not have been needed or would not have provided protection even if they
had deployed.
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 49 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
uuAirbagsuFront Airbags (SRS)
50
Safe Driving
The airbags have advanced features to help reduce the likelihood of airbag related
injuries to smaller occupants.
The driver’s advanced airbag system includes a
seat position sensor.
Based on information from this sensor and the
severity of the impact, the advanced airbag
system determines the optimal deployment of
the driver’s airbag.
The front passenger’s advanced airbag system
has weight sensors.
We advise against allowing a child age 12 or
under to ride in the front passenger’s seat.
However, if you do allow a child age 12 or
under to ride in the front passenger’s
seat, note that the system will automatically
turn off the front passenger’s airbag if the
sensors detect that the child is approximately
65 lbs (29 kg) or less.
■Advanced Airbags
1Advanced Airbags
If there is a problem with the driver’s seat position
sensor, the SRS indicator will come on and the airbag
will inflate with full (normal) force, regardless of the
driver’s seating position.
For the advanced airbags to work properly:
•Do not spill any liquid on or under the seats.
•Do not put any object under the passenger’s seat.
•Make sure any objects are positioned properly on
the floor. Improperly positioned objects can
interfere with the advanced airbag sensors.
•All occupants should sit upright and wear their seat
belts properly.
•Do not cover the passenger’s side dashboard with
a cloth, towel, cover, etc.
2Passenger Front Airbag Off Indicator
P. 55
Driver’s
Seat
Position
Sensor
Passenger’s
Seat Weight
Sensors
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 50 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
51
uuAirbagsuSide Airbags
Continued
Safe Driving
Side Airbags
The side airbags help protect the torso and pelvis of the driver or a front passenger
during a moderate-to-severe side impact.
The side airbags are housed in the outside
edge of the driver’s and passenger’s seat-
backs.
Both are marked SIDE AIRBAG.
When the sensors detect a moderate-to-
severe side impact, the control unit signals the
side airbag on the impact side to immediately
inflate.
■Housing Locations
1Side Airbags
Make sure you and your front seat passenger always
sit upright. Leaning into the path of a side airbag can
prevent the airbag from deploying properly and
increases your risk of serious injury.
Do not attach accessories on or near the side airbags.
They can interfere with the proper operation of the
airbags, or hurt someone if an airbag inflates.
Do not cover or replace the front seat-back covers
without consulting a dealer.
Improperly replacing or covering front seat-back
covers can prevent your side airbags from properly
deploying during a side impact.
Housing Location
■Operation
When
inflated
Side Airbag
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 51 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
52
uuAirbagsuSide Airbags
Safe Driving
■When a side airbag deploys with little or no visible damage
Because the airbag system senses sudden acceleration, a strong impact to the side
of the vehicle’s framework can cause a side airbag to deploy. In such cases, there
may be little or no damage, but the side impact sensors detected a severe enough
impact to deploy the airbag.
■When a side airbag may not deploy, even though visible damage appears
severe
It is possible for a side airbag to not deploy during an impact that results in
apparently severe damage. This can occur when the point of impact was toward the
far front or rear of the vehicle, or when the vehicle’s crushable body parts absorbed
most of the crash energy. In either case, the side airbag would not have been
needed nor provided protection even if it had deployed.
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 52 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
53
uuAirbagsuSide Curtain Airbags
Continued
Safe Driving
Side Curtain Airbags
The side curtain airbags help protect the heads of the driver and passengers in the
outer seating positions during a moderate-to-severe side impact. The side curtain
airbags equipped in this vehicle are also designed to help reduce the likelihood of
partial and complete ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in crashes,
particularly rollover crashes.
The side curtain airbags are located in the
ceiling above the side windows on both sides
of the vehicle.
The side curtain airbag is designed to deploy
in a rollover or a moderate-to-severe side
impact.
■Housing Locations
1Side Curtain Airbags
If the SRS control unit senses that your vehicle is
about to rollover, it immediately deploys both side
curtain airbags and activates both front seat belt
tensioners.
If the impact is on the passenger’s side, the
passenger’s side curtain airbag deploys even if there
is no passenger in the passenger seat.
To get the best protection from the side curtain
airbags, occupants should wear their seat belts
properly and sit upright and well back in their seats.
Do not attach any objects to the side windows or roof
pillars as they can interfere with the proper operation
of the side curtain airbags.
Side Curtain Airbag Storage
■Operation
Deployed Side Curtain Airbag
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 53 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
uuAirbagsuAirbag System Indicators
54
Safe Driving
■When side curtain airbags deploy in a frontal collision
One or both side curtain airbags may also inflate in a moderate-to-severe angled
frontal collision.
Airbag System Indicators
If a problem occurs in the airbag system, the SRS indicator will come on.
■When the ignition switch is turned to
ON (w*1
The indicator comes on for a few seconds,
then goes off. This tells you the system is
working properly.
If the indicator comes on at any other time, or does not come on at all, have the
system checked by a dealer as soon as possible. If you don’t, your airbags and seat
belt tensioners may not work properly when they are needed.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.
■Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Indicator
1Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Indicator
3
WARNING
Ignoring the SRS indicator can result in
serious injury or death if the airbag systems
or tensioners do not work properly.
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer as
soon as possible if the SRS indicator alerts
you to a possible problem.
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 54 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
55
uuAirbagsuAirbag System Indicators
Safe Driving
■When the passenger front airbag off
indicator comes on
The indicator comes on to alert you that the
passenger’s front airbag has been turned off.
This occurs when the weight sensors detect
about 65 lbs (29 kg) or less, the weight of an
infant or small child, on the seat.
Children age 12 or under should always ride properly restrained in a back seat.
2Child Safety P. 57
Objects placed on the seat can also cause the indicator to come on.
If the front passenger seat is empty, the passenger’s front airbag will not deploy and
the indicator will not come on.
■Passenger Front Airbag Off Indicator
1Passenger Front Airbag Off Indicator
If the indicator comes on with no front passenger and
no objects on the passenger’s seat, or with an adult
riding there, something may be interfering with the
weight sensors, such as:
•An object hanging on the seat or in the seat-back
pocket.
•A child seat or other object pressing against the
rear of the seat-back.
•A rear passenger pushing or pulling on the back of
the front passenger’s seat.
•The front seat or seat-back is forced back against
an object on the seat or floor behind it.
•An object placed under the front passenger’s seat.
If none of these conditions exist, have your vehicle
checked by a dealer as soon as possible.
The passenger airbag off indicator may come on and
goes off repeatedly if the total weight on the seat is
near the airbag cutoff threshold.
U.S. models
Canadian models
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 55 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
56
uuAirbagsuAirbag Care
Safe Driving
Airbag Care
You do not need to, and should not, perform any maintenance on or replace any
airbag system components yourself. However, you should have your vehicle
inspected by a dealer in the following situations:
■When the airbags have deployed
If an airbag has inflated, the control unit and other related parts must be replaced.
Similarly, once an automatic seat belt tensioner has been activated, it must be
replaced.
■When the vehicle has been in a moderate-to-severe collision
Even if the airbags did not inflate, have your dealer inspect the following: the driver’s
seat position sensor, weight sensors in the passenger’s seat, front seat belt
tensioners, and each seat belt that was worn during the crash.
■Do not remove or modify a front seat without consulting a dealer
This would likely disable or affect the proper operation of the driver’s seat position
sensor or the weight sensors in the passenger’s seat. If it is necessary to remove or
modify a front seat to accommodate a person with disabilities, contact a Honda
dealer, or for U.S. vehicles, American Honda Automobile Customer Service at 1-800-
999-1009 and for Canadian vehicles, Honda Canada Customer Relations at 1-888-
9-HONDA-9.
1Airbag Care
We recommend against the use of salvaged airbag
system components, including the airbag, tensioners,
sensors, and control unit.
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 56 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
57
Continued
Safe Driving
Child Safety
Protecting Child Passengers
Each year, many children are injured or killed in vehicle crashes because they are
either unrestrained or not properly restrained. In fact, vehicle crashes are the
number one cause of death of children ages 12 and under.
To reduce the number of child deaths and injuries, every state, Canadian province
and territory requires that infants and children be properly restrained when they ride
in a vehicle.
Children should sit properly restrained in a rear seat. This is because:
•An inflating front or side airbag can injure
or kill a child sitting in the front seat.
•A child in the front seat is more likely to
interfere with the driver’s ability to safely
control the vehicle.
•Statistics show that children of all sizes and
ages are safer when they are properly
restrained in a rear seat.
1Protecting Child Passengers
The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration
and Transport Canada recommend that all children
ages 12 and under be properly restrained in a rear
seat. Some states or provinces/territories have laws
restricting where children may ride.
3
WARNING
Children who are unrestrained or
improperly restrained can be seriously
injured or killed in a crash.
Any child too small for a seat belt should be
properly restrained in a child seat. A larger
child should be properly restrained with a
seat belt, using a booster seat if necessary.
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 57 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
uuChild SafetyuProtecting Child Passengers
58
Safe Driving
•Any child who is too small to wear a seat belt correctly must be restrained in an
approved child seat that is properly secured to the vehicle using either the seat
belt or the lower anchors of the LATCH system.
•Never hold a child on your lap because it is impossible to protect them in the
event of a collision.
•Never put a seat belt over yourself and a child. During a crash, the belt would
likely press deep into the child and cause serious or fatal injuries.
•Never let two children use the same seat belt. Both children could be very
seriously injured in a crash.
•Do not allow children to operate the doors, windows or seat adjustments.
•Do not leave children in the vehicle unattended, especially in hot weather when
the inside of the vehicle can get hot enough to kill them. They could also activate
vehicle controls causing it to move unexpectedly.
1Protecting Child Passengers
To deactivate a lockable retractor, release the buckle
and allow the seat belt to wind up all the way.
To remind you of the passenger’s front airbag
hazards and child safety, your vehicle has warning
labels on the dashboard (U.S. models) and on the
front visors. Please read and follow the instructions
on these labels.
2Safety Labels P. 71
3
WARNING
Allowing a child to play with a seat belt or
wrap one around their neck can result in
serious injury or death.
Instruct children not to play with any seat
belt and make sure any unused seat belt a
child can reach is buckled, fully retracted,
and locked.
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 58 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
59
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
Continued
Safe Driving
Safety of Infants and Small Children
An infant must be properly restrained in a rear-facing, reclining child seat until the
infant reaches the seat manufacturer’s weight or height limit for the seat, and the
infant is at least one year old.
■Positioning a rear-facing child seat
Child seats must be placed and secured in a
rear seating position.
When properly installed, a rear-facing child seat may prevent the driver or a front
passenger from moving their seat all the way back, or from locking their seat-back
in the desired position. Make sure that there is no contact between the child seat
and the seat in front of it.
It can also interfere with proper operation of the passenger’s advanced front airbag
system.
2Airbags P. 44
If this occurs, we recommend that you install the child seat directly behind the front
passenger’s seat, move the seat as far forward as needed, and leave it unoccupied.
Or, you may wish to get a smaller rear-facing child seat.
■Protecting Infants
1Protecting Infants
Rear-facing child seats should never be installed in a
forward facing position.
Always refer to the child seat manufacturer’s
instructions before installation.
Do not allow a front seat to rest against a child seat
installed in a rear seating position:
The weight sensor in the front seat may not correctly
detect the actual weight of the occupant.
3
WARNING
Placing a rear-facing child seat in the front
seat can result in serious injury or death
during a crash.
Always place a rear-facing child seat in the
rear seat, not the front.
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 59 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
60
Safe Driving
If a child is at least one year old and has exceeded the weight and height limitations
of a rearward facing child seat, the child should be properly restrained in a firmly
secured forward facing child seat until they exceed the weight and height limitations
for the forward facing child seat.
■Forward-facing child seat placement
We strongly recommend placing a forward-
facing child seat in a rear seating position.
Placing a forward-facing child seat in the front seat can be hazardous, even with
advanced front airbags that automatically turn the passenger’s front airbag off. A
rear seat is the safest place for a child.
■Protecting Smaller Children
1Protecting Smaller Children
Educate yourself about the laws and regulations
regarding child seat use where you are driving, and
follow the child seat manufacturer’s instructions.
Many experts recommend use of a rear-facing seat
for a child up to two years old if the child’s height and
weight are appropriate for a rear-facing seat.
3
WARNING
Placing a forward-facing child seat in the
front seat can result in serious injury or
death if the front airbag inflates.
If you must place a forward-facing child
seat in front, move the vehicle seat as far
back as possible, and properly restrain the
child.
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 60 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
Continued 61
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
Safe Driving
Most child seats are LATCH-compatible (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren).
Some have a rigid-type connector while others have a flexible-type connector. Both
are equally easy to use. Some existing and previously owned child seats can only be
installed using the seat belt. Whichever type you choose, follow the child seat
manufacturer’s use and care instructions including recommended expiration dates
as well as the instructions in this manual. Proper installation is key to maximizing
your child’s safety.
In seating positions and vehicles not equipped with LATCH, a LATCH-compatible
child seat can be installed using the seat belt and a top tether for added security.
This is because all child seats are required to be designed so that they can be secured
with a lap belt or the lap part of a lap/shoulder belt. In addition, the child seat
manufacturer may advise that a seat belt be used to attach a LATCH-compatible seat
once a child reaches a specified weight. Please read the child seat owner’s manual
for proper installation instructions.
■Important consideration when selecting a child seat
Make sure the child seat meets the following three requirements:
•The child seat is the correct type and size for the child.
•The child seat is the correct type for the seating position.
•The child seat is compliant with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or
Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.
■Selecting a Child Seat
1Selecting a Child Seat
Installation of a LATCH-compatible child seat is
simple.
LATCH-compatible child seats have been developed
to simplify the installation process and reduce the
likelihood of injuries caused by incorrect installation.
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 61 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
62
Safe Driving
A LATCH-compatible child seat can be installed in either of the two outer rear seats.
A child seat is attached to the lower anchors with either the rigid or flexible type of
connectors.
1. Locate the lower anchors under the marks.
2. Raise the head restraint to its highest
position.
3. Place the child seat on the vehicle seat, then
attach the child seat to the lower anchors
according to the instructions that came
with the child seat.
uWhen installing the child seat, make sure
that the lower anchors are not
obstructed by the seat belt or any other
object.
■Installing a LATCH-Compatible Child Seat
1Installing a LATCH-Compatible Child Seat
For your child’s safety, when using a child seat
installed using the LATCH system, make sure that the
child seat is properly secured to the vehicle. A child
seat that is not properly secured will not adequately
protect a child in a crash and may cause injury to the
child or other vehicle occupants.
3
WARNING
Never attach two child seats to the same
anchor. In a collision, one anchor may not
be strong enough to hold two child seat
attachments and may break, causing
serious injury or death.
Marks
Rigid Type
Lower Anchors
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 62 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
Continued 63
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
Safe Driving
4. Remove the cargo cover*.
2Cargo Cover P. 161
5. Route the tether strap between the head
restraint legs, and secure the tether strap
hook to the anchor.
Make sure the strap is not twisted.
6. Tighten the tether strap as instructed by the
child seat manufacturer.
7. Make sure the child seat is firmly secured by
rocking it forward and back and side to
side; little movement should be felt.
8. Make sure any unused seat belt that a child
can reach is buckled, the lockable retractor
is activated, and the belt is fully retracted
and locked.
9. Reinstall the cargo cover*.
Flexible Type
1Installing a LATCH-Compatible Child Seat
Installing a LATCH-compatible child seat in the
rear center seat
Each outer rear seat is equipped with a pair of lower
anchors which are used to secure a LATCH-
compatible child seat. The rear center seat, however,
is not equipped with anchors of any kind.
The inner and outer anchors are spaced apart at a
standard distance of 11 inches (280 mm). The
distance between the two inner anchors is 14.1
inches (357.8 mm).
LATCH-compatible restraint systems that are fitted
with rigid-type attachments cannot be installed in the
rear center seat. However, a system fitted with
flexible-type attachments can be installed in the
center seat, provided that the manufacturer’s
instructions for that system permit the use of the
inner anchors with the stated spacing.
Before seating a child, make sure that the system is
properly attached to both the lower anchors and
tether anchors.
3
WARNING
Do not use the lower inner anchors of the
outer rear seats to secure a LATCH-
compatible child seat to the rear center
seat, unless the manufacturer’s instructions
for that system permit the use of inner
anchors with the stated spacing.
Anchor
Tether Strap Hook
* Not available on all models
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 63 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
64
Safe Driving
A child seat can be installed with a lap/shoulder belt in any rear seat or, if absolutely
necessary, the front passenger seat.
1. Raise the head restraint to its highest
position.
2. Place the child seat on the vehicle seat.
3. Route the seat belt through the child seat
according to the seat manufacturer’s
instructions, and insert the latch plate into
the buckle.
uInsert the latch plate fully until it clicks.
4. Slowly pull the shoulder part of the belt all
the way out until it stops. This activates the
lockable retractor.
5. Let the seat belt completely wind up into
the retractor, then try to pull it out to make
sure the retractor is locked.
uIf you are able to pull the shoulder belt
out, the lockable retractor is not
activated. Pull the seat belt all the way
out, and repeat steps 4 – 5.
■Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt
1Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt
A child seat that is not properly secured will not
adequately protect a child in a crash and may cause
injury to the child or other vehicle occupants.
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 64 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
Continued 65
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
Safe Driving
6. Grab the shoulder part of the seat belt near
the buckle, and pull up to remove any slack
from the lap part of the belt.
uWhen doing this, place your weight on
the child seat and push it into the vehicle
seat.
7. Make sure the child seat is firmly secured by
rocking it forward and back and side to
side; less than one inch of movement
should occur near the seat belt.
8. Make sure any unused seat belt that a child
can reach is buckled, the lockable retractor
is activated, and the belt is fully retracted
and locked.
1Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt
To deactivate a lockable retractor, release the buckle
and allow the seat belt to wind up all the way.
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 65 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
66
Safe Driving
Two tether anchorage points are provided
behind the rear outer seating positions and
one in the ceiling for the rear center. If you
have a child restraint system that comes with
a tether but can be installed with a seat belt,
the tether may be used for additional security.
■Adding Security with a Tether
1Adding Security with a Tether
Since a tether can provide additional security to the
lap/shoulder seat belt installation, we recommend
using a tether whenever one is available.
Tether
Anchorage
Points
Tether
Anchorage
Point
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 66 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
67
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
Safe Driving
■Using an outer anchor
1. Remove the cargo cover*.
2Cargo Cover P. 161
2. Put the outer head restraint to its upper
most position, then route the tether strap
through the head restraint legs, and secure
the tether strap hook to the anchor.
Make sure the strap is not twisted.
3. Tighten the tether strap as instructed by the
child seat manufacturer.
4. Reinstall the cargo cover*.
■Using the center anchor
1. Lower the head restraint to its lowest
position.
2. Open the anchor cover.
3. Route the tether strap over the head
restraint.
Make sure the strap is not twisted.
4. Secure the tether strap hook to the anchor.
5. Tighten the tether strap as instructed by the
child seat manufacturer.
Anchor
Tether Strap Hook
Anchor
Anchor Cover
* Not available on all models
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 67 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
68
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Larger Children
Safe Driving
Safety of Larger Children
The following pages give instructions on how to check proper seat belt fit, what kind
of booster seat to use if one is needed, and important precautions for a child who
must sit in front.
When a child is too big for a child seat, secure the child in a rear seat using the lap/
shoulder seat belt. Have the child sit upright and all the way back, then answer the
following questions.
■Checklist
•Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over
the edge of the seat?
•Does the shoulder belt cross between the
child’s neck and arm?
•Is the lap part of the seat belt as low as
possible, touching the child’s thighs?
•Will the child be able to stay seated like this
for the whole trip?
If you answer yes to all these questions, the child is ready to wear the lap/shoulder
seat belt correctly. If you answer no to any question, the child needs to ride on a
booster seat until the seat belt fits properly without a booster seat.
■Protecting Larger Children
■Checking Seat Belt Fit
1Safety of Larger Children
3
WARNING
Allowing a child age 12 or under to sit in
front can result in injury or death if the
passenger’s front airbag inflates.
If a larger child must ride in front, move the
vehicle seat as far to the rear as possible,
have the child sit up properly and wear the
seat belt properly, using a booster seat if
needed.
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 68 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
69
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Larger Children
Safe Driving
If a lap/shoulder seat belt cannot be used
properly, position the child in a booster seat in
a rear seating position. For the child’s safety,
check that the child meets the booster seat
manufacturer’s recommendations.
Your vehicle has a rear seat where children can be properly restrained. If you ever
have to carry a group of children, and a child must ride in front:
•Make sure you read and fully understand the instructions and safety information
in this manual.
•Move the front passenger seat as far back as possible.
•Have the child sit upright and well back in the seat.
•Check that the seat belt is properly positioned so that the child is secure in the
seat.
■Monitoring child passengers
We strongly recommend that you keep an eye on child passengers. Even older, more
mature children sometimes need to be reminded to fasten their seat belts and sit up
properly.
■Booster Seats
1Booster Seats
When installing a booster seat, make sure to read the
instructions that came with it, and install the seat
accordingly.
There are high- and low-type booster seats. Choose a
booster seat that allows the child to wear the seat
belt correctly.
Some U.S. states, and Canadian provinces and
territories require children to use a booster seat until
they reach a given age or weight (e.g. six years or 60
lbs). Be sure to check current laws in the state or
province, or territory where you intend to drive.
■Protecting Larger Children-Final Checks
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 69 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
70
Safe Driving
Exhaust Gas Hazard
Carbon Monoxide Gas
The engine exhaust from this vehicle contains carbon monoxide, a colorless,
odorless, and highly toxic gas. As long as you properly maintain your vehicle, carbon
monoxide gas will not get into the interior.
■Have the exhaust system inspected for leaks whenever
•The exhaust system is making an unusual noise.
•The exhaust system may have been damaged.
•The vehicle is raised for an oil change.
When you operate a vehicle with the tailgate open, airflow can pull exhaust gas into
the interior and create a hazardous condition. If you must drive with the tailgate
open, open all the windows and set the heating and cooling system*/climate control
system* as shown below.
1. Select the fresh air mode.
2. Select the mode.
3. Set the fan speed to high.
4. Set the temperature control to a comfortable setting.
Adjust the heating and cooling system*/climate control system* in the same manner
if you sit in your parked vehicle with the engine running.
1Carbon Monoxide Gas
An enclosed area such as a garage can quickly fill up
with carbon monoxide gas.
Do not run the engine with the garage door closed.
Even when the garage door is open, drive out of the
garage immediately after starting the engine.
3
WARNING
Carbon monoxide gas is toxic.
Breathing it can cause unconsciousness and
even kill you.
Avoid any enclosed areas or activities that
expose you to carbon monoxide.
* Not available on all models
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 70 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
71
Safe Driving
Safety Labels
Label Locations
These labels are in the locations shown. They warn you of potential hazards that can cause serious injury or death. Read these labels
carefully.
If a label comes off or becomes hard to read (except for the U.S. dashboard label which may be removed by the owner), contact a dealer
for a replacement.
U.S. models only
Dashboard
Sun Visor
U.S. models Canadian models
Radiator Cap
Sun Visor
U.S. models only
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 71 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
72
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 72 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
73
Instrument Panel
This chapter describes the buttons, indicators, and gauges that are used while driving.
Indicators ............................................ 74
Information Display Warning and
Information Messages...................... 87
Gauges and Displays
Gauges.............................................. 90
Information Display............................ 91
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 73 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
74
Instrument Panel
Indicators
*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation
Brake System
Indicator
(Red)
●Comes on for a few seconds when you
turn the ignition switch to ON (w*1, then
goes off.
●Comes on when the brake fluid level is
low.
●Comes on if there is a problem with the
brake system.
●Comes on while driving - Check the brake fluid
level.
2What to do when the indicator comes on while
driving P. 467
●Comes on along with the ABS indicator - Have
your vehicle checked by a dealer.
2If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On
P. 467
Brake System
Indicator
(Amber)
●Comes on for a few seconds when you
turn the ignition switch to ON (w*1, then
goes off.
●Comes on if there is a problem with a
system related to braking other than the
conventional brake system.
●Comes on if there is a problem with an
automatic brake hold system.
●Stays on constantly - Have your vehicle checked
by a dealer.
U.S.
Canada
(Red)
U.S.
Canada
(Amber)
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 74 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
75
uuIndicatorsu
Continued
Instrument Panel
*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation
Electric Parking
Brake Indicator
●Comes on for a few seconds when you
turn the ignition switch to ON (w*1, then
goes off if the parking brake has been
released.
●Comes on when the parking brake is
applied, and goes off when it is released.
●Comes on for about 15 seconds when
you pull the electric parking brake switch
while the ignition switch is in LOCK (0*1.
●Stays on for about 15 seconds when you
turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0*1
while the electric parking brake is set.
●Blinks and the electric parking brake system
indicator comes on at the same time - There is a
problem with the electric parking brake system. The
parking brake may not be set.
Electric Parking
Brake System
Indicator
●Comes on for a few seconds when you
turn the ignition switch to ON (w*1, then
goes off.
●Comes on if there is a problem with the
electric parking brake system.
●Comes on while driving - Avoid using the parking
brake and have your vehicle checked by a dealer
immediately.
2If the Electric Parking Brake System Indicator
Comes On P. 468
Automatic Brake
Hold System
Indicator
●Comes on for a few seconds when you
turn the ignition switch to ON (w*1, then
goes off.
●Comes on when the automatic brake
hold system is on.
2Automatic Brake Hold P. 380
U.S.
Canada
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 75 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
76
uuIndicatorsu
Instrument Panel
*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation
Automatic Brake
Hold Indicator
●Comes on for a few seconds when you
turn the ignition switch to ON (w*1, then
goes off.
●Comes on when the automatic brake
hold is activated. 2Automatic Brake Hold P. 380
Brake Depressing
Indicator
●Comes on for a few seconds when you
turn the ignition switch to ON (w*1, then
goes off.
●Comes on when the electric parking
brake switch is pressed without
depressing the brake pedal while the
electric parking brake is in operation.
●Comes on while driving - Press the electric
parking brake switch with the brake pedal
depressed.
2Parking Brake P. 377
●Comes on when the automatic brake
hold button is pressed without
depressing the brake pedal while the
automatic brake hold is in operation.
●Blinks if the automatic brake hold is
automatically canceled while it is in
operation. The beeper sounds.
●Comes on while driving - Press the automatic
brake hold button with the brake pedal depressed.
2Automatic Brake Hold P. 380
●Immediately depress the brake pedal.
U.S.
Canada
Continuously
variable
transmission
models
Manual
transmission
models
Electric Parking Brake System
Automatic Brake Hold System
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 76 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
77
uuIndicatorsu
Continued
Instrument Panel
*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation
Low Oil Pressure
Indicator
●Comes on when you turn the ignition
switch to ON (w*1, and goes off when
the engine starts.
●Comes on when the engine oil pressure
is low.
●Comes on while driving - Immediately stop in a
safe place.
2If the Low Oil Pressure Indicator Comes On
P. 465
Malfunction
Indicator Lamp
●Comes on when you turn the ignition
switch to ON (w*1, and goes off either
when the engine starts or after several
seconds if the engine did not start. If
“readiness codes” have not been set, it
blinks five times before it goes off.
●Comes on if there is a problem with the
emissions control system.
●Blinks when a misfire in the engine’s
cylinders is detected.
●Readiness codes are part of the on board diagnostics
for the emissions control systems.
2Testing of Readiness Codes P. 485
●Comes on while driving - Have your vehicle
checked by a dealer.
●Blinks while driving - Stop in a safe place where
there are no flammable objects. Stop the engine for
10 minutes or more, and wait for it to cool down.
Then, take your vehicle to a dealer.
2If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On or
Blinks P. 466
Charging System
Indicator
●Comes on when you turn the ignition
switch to ON (w*1, and goes off when
the engine starts.
●Comes on when the battery is not
charging.
●Comes on while driving - Turn off the heating
and cooling system*/climate control system* and
rear defogger in order to reduce electricity
consumption.
2If the Charging System Indicator Comes On
P. 465
Shift Lever Position
Indicator*
●Indicates the current shift lever position.
2Shifting P. 348, 350
* Not available on all models
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 77 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
78
uuIndicatorsu
Instrument Panel
*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation
Transmission
Indicator*
●Blinks if the transmission system has a
problem.
●Blinks while driving - Avoid sudden starts and
acceleration and have your vehicle checked by a
dealer immediately.
M (7-speed manual
shift mode)
Indicator/Shift
Indicator*
●Comes on when 7-speed manual shift
mode is applied. 27-Speed Manual Shift Mode P. 352
Seat Belt Reminder
Indicator
●Comes on and the beeper sounds if you
are not wearing a seat belt when you
turn the ignition switch to ON (w*1.
●If the front passenger is not wearing a
seat belt, the indicator comes on a few
seconds later.
●Blinks while driving if either you or the
front passenger has not fastened a seat
belt. The beeper sounds and the
indicator blinks at regular intervals.
●The beeper stops and the indicator goes off when
you and the front passenger fasten their seat belts.
●Stays on after you or the front passenger has
fastened the seat belt - A detection error may
have occurred in the sensor. Have your vehicle
checked by a dealer.
2Seat Belt Reminder P. 36
Low Fuel Indicator
●Comes on when the fuel reserve is
running low (approximately 1.98 U.S.
gal./7.5 Liter left).
●Blinks if there is a problem with the fuel
gauge.
●Comes on - Refuel your vehicle as soon as possible.
●Blinks - Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
* Not available on all models
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 78 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
79
uuIndicatorsu
Continued
Instrument Panel
*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation
Anti-lock Brake
System (ABS)
Indicator
●Comes on for a few seconds when you
turn the ignition switch to ON (w*1, then
goes off.
●If it comes on at any other time, there is
a problem with the ABS.
●Stays on constantly - Have your vehicle checked
by a dealer. With this indicator on, your vehicle still
has normal braking ability but no anti-lock function.
2Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) P. 383
Supplemental
Restraint System
Indicator
●Comes on for a few seconds when you
turn the ignition switch to ON (w*1, then
goes off.
●Comes on if a problem with any of the
following is detected:
-Supplemental restraint system
-Side airbag system
-Side curtain airbag system
-Seat belt tensioner
●Stays on constantly or does not come on at all
- Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
High Temperature
Indicator
(Red)
●Comes on for a few seconds when you
turn the ignition switch to ON (w*1, then
goes off.
●Blinks when the engine coolant
temperature goes up, and stays on if the
temperature continues to rise.
●Goes off, then comes on in blue when the engine
coolant temperature is low.
●Blinks while driving - Drive slowly to prevent
overheating.
●Stays on while driving - Immediately stop in a
safe place and allow the engine to cool.
2Overheating P. 463
Low Temperature
Indicator
(Blue)
●Comes on while the engine coolant
temperature is low, then goes off once
the engine reaches normal operating
temperature.
●If the indicator stays on after the engine has reached
normal operating temperature, there may be a
problem with the temperature sensors. Have your
vehicle inspected by a dealer.
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 79 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
80
uuIndicatorsu
Instrument Panel
*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation
Vehicle Stability
Assist (VSA®) System
Indicator
●Comes on for a few seconds when you
turn the ignition switch to ON (w*1, then
goes off.
●Blinks when VSA® is active.
●Comes on if there is a problem with the
VSA® system or hill start assist system.
●Stays on constantly - Have your vehicle checked
by a dealer.
2Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA®), aka Electronic
Stability Control (ESC), System P. 368
Vehicle Stability
Assist (VSA®) OFF
Indicator
●Comes on for a few seconds when you
turn the ignition switch to ON (w*1, then
goes off.
●Comes on when you deactivate VSA®.
2VSA® On and Off P. 369
Door and Tailgate
Open Indicator
●Comes on for a few seconds if you turn
the ignition switch to ON (w*1, then
goes off.
●Comes on if any door or the tailgate is
not completely closed.
●The beeper sounds and the indicator
comes on if any door or the tailgate is
opened while driving.
●Goes off when all doors and the tailgate are closed.
Electric Power
Steering (EPS)
System Indicator
●Comes on when you turn the ignition
switch to ON (w*1, and goes off when
the engine starts.
●Comes on if there is a problem with the
EPS system.
●Stays on constantly or does not come on at all
- Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
2If the Electric Power Steering (EPS) System
Indicator Comes On P. 467
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 80 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
81
uuIndicatorsu
Continued
Instrument Panel
*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation
Low Tire Pressure/
TPMS Indicator
●Comes on for a few seconds when you
turn the ignition switch to ON (w*1, then
goes off.
●May come on briefly if the ignition switch
is turned to ON (w*1 and the vehicle is
not moved within 45 seconds, to indicate
the calibration process is not yet
complete.
●Comes on and stays on when:
-One or more tires’ pressures are
determined to be significantly low.
-The system has not been calibrated.
●Comes on while driving - Stop in a safe place,
check tire pressures, and inflate the tire(s) if
necessary.
●Stays on after the tires are inflated to the
recommended pressures - The system needs to be
calibrated.
2TPMS Calibration P. 373
●Blinks for about one minute, and then
stays on if there is a problem with the
TPMS, or when a compact spare tire is
temporarily installed.
●Blinks and remains on - Have your vehicle
checked by a dealer. If the vehicle is fitted with a
compact spare, get your regular tire repaired or
replaced and put back on your vehicle as soon as
you can.
Smart Entry System
Indicator*
●Comes on for a few seconds when you
set the power mode to ON, then goes
off.
●Comes on as soon as a problem is
detected in the smart entry system or
push button starting system.
●Stays on constantly or does not come on at all
- Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
U.S.
models
only
* Not available on all models
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 81 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
82
uuIndicatorsu
Instrument Panel
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation
Starter System
Indicator*
●Comes on for a few seconds when you
set the power mode to ON, then goes off
when the engine starts.
●Comes on if the starter system has a
problem.
●As a temporary measure, press and hold the
ENGINE START/STOP button for up to 15 seconds
while pressing the brake pedal and clutch pedal
(manual transmission only), and manually start the
engine. Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
Turn Signal and
Hazard Warning
Indicators
●Blinks when you operate the turn signal
lever.
●Blink if you press the hazard warning
button.
●Does not blink or blinks rapidly - A turn signal
light bulb has blown. Change the bulb immediately.
2Replacing Light Bulbs P. 412, 415
High Beam Indicator
●Comes on when the high beam
headlights are on. —
Lights On Indicator
●Comes on whenever the light switch is
on, or in AUTO* when the exterior lights
are on.
●If you remove the key from the ignition switch*, or
set the power mode* to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) while
the exterior lights are on, a chime sounds when the
driver’s door is opened.
Fog Light Indicator*
●Comes on when the fog lights are on. —
U.S.
Canada
* Not available on all models
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 82 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
83
uuIndicatorsu
Continued
Instrument Panel
*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation
Immobilizer System
Indicator
●Comes on briefly when you turn the
ignition switch to ON (w*1, then goes
off.
●Comes on if the immobilizer system
cannot recognize the key information.
●Blinks -
You cannot start the engine. Turn the ignition
switch to LOCK (0, pull the key out, and then insert
the key and turn it to ON (w again.
You cannot start the engine. Set the power mode to
VEHICLE OFF (LOCK), then select the ON mode
again.
●Repeatedly blinks - The system may be
malfunctioning. Have your vehicle checked by a
dealer.
●Do not attempt to alter this system or add other
devices to it. Electrical problems can occur.
ECON Mode
Indicator*
●Comes on for a few seconds when you
turn the ignition switch to ON (w*1, then
goes off.
●Comes on when you press the ECON
button.
2ECON Button* P. 357
Models without smart entry system
Models with smart entry system
* Not available on all models
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 83 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
84
uuIndicatorsu
Instrument Panel
*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation
Security System
Alarm Indicator
●Blinks when the security system alarm
has been set. 2Security System Alarm P. 118
CRUISE MAIN
Indicator
●Comes on when you press the CRUISE
button. 2Cruise Control P. 358
CRUISE CONTROL
Indicator
●Comes on if you have set a speed for
cruise control. 2Cruise Control P. 358
Washer Level
Indicator*
●Comes on when the washer fluid gets
low.
●Refill washer fluid.
2Refilling Window Washer Fluid P. 410
Maintenance
Minder Indicator
●Comes on when the scheduled
maintenance is due soon. 2Maintenance MinderTM P. 395
All-Wheel Drive
(AWD) System
Indicator*
●Comes on for a few seconds when you
turn the ignition switch to ON (w*1, then
goes off.
●Comes on if there is a problem with the
AWD.
●Blinks when the AWD system is
overheated. The system is inactive.
●Stays on constantly - the engine drives only the
front wheels in this state. Have your vehicle checked
by a dealer.
●Blinks while driving - the engine drives only the
front wheels in this state. Stop in a safe place, shift
to (P, and idle the engine until the indicator goes
off. If the indicator does not stop blinking, take your
vehicle to a dealer.
2Real Time AWD with Intelligent Control
SystemTM* P. 372
Indicator
* Not available on all models
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 84 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
85
uuIndicatorsu
Continued
Instrument Panel
*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message
Forward
Collision
Warning
(FCW)
Indicator*
●Comes on for a few seconds
when you turn the ignition
switch to ON (w*1, then goes
off.
●Comes on if there is a problem
with the FCW system.
●Comes on when you have
customized FCW to turn off.
●Stays on constantly without FCW off - Have
your vehicle checked by a dealer.
●Blinks when the system detects
a likely collision with a vehicle in
front of you. The beeper
sounds.
●Blinks while driving - Take appropriate action to
prevent a collision (apply the brakes, change lanes,
etc.). —
●Comes on when the FCW
system shuts itself off.
●Stays on - The temperature inside the FCW
system is too high. The system activates when the
temperature inside the system cools down.
2Automatic shutoff P. 363
●Stays on - The area around the camera is blocked
by dirt, mud, etc. Stop your vehicle in a safe place,
and wipe it off with a soft cloth.
●Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if the
indicator and message come back on after you
cleaned the area around the camera.
2Automatic shutoff P. 363
* Not available on all models
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 85 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
86
uuIndicatorsu
Instrument Panel
*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message
Lane
Departure
Warning
(LDW)
Indicator*
●Comes on for a few seconds
when you turn the ignition
switch to ON (w*1, then goes
off.
●Comes on if there is a problem
with the LDW system.
●Stays on constantly - Have your vehicle checked
by a dealer.
●Blinks when your vehicle is too
close to the lane lines. The
beeper sounds.
●Blinks while driving - Take appropriate action to
keep your vehicle within the lane lines. —
●Comes on when the LDW
system shuts itself off.
●Stays on - The temperature inside the LDW
camera is too high.
The system activates when the temperature inside
the camera cools down.
2LDW Camera P. 366
●Stays on - The area around the camera is blocked
by dirt, mud, etc. Stop your vehicle in a safe place,
and wipe it off with a soft cloth.
●Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if the
indicator and message come back on after you
cleaned the area around the camera.
2LDW Camera P. 366
* Not available on all models
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 86 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
87
uuIndicatorsuInformation Display Warning and Information Messages
Continued
Instrument Panel
Information Display Warning and Information Messages
The following messages appear only on the information display.
Message Condition Explanation
●Appears when the fuel fill cap is loose or is not
installed.
2Check Fuel Cap Message P. 466
●Appears when there is a problem with the sensor on
the battery.
●Stays on constantly - Have your vehicle checked
by a dealer.
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 87 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
88
uuIndicatorsuInformation Display Warning and Information Messages
Instrument Panel
Message Condition Explanation
●Appears if you push the ENGINE START/STOP
button to turn the engine off without the shift lever
in (P.
●Push the ENGINE START/STOP button twice after
moving the shift lever to (P.
●Move the shift lever to (P.
●Appears when the power mode is in ACCESSORY.
—
●Appears when the steering wheel is locked.
●Move the steering wheel left and right while
pressing the ENGINE START/STOP button at the
same time.
●Appears when you close the door with the power
mode in ON without the smart entry remote inside
the vehicle.
●Disappears when you bring the smart entry remote
back inside the vehicle and close the door.
●Appears when the smart entry remote’s battery
becomes weak.
●Replace the battery as soon as possible.
2Replacing the Button Battery P. 435
Models with smart entry system
Canadian models with continuously variable transmission
U.S. models with continuously variable transmission
U.S. models with manual transmission
Canadian models
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 88 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
89
uuIndicatorsuInformation Display Warning and Information Messages
Instrument Panel
Message Condition Explanation
●Appears when the warning distance setting has
been changed.
2To change vehicle distance and to turn the
system on and off P. 363
Models with FCW
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 89 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
90
Instrument Panel
Gauges and Displays
Gauges
Gauges include the speedometer, tachometer and related indicators. They are
displayed when the ignition switch is in ON (w*1.
Displays your driving speed in mph and km/h.
Shows the number of engine revolutions per minute.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.
■Speedometer
■Tachometer
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 90 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
91
uuGauges and DisplaysuInformation Display
Continued
Instrument Panel
Information Display
The information display shows the fuel gauge, odometer, trip meter, engine oil life
and maintenance service item codes, and other gauges.
Press the (select/reset) knob to change the display.
Each time you press the (select/reset) knob, the information display changes as follows:
■Switching the Display
1Switching the Display
Some of the items on the information display also
appear on the audio/information screen. They also
change along with the information display changes
while the fuel consumption is shown.
Models with display audio system
Instant Fuel Economy
Clock
Odometer
Trip Meter A
Outside Temperature
Fuel Gauge
Instant Fuel Economy
Clock
Range
Trip Meter A
Outside Temperature
Fuel Gauge
Instant Fuel Economy
Clock
Average Fuel Economy A
Trip Meter A
Outside Temperature
Fuel Gauge
Instant Fuel Economy
Clock
Average Fuel Economy B
Trip Meter B
Outside Temperature
Fuel Gauge
Instant Fuel Economy
Clock
Engine Oil Life
Fuel Gauge
Select/Reset Knob
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 91 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
uuGauges and DisplaysuInformation Display
92
Instrument Panel
Shows the instant fuel economy as a bar graph in mpg (U.S.) or l/100 km (Canada).
Shows the total number of miles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada) that your vehicle has
accumulated.
Shows the total number of miles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada) driven since the last
reset. TRIP A and B can be used to measure two separate trips.
■Resetting a trip meter
To reset a trip meter, display it, then press and hold the knob. The trip meter is
reset to 0.0.
Shows the estimated distance you can travel on the remaining fuel. This distance is
estimated from the fuel economy of your trips in the past.
Shows the estimated average fuel economy of each trip meter in mpg (U.S.) or l/100
km (Canada). The display is updated at set intervals. When a trip meter is reset, the
average fuel economy is also reset.
■Instant Fuel Economy
■Odometer
■Trip Meter
■Range
■Average Fuel Economy
1Trip Meter
Switch between trip meter A and trip meter B by
pressing the knob.
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 92 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
Continued 93
uuGauges and DisplaysuInformation Display
Instrument Panel
Shows the outside temperature in Fahrenheit (U.S.) or Celsius (Canada).
■Adjusting the outside temperature indicator
Adjust the temperature reading up to ± 5°F or ± 3°C if the temperature reading
seems incorrect.
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (w*1.
2. Press and hold the (Select/Reset) knob for 10 seconds or more while the
outside temperature is shown on the information display.
uThe information display goes into temperature adjustment mode. The display
starts showing from -5°F to +5°F (U.S.) or -3°C to +3°C (Canada).
3. Release the knob when the right adjustment amount is shown.
uThe adjustment is complete.
Shows the remaining oil life and Maintenance MinderTM.
2Maintenance MinderTM P. 395
Displays the amount of fuel left in the fuel tank.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.
■Outside Temperature
■Engine Oil Life and Maintenance Items
■Fuel Gauge
1Outside Temperature
The temperature sensor is in the front bumper.
Road heat and exhaust from another vehicle can
affect the temperature reading when your vehicle
speed is less than 19 mph (30 km/h).
It may take several minutes for the display to be
updated after the temperature reading has stabilized.
When the engine oil life is shown on the information
display, you cannot adjust the outside temperature.
Push the knob to select the other display.
1Fuel Gauge
NOTICE
You should refuel when the reading approaches .
Running out of fuel can cause the engine to misfire,
damaging the catalytic converter.
The actual amount of remaining fuel may differ from
the fuel gauge reading.
E
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 93 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
94
uuGauges and DisplaysuInformation Display
Instrument Panel
The center ring illumination can be changed to a color of your choice. With the
ignition switch in the ACCESSORY (q or LOCK (0*1 position and with the meter
ring illuminated, press the select/reset knob. Each time the knob is pressed, the
colors change in the following order:
White Blue Purple Pink Red Amber Yellow
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.
■Changing Ring Color
Select/Reset Knob
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 94 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
95
Controls
This chapter explains how to operate the various controls necessary for driving.
Clock.................................................................... 96
Locking and Unlocking the Doors
Key Types and Functions................................... 98
Low Smart Entry Remote Signal Strength*...... 100
Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside ... 101
Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside.. 107
Childproof Door Locks.................................... 110
Auto Door Locking/Unlocking......................... 111
Customizing the Auto Door Locking/Unlocking
Setting ......................................................... 112
Opening and Closing the Tailgate .................. 115
Using the Tailgate Release Button................... 116
Security System
Immobilizer System......................................... 118
Security System Alarm .................................... 118
Opening and Closing the Windows................ 121
Opening and Closing the Moonroof*............. 123
Operating the Switches Around the Steering
Wheel
Ignition Switch.......................................... 124
ENGINE START/STOP Button ..................... 125
Ignition Switch and Power Mode Comparison ...128
Turn Signals.............................................. 129
Light Switches .......................................... 129
Fog Lights*............................................... 132
Daytime Running Lights ............................ 133
Wipers and Washers ................................. 134
Brightness Control .................................... 136
Defogger/Heated Door Mirror
*
/Heated Windshield
*
... 137
Adjusting the Steering Wheel ................... 139
Models without smart entry system
Models with smart entry system
Adjusting the Mirrors
Interior Rearview Mirror.................................. 140
Power Door Mirrors........................................ 141
Adjusting the Seats
Front Seats ..................................................... 142
Head Restraints .............................................. 144
Maintain a Proper Sitting Position................... 147
Rear Seats ...................................................... 148
Armrest.......................................................... 151
Interior Lights/Interior Convenience Items
Interior Lights ................................................. 152
Interior Convenience Items ............................. 154
Heating and Cooling System*
Using Vents, Heating and A/C ........................ 163
Climate Control System*
Using Automatic Climate Control ................... 167
Automatic Climate Control Sensors ................ 175
* Not available on all models
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 95 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
96
Controls
Clock
Adjusting the Clock
You can adjust the time in the clock display with the ignition switch is in ON (w*1.
■Display audio system*
1. Select the (HOME) icon, then select
Settings.
2. Select System, Clock, then Clock
Adjustment.
3. Adjust the hours and minutes by selecting
/.
4. Select OK to set the time.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.
■Adjusting the Time
Models without navigation system
1Adjusting the Time
The clock in the information display is automatically
adjusted along with the audio system’s clock display.
The clock is automatically updated through the
navigation system, so the time does not need to be
adjusted.
You can customize the clock display to show the 12
hour clock or 24 hour clock.
2Customized Features P. 252
Models with navigation system
Models without navigation system
1Display audio system*
You can turn the clock display on and off.
2Customized Features P. 252
3
4
* Not available on all models
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 96 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
97
uuClockuAdjusting the Clock
Controls
■Color audio system*
1. Press and hold the MENU/CLOCK button.
uAdjust Clock is selected.
2. Rotate to change hour, then press .
3. Rotate to change minute, then press
.
4. To enter the selection, rotate and select
Set, then press .
1Color audio system*
These indications are used to show how to operate
the LIST/SELECT (List/Selector) knob.
Rotate to select.
Press to enter.
You can also select Adjust Clock by pressing the
MENU/CLOCK button.
Rotate to select Adjust Clock, then press .
* Not available on all models
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 97 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
98
Controls
Locking and Unlocking the Doors
Key Types and Functions
This vehicle comes with the following keys:
Use the smart entry remote to start and stop
the engine, and to lock and unlock all the
doors and tailgate. You can also use the smart
entry system to lock and unlock the doors and
tailgate.
Use the key to start and stop the engine, and
to lock and unlock all the doors and tailgate.
You can also use the remote transmitter to
lock and unlock the doors and tailgate.
■Keys
1Key Types and Functions
All the keys have an immobilizer system. The
immobilizer system helps to protect against vehicle
theft.
2Immobilizer System P. 118
The keys contain precision electronics.
Adhere to the following advice to prevent damage to
the electronics:
•Do not leave the keys in direct sunlight, or in
locations with high temperature or high humidity.
•Do not drop the keys or set heavy objects on them.
•Keep the keys away from liquids.
•Do not take the keys apart except for replacing the
battery.
If the circuits in the keys are damaged, the engine
may not start, and the remote transmitter/smart entry
system* may not work.
If the keys do not work properly, have them
inspected by a dealer.
Ignition Key
with Remote
Transmitter*
Smart
Entry
Remote*
Models with smart entry system
Models without smart entry system
* Not available on all models
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 98 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
99
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuKey Types and Functions
Controls
■Smart entry remote*
The built-in key can be used to lock/unlock the
doors when the smart entry remote battery
becomes weak and the power door lock/
unlock operation is disabled.
To remove the built-in key, slide the release
knob and then pull out the key. To reinstall
the built-in key, push the built-in key into the
smart entry remote until it clicks.
Contains a number that you will need if you
purchase a replacement key.
Release Knob
Built-in Key
■Key Number Tag
1Key Number Tag
Keep the key number tag separate from the key in a
safe place outside of your vehicle.
If you wish to purchase an additional key, contact a
dealer.
If you lose your key and you cannot start the engine,
contact a dealer.
* Not available on all models
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 99 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
100
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLow Smart Entry Remote Signal Strength*
Controls
Low Smart Entry Remote Signal Strength*
The vehicle transmits radio waves to locate the smart entry remote when locking/
unlocking the doors and tailgate, or to start the engine.
In the following cases, locking/unlocking the doors and tailgate, or starting the
engine may be inhibited or operation may be unstable:
•Strong radio waves are being transmitted by nearby equipment.
•You are carrying the smart entry remote together with telecommunications
equipment, laptop computers, cell phones, or wireless devices.
•A metallic object is touching or covering the smart entry remote.
1Low Smart Entry Remote Signal Strength*
Communication between the smart entry remote and
the vehicle consumes the smart entry remote’s
battery.
Battery life is about two years, but this varies
depending on regularity of use.
The battery is consumed whenever the smart entry
remote is receiving strong radio waves. Avoid placing
it near electrical appliances such as televisions and
personal computers.
* Not available on all models
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 100 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
101
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside
Continued
Controls
Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside
When you carry the smart entry remote, you
can lock/unlock the doors and the tailgate.
You can lock/unlock the doors and the
tailgate within a radius of about 32 inches (80
cm) of the outside door or tailgate outer
handle.
■Locking the doors and tailgate
Press the door lock button on the front door
or the tailgate.
uSome exterior lights flash; the beeper
sounds; all the doors and tailgate lock;
and the security system sets.
■Using the Smart Entry with Push Button Start System*
1Using the Smart Entry with Push Button Start System*
•Do not leave the smart entry remote in the vehicle
when you get out. Carry it with you.
•Even if you are not carrying the smart entry remote,
you can lock/unlock the doors and the tailgate
while someone else with the remote is within
range.
•The door may be unlocked if the door handle is
covered with water in heavy rain or in a car wash if
the smart entry remote is within range.
•If you grip a front door handle wearing gloves, the
door sensor may be slow to respond or may not
respond by unlocking the doors.
•After locking the door, wait at least two seconds
before unlocking it by gripping the handle.
•The door might not open if you pull it immediately
after gripping the door handle. Grip the handle
again and confirm that the door is unlocked before
pulling the handle.
•Even within the 32 inches (80 cm) radius, you may
not be able to lock/unlock the doors and the
tailgate with the smart entry remote if it is above or
below the outside handle.
•The smart entry remote may not operate if it is too
close to the door and door glass.
If the distance at which the remote transmitter works
varies, the battery is probably low. Replace the
button battery as soon as possible.
If the LED does not come on when you press a
button, the battery is dead.
2Replacing the Button Battery P. 435
Door Lock
Button
Lock Button
* Not available on all models
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 101 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside
102
Controls
■Unlocking the doors and tailgate
Grab the driver’s door handle:
uThe driver’s door unlocks.
uSome exterior lights flash twice and the
beeper sounds twice.
Grab the front passenger’s door handle:
uAll the doors and the tailgate unlock.
uSome exterior lights flash twice and the
beeper sounds twice.
Press the tailgate release button:
uThe tailgate unlocks.
uSome exterior lights flash twice and the
beeper sounds twice.
2Using the Tailgate Release Button
P. 116
1Using the Smart Entry with Push Button Start System*
If you do not open a door or the tailgate within 30
seconds of unlocking the vehicle, the doors will
automatically relock.
Tailgate Release
Button
* Not available on all models
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 102 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
Continued 103
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside
Controls
■Locking the doors
Press the lock button.
Once:
uSome exterior lights flash, all the doors
and tailgate lock, and the security system
sets.
Twice (within five seconds after the first
push):
uA beeper sounds and verifies the security
system is set.
■Using the Remote Transmitter
1Using the Remote Transmitter
If you do not open a door within 30 seconds of
unlocking the vehicle with the remote transmitter,
the doors will automatically relock.
If the interior light switch is in the door activated
position, the interior lights come on when you press
the unlock button.
No doors opened: The lights fade out after 30
seconds.
Doors relocked with the remote transmitter: The
lights go off immediately.
The remote transmitter uses low-power signals, so
the operating range may vary depending on the
surroundings.
The remote transmitter will not lock the vehicle when
a door is open.
The remote transmitter will not work when the key is
in the ignition switch.
You can lock or unlock doors using the remote
transmitter or smart entry system only when the
power mode is in VEHICLE OFF.
Models without smart entry system
Models with smart entry system
LED
Unlock Button
Lock Button
Unlock Button
LED
Lock Button
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 103 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside
104
Controls
■Unlocking the doors
Press the unlock button.
Once:
uSome exterior lights flash twice, and the driver’s door unlocks.
Twice:
uThe remaining doors and the tailgate unlock.
1Using the Remote Transmitter
If the distance at which the remote transmitter works
varies, the battery is probably low. Replace the
button battery as soon as possible.
If the LED does not come on when you press a
button, the battery is dead.
2Replacing the Button Battery P. 435
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 104 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
Continued 105
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside
Controls
If the lock or unlock button of the remote
does not work, use the key instead.
Fully insert the key and turn it.
■Locking/Unlocking the Doors Using a Key
1Locking/Unlocking the Doors Using a Key
If you unlock the doors with the key, the alarm
activates when you open the hood or move the shift
lever out of (P (continuously variable transmission
models).
When you lock the driver’s door with a key, all the
other doors and tailgate lock at the same time. When
unlocking, the driver’s door unlocks first. Turn the
key a second time within a few seconds to unlock the
remaining doors and the tailgate.
Lock Unlock
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 105 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside
106
Controls
■Locking the driver’s door
Push the lock tab forward a or push the
master door lock switch in the lock direction
b, and close the door.
■Locking the passengers’ doors
Push the lock tab forward and close the door.
■Lockout prevention system
The doors and the tailgate cannot be locked when the key is in the ignition switch,
and any door or the tailgate is open.
The doors and the tailgate cannot be locked when the smart entry remote is inside
the vehicle.
■Locking a Door Without Using a Key
1Locking a Door Without Using a Key
When you lock the driver’s door, all the other doors
and tailgate lock at the same time.
Make sure you have the key in your hand when you
lock the driver’s door, any of the other doors or the
tailgate, otherwise you may end up locking the key
inside the vehicle.
Models without smart entry system
Models with smart entry system
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 106 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
107
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside
Continued
Controls
Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside
■Locking a door
Push the lock tab forward.
■Unlocking a door
Pull the lock tab rearward.
■Using the Lock Tab
1Using the Lock Tab
When you lock the door using the lock tab on the
driver’s door, all of the other doors and the tailgate
lock at the same time.
When you unlock the door using the lock tab on the
driver’s door, only the driver’s door will unlock.
To Unlock
Lock Tab
To Lock
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 107 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside
108
Controls
Pull the front door inner handle.
uThe door unlocks and opens in one
motion.
Unlocking and opening the driver’s door from the inner handle unlocks all the other
doors.
To avoid all the doors to be unlocked, use the lock tab on the driver’s door to unlock,
then lock again before opening the door.
uThis setting works for one time only. If you do not want all the doors to unlock
all the time, customize the Auto Door Unlock setting to Off using the master
door lock switch.
2Auto Door Locking/Unlocking P. 111
■Unlocking Using the Front Door Inner Handle
1Unlocking Using the Front Door Inner Handle
The front door inner handles are designed to allow
front seat occupants to open the door in one motion.
However, this feature requires that front seat
occupants never pull a front door inner handle while
the vehicle is in motion.
Children should always ride in a rear seat where
childproof door locks are provided.
2Childproof Door Locks P. 110
Inner Handle
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 108 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
109
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside
Controls
Press the master door lock switch in as shown
to lock or unlock all the doors and the tailgate.
■Using the Master Door Lock Switch
1Using the Master Door Lock Switch
When you lock/unlock the driver’s door using the
master door lock switch, all the other doors and the
tailgate lock/unlock at the same time.
To Lock
To Unlock Master Door
Lock Switch
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 109 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
110
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuChildproof Door Locks
Controls
Childproof Door Locks
The childproof door locks prevent the rear doors from being opened from the inside
regardless of the position of the lock tab.
Slide the lever in the rear door to the lock
position, and close the door.
■When opening the door
Open the door using the outside door handle.
■Setting the Childproof Door Locks
1Childproof Door Locks
To open the door from the inside when the
childproof door lock is on, put the lock tab in the
unlock position, lower the rear window, put your
hand out of the window, and pull the outside door
handle.
Lock
Unlock
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 110 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
111
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuAuto Door Locking/Unlocking
Controls
Auto Door Locking/Unlocking
Your vehicle locks and unlocks all doors automatically when a certain condition is
met.
■Drive lock mode
All doors lock when the vehicle’s speed reaches about 10 mph (15 km/h).
■Driver’s door open mode
All doors and the tailgate unlock when the driver’s door is opened.
■Auto Door Locking
■Auto Door Unlocking
1Auto Door Locking/Unlocking
You can turn off or change to another auto door
locking/unlocking setting using the master door lock
switch.
2Customizing the Auto Door Locking/
Unlocking Setting P. 112
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 111 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
112
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuCustomizing the Auto Door Locking/Unlocking Setting
Controls
Customizing the Auto Door Locking/Unlocking Setting
You can customize the auto door locking/unlocking setting to your liking using the master door lock switch.
■Auto door locking
■Auto door unlocking
*1:Default setting
■List of the Auto Door Locking/Unlocking Customizable Options
Mode Description
Drive Lock Mode*1 All doors lock when the vehicle’s speed reaches about 10 mph (15 km/h).
Off The auto door locking is deactivated all the time.
Mode Description
Driver’s Door Open
Mode*1 All doors and the tailgate unlock when the driver’s door is opened.
Park Unlock Mode
All doors unlock when the shift lever is moved into (P with the brake pedal depressed.
Off The auto door unlocking is deactivated all the time.
Continuously variable
transmission models
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 112 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
113
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuCustomizing the Auto Door Locking/Unlocking Setting
Continued
Controls
*1: Default setting
*2: Models without smart entry system
*3: Models with smart entry system
■Customizing Flow for Auto Door Locking Options
Steps Drive Lock Mode*1 Off
1Apply the parking brake.
2The driver’s door must be closed at this stage. Open the driver’s door.
3Turn the ignition switch to ON (w*2.
Push the ENGINE START/STOP button twice without depressing the brake pedal*3.
4
Press and hold the front of the master door lock switch on the driver’s door. You will hear a click more than five seconds elapsed.
Release the switch.
5
Turn the ignition switch to OFF (0 within 20 seconds*2.
Push the ENGINE START/STOP button once without depressing the brake pedal*3.
uCustomization is completed.
uAll doors unlock and all turn signals blink three times.
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 113 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
114
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuCustomizing the Auto Door Locking/Unlocking Setting
Controls
*1: Default setting
*2: Models without smart entry system
*3: Models with smart entry system
■Customizing Flow for Auto Door Unlocking Options
Steps Driver Door Open Unlock Mode*1
Park Unlock Mode Off
1
Apply the parking brake.
Move the shift lever out of (P with the
brake pedal depressed.
Apply the parking brake.
Move the shift lever to (P.
Apply the parking brake.
Move the shift lever to (P.
2The driver’s door must be closed at this stage. Open the driver’s door.
3Turn the ignition switch to ON (w*2.
Push the ENGINE START/STOP button twice without depressing the brake pedal*3.
4
Press and hold the rear of the master door lock switch on the driver’s door. You will hear a click more than five seconds elapsed.
Release the switch.
5
Turn the ignition switch to OFF (0 within 20 seconds*2.
Push the ENGINE START/STOP button once without depressing the brake pedal*3.
uCustomization is completed.
uAll doors lock and all turn signals blink three times.
Continuously variable transmission models
Continuously variable transmission models
Continuously variable transmission models
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 114 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
115
Controls
Opening and Closing the Tailgate
Precautions for Opening/Closing the Tailgate
Always make sure individuals and objects are clear of the tailgate before opening or
closing it.
■Opening the tailgate
•Open the tailgate all the way.
uIf it is not fully opened, the tailgate may begin to close under its own weight.
•Be careful when it is windy. The wind may cause the tailgate to close.
■Closing the tailgate
Keep the tailgate closed while driving to:
uAvoid possible damage.
uPrevent exhaust gas from leaking into the vehicle.
2Carbon Monoxide Gas P. 70
1Precautions for Opening/Closing the Tailgate
Be careful not to hit your head on the tailgate or to
put your hands between the tailgate and the cargo
area when closing the tailgate.
When you are storing or picking up luggage from the
cargo area while the engine is idling, do not stand in
front of the exhaust pipe. You may get burned.
Do not allow any passenger in the cargo space. They
may get hurt during hard braking, a sudden
acceleration, or a crash.
3
WARNING
Anyone caught in the path of a tailgate
that is being opened or closed can be
seriously injured.
Make sure that all people are clear of the
tailgate before opening or closing it.
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 115 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
116
uuOpening and Closing the TailgateuUsing the Tailgate Release Button
Controls
Using the Tailgate Release Button
When all the doors are unlocked or press the
tailgate unlock button on the remote
transmitter, the tailgate is unlocked. Press the
tailgate release button and lift open the
tailgate.
To close the tailgate, grab the inner handle,
pull the tailgate down, and push it closed
from outside.
If you close the tailgate when all the doors are
locked, the tailgate locks automatically.
uSome exterior lights flash.
1Using the Tailgate Release Button
•Do not leave the smart entry remote in the vehicle
when you get out. Carry it with you.
•Even if you are not carrying the smart entry remote,
you can unlock the tailgate while someone else
with the remote is within range.
•Do not leave the smart entry remote inside the
cargo area and close the tailgate. The beeper
sounds and the tailgate cannot be closed.
If you are carrying the smart entry remote, you do not
have to unlock the tailgate before opening it.
Models with smart entry system
Tailgate
Release
Button
Inner
Handle
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 116 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
117
uuOpening and Closing the TailgateuUsing the Tailgate Release Button
Controls
Press the tailgate unlock button to unlock the
tailgate.
■Using the Remote Transmitter
1Using the Remote Transmitter
If you have unlocked and opened the tailgate using
the remote transmitter, or smart entry remote, when
closing, the tailgate locks automatically.
Tailgate
Unlock
Button
Tailgate
Unlock
Button
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 117 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
118
Controls
Security System
Immobilizer System
The immobilizer system prevents a key that has not been pre-registered from
starting the engine. Each key contains electronic transmitters that use electronic
signals to verify the key.
Pay attention to the following when inserting the key into the ignition switch or
pressing the ENGINE START/STOP button:
•Do not allow objects that emit strong radio waves near the ignition switch or the
ENGINE START/STOP button.
•Make sure the key is not covered by or touching a metal object.
•Do not bring a key from another vehicle’s immobilizer system near the ignition
switch or the ENGINE START/STOP button.
•Do not put the key near magnetic items. Electronic device, such as televisions and
audio systems emit strong magnetic fields. Note that even a key chain can
become magnetic.
Security System Alarm
The security system alarm activates when the tailgate, hood or doors are forcibly
opened. The alarm does not activate if the tailgate or doors are opened with the key,
remote transmitter or smart entry system.
However, the alarm goes off if a door is opened with the key and then the shift lever
is moved out of (P (continuously variable transmission models) or the hood is
opened before the ignition switch is turned to ON (w*1.
■When the security system alarm activates
The horn sounds intermittently and all of the exterior lights flash.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.
1Immobilizer System
NOTICE
Leaving the key in the vehicle can result in theft or
accidental movement of the vehicle.
Always take the key with you whenever you leave the
vehicle unattended.
Do not alter the system or add other devices to it.
Doing so may damage the system and make your
vehicle inoperable.
1Security System Alarm
The security alarm continues for a maximum of two
minutes until the security system alarm deactivates.
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 118 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
Continued 119
uuSecurity SystemuSecurity System Alarm
Controls
■To deactivate the security system alarm
Unlock the vehicle using the remote transmitter or smart entry remote, or turn the
ignition switch to ON (w*1. The system, along with the horn and flashing lights, is
deactivated.
■Setting the security system alarm
The security system alarm automatically sets when the following conditions have
been met:
•The ignition switch is in LOCK (0*1, and the key has been removed from the
ignition switch.
•The hood is closed.
•All doors and the tailgate are locked from outside with the key, remote
transmitter, or smart entry system.
■When the security system alarm sets
The security system alarm indicator in the instrument panel blinks. When the
blinking interval changes after about 15 seconds, the security system alarm is set.
■To cancel the security system alarm
The security system alarm is canceled when the vehicle is unlocked using the remote
transmitter or smart entry system, or the ignition switch is turned to ON (w*1. The
security system alarm indicator goes off at the same time.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.
1Security System Alarm
Do not set the security system alarm when someone
is in the vehicle or a window is open. The system can
accidentally activate when:
•Unlocking the door with the lock tab.
•Opening the hood with the hood release handle.
•Moving the shift lever out of (P.
If the battery goes dead after you have set the
security system alarm, the security alarm may activate
once the battery is recharged or replaced.
If this occurs, deactivate the security system alarm by
unlocking a door using the key, remote transmitter,
or smart entry system.
Do not alter the system or add other devices to it.
Doing so may damage the system and make your
vehicle inoperable.
Continuously variable transmission models
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 119 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
120
uuSecurity SystemuSecurity System Alarm
Controls
■The panic button on the remote
transmitter
If you press the panic button for
approximately one second, the following will
occur for about 30 seconds:
•The horn sounds.
•Some exterior lights flash.
■Canceling panic mode
Press any button on the remote transmitter, or turn the ignition switch to ON (w*1.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.
■Panic Mode
Panic Button
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 120 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
121
Continued
Controls
Opening and Closing the Windows
Opening/Closing the Power Windows
The power windows can be opened and closed when the ignition switch is in ON
(w*1, using the switches on the doors. The driver’s side switches can be used to
open and close all of the windows.
The power window lock button on the driver’s side must be switched off (not
pushed in, indicator off) to open and close the windows from anywhere other than
the driver’s seat.
When the power window lock button is pushed in, the indicator comes on and you
can only operate the driver’s window. Turn the power window lock button on if a
child is in the vehicle.
■Automatic operation
To open: Push the switch down firmly.
To close: Pull the switch up firmly.
The window opens or closes completely. To
stop the window at any time, push or pull the
switch briefly.
■Manual operation
To open: Push the switch down lightly, and
hold it until the desired position is reached.
To close: Pull the switch up lightly, and hold it
until the desired position is reached.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.
■Opening/Closing Windows with Auto-Open/Close Function
1Opening/Closing the Power Windows
The power windows can be operated for up to 10
minutes after you turn the ignition switch to LOCK
(0*1. Opening either front door cancels this function.
Auto Reverse
If a power window senses resistance when closing
automatically, it will stop closing and reverse
direction.
The driver’s window auto reverse function is disabled
when you continuously pull up the switch.
The auto reverse function stops sensing when the
window is almost closed to ensure that it fully closes.
3
WARNING
Closing a power window on someone’s
hands or fingers can cause serious injury.
Make sure your passengers are away from
the windows before closing them.
Power Window Lock Button
Driver’s
Window
Switch Off
On
Indicator
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 121 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
122
uuOpening and Closing the WindowsuOpening/Closing the Power Windows
Controls
To open: Push the switch down.
To close: Pull the switch up.
Release the switch when the window reaches
the desired position.
■Opening/Closing Windows without Auto-Open/Close
Function
Close
Open
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 122 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
123
Controls
Opening and Closing the Moonroof*
You can only operate the moonroof when the power mode is in ON. Use the switch
in the front of the ceiling to open and close the moonroof.
■Automatic operation
To open: Pull the switch back firmly.
To close: Push the switch forward firmly.
The moonroof will automatically open or close
all the way. To stop the moonroof midway,
touch the switch briefly.
■Manual operation
To open: Pull the switch back lightly, and
hold it until the desired position is reached.
To close: Push the switch forward lightly, and
hold it until the desired position is reached.
■Tilting the moonroof up
To tilt: Push on the center of the moonroof
switch.
To close: Push the switch forward firmly,
then release.
■Opening/Closing the Moonroof
1Opening/Closing the Moonroof
NOTICE
Opening the moonroof in below freezing
temperature or when it is covered with snow or ice
can damage the moonroof panel or motor.
The power moonroof can be operated for up to 10
minutes after you set the power mode to VEHICLE
OFF. Opening either front door cancels this function.
When resistance is detected, the auto reverse
function causes the moonroof to change directions,
then stop. Auto reverse stops sensing when the
moonroof is almost closed to ensure that it fully
closes. Make sure that all objects, including fingers,
are clear of the moonroof.
3
WARNING
Opening or closing the moonroof on
someone’s hands or fingers can cause
serious injury.
Make sure all hands and fingers are clear of
the moonroof before opening or closing it.
Open
Close Tilt
* Not available on all models
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 123 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
124
Controls
Operating the Switches Around the Steering Wheel
Ignition Switch
Models without smart entry system
1Ignition Switch
You cannot take the key out unless the shift lever is
in (P.
If you open the driver’s door when the key is in LOCK
(0 or ACCESSORY (q, a warning buzzer will sound
to remind you to take the key out.
If the key won’t turn from LOCK (0 to ACCESSORY
(q, turn the key while moving the steering wheel left
and right. The steering wheel will unlock, allowing
the key to turn.
3
WARNING
Removing the key from the ignition switch
while driving locks the steering. This can
cause you to lose control of the vehicle.
Remove the key from the ignition switch
only when parked.
Manual transmission models
Continuously variable transmission models
All models
(0 LOCK: Insert and remove the key in this
position.
(q ACCESSORY: Operate the audio system and
other accessories in this position.
(w ON: This is the position when driving.
(e START: This position is for starting the engine.
The switch returns to ON (w when you let go of
the key.
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 124 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
125
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluENGINE START/STOP Button
Continued
Controls
ENGINE START/STOP Button
*1: Except U.S. models with continuously variable transmission
■Changing the Power Mode
Models with smart entry system
1ENGINE START/STOP Button
ENGINE START/STOP Button Operating Range
You can start the engine when the smart entry
remote is inside the vehicle.The engine may also run
if the smart entry remote is close to the door or
window, even if it is outside the vehicle.
ON mode:
Indicator in the button is off, if the engine is running.
If the battery of the smart entry remote is getting
low, the engine may not start when you push the
ENGINE START/STOP button. If the engine does not
start, refer to the following link.
2If the Smart Entry Remote Battery is Weak
P. 458
Do not leave the power mode in ACCESSORY or ON
when you get out.
If the power mode does not change from VEHICLE
OFF to ACCESSORY, press the ENGINE START/STOP
button while moving the steering wheel left and
right. The steering wheel will unlock, allowing the
mode to change.
Operating Range
Except U.S. models with continuously variable transmission
ACCESSORY
Indicator in the button is on.
Indicator in the button blinks
(from ON to ACCESSORY).
Operate the audio system and
other accessories in this position.
Continuously Variable Transmission Manual Transmission
VEHICLE OFF (LOCK)
Indicator in the button is off.
The steering wheel is locked.*1
The power to all electrical
components is turned off.
ON
Indicator in the button is on.
All electrical components can
be used.
Press the button without the shift lever in (P.
Shift to (P then press the button.
Press the button.
Without depressing
the brake pedal
Without depressing
the clutch pedal
Indicator Indicator
Shift to (P.
U.S. models
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 125 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
126
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluENGINE START/STOP Button
Controls
If you leave the vehicle for 30 to 60 minutes with the shift lever in (P*1 and the
power mode in ACCESSORY, the vehicle automatically goes into the mode similar to
VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) to avoid draining the battery.
When in this mode:
The steering wheel does not lock.
You cannot lock or unlock doors with the remote transmitter or the smart entry
system.
Press the ENGINE START/STOP button twice to switch the mode to VEHICLE OFF
(LOCK).
*1: Continuously variable transmission models
■Automatic Power Off
Except U.S. models with continuously variable transmission
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 126 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
127
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluENGINE START/STOP Button
Controls
If you open the driver’s door when the power mode is in ACCESSORY, a warning
buzzer sounds.
Warning buzzers may sound from inside and/
or outside the vehicle to remind you that the
smart entry remote is out of the vehicle. If the
buzzer continues even after the remote is put
back inside, place it to be within its
operational range.
■When the power mode is in ON
If the smart entry remote is taken out of the
vehicle, and the driver’s door is closed, a
warning buzzer sounds from both inside and
outside the vehicle. A warning message on
the information display notifies the driver
inside that the remote outside of the vehicle.
■When the power mode is in
ACCESSORY
If the smart entry remote is taken out of the
vehicle, and all the doors are closed, a
warning buzzer sounds from outside the
vehicle.
■Power Mode Reminder
■Smart Entry Remote Reminder
1Smart Entry Remote Reminder
When the smart entry remote is within the system’s
operational range, and the driver’s door is closed, the
warning function cancels.
If the smart entry remote is taken out of the vehicle
after the engine has been started, you can no longer
change the ENGINE START/STOP button mode or
restart the engine. Always make sure if the remote is
in your vehicle when you operate the ENGINE
START/STOP button.
Removing the smart entry remote from the vehicle
through a window does not activate the warning
buzzer.
Do not put the smart entry remote on the dashboard
or in the glove box. It may cause the warning buzzer
to go off. Under some other conditions that can
prevent the vehicle from locating the remote, the
warning buzzer may also go off even if the remote is
within the system’s operational range.
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 127 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
128
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluIgnition Switch and Power Mode Comparison
Controls
Ignition Switch and Power Mode Comparison
*1: Except U.S. models with continuously variable transmission
Ignition Switch
Position
Without Smart
Entry System
●Engine is turned off and
power is shut down.
●The steering wheel is
locked.
●No electrical components
can be used.
●Engine is turned off.
●Some electrical
components such as the
audio system and the
accessory power socket
can be operated.
●Normal key position
while driving.
●All electrical components
can be used.
●Use this position to start
the engine.
●The ignition switch
returns to ON (w when
you release the key.
Power Mode
With Smart Entry
System and
ENGINE START/
STOP Button
Indicator-Off
●Engine is turned off and
power is shut down.
●The steering wheel is
locked.*1
●No electrical components
can be used.
Indicator-On or blinking
●Engine is turned off.
●Some electrical
components such as the
audio system and the
accessory power socket
can be operated.
Indicator-
On (engine is turned off)
Off (engine is running)
●All electrical components
can be used.
Indicator-Off
●The mode automatically
returns to ON after the
engine starts.
LOCK (0
(with/without
the key)
ACCESSORY (q
ON (w
START (e
VEHICLE OFF
(LOCK)
ACCESSORY
ON
Indicator is: On Off
START
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 128 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
129
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluTurn Signals
Continued
Controls
Turn Signals
The turn signals can be used when the ignition
switch is in ON (w*1.
■One-touch turn signal
When you lightly push up or down and release
the turn signal lever, the exterior turn signals
and turn signal indicator blink three times.
This feature can be used when signaling for a
lane change.
Light Switches
Rotating the light switch turns the lights on
and off, regardless of the position of the
ignition switch*1.
■High beams
Push the lever forward until you hear a click.
■Low beams
When in high beams, pull the lever back to
return to low beams.
■Flashing the high beams
Pull the lever back, and release it.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.
Right Turn
Left Turn
■Manual Operation
1Light Switches
If you remove the key from the ignition switch while
the lights are on, a chime sounds when the driver’s
door is opened.
If you leave the power mode in VEHICLE OFF (LOCK)
while the lights are on, a chime sounds when the
driver’s door is opened.
When the lights are on, the lights on indicator in the
instrument panel will be on.
2Lights On Indicator P. 82
Do not leave the lights on when the engine is off
because it will cause the battery to discharge.
If you sense that the level of the headlights is
abnormal, have your vehicle inspected by a dealer.
Models without smart entry system
Models with smart entry system
High Beams
Flashing the high beams
Low Beams
Turns on parking, side marker,
tail, and rear license plate lights
Turns on headlights, parking, side
marker, tail, and rear license plate
lights
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 129 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluLight Switches
130
Controls
Automatic lighting control can be used when
the ignition switch is in ON (w*1.
When you turn the light switch to AUTO, the
headlights and other exterior lights will switch
on and off automatically depending on the
ambient brightness.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.
■Automatic Operation (automatic lighting control)*
1Automatic Operation (automatic lighting control)*
We recommend that you turn on the lights manually
when driving at night, in a dense fog, or in dark areas
such as long tunnels or parking facilities.
The light sensor is in the location shown below.
Do not cover this light sensor with anything;
otherwise, the automatic lighting system may not
work properly.
Light Sensor
* Not available on all models
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 130 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
131
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluLight Switches
Controls
The headlights automatically come on when the wipers are used several times within
a number of certain intervals with the headlight switch in AUTO.
The headlights automatically go off a few minutes later if the wipers are stopped.
The headlights, all other exterior lights, and the instrument panel lights turn off 15
seconds after you remove the key or set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK),
take the remote with you, and close the driver's door.
If you turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0*1 with the headlight switch on, but do
not open the door, the lights turn off after 10 minutes (3 minutes, if the switch is in
the AUTO position).
The lights turn on again when you unlock or open the driver's door. If you unlock
the door, but do not open it within 15 seconds, the lights go off. If you open the
driver's door, you will hear a lights on reminder chime.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.
■Headlight Integration with Wipers*
■Automatic Lighting Off Feature
1Headlight Integration with Wipers*
This feature activates while the headlights are off in
AUTO.
The instrument panel brightness does not change
when the headlights come on.
At dark ambient light levels, the automatic lighting
control feature turns on the headlights, regardless of
the number of wiper sweeps.
* Not available on all models
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 131 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
132
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluFog Lights*
Controls
Fog Lights*
When the low beam headlights are on, turn
the fog light switch on to use the fog lights.
1Fog Lights*
When the fog lights are on, the indicator in the
instrument panel will be on.
They go off when the headlights turn off, or when
the daytime running lights are on.
2Fog Light Indicator* P. 82
Fog Light Switch
* Not available on all models
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 132 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
133
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluDaytime Running Lights
Controls
Daytime Running Lights
The headlights come on slightly dimmer than normal when the following conditions
have been met:
•The ignition switch is in ON (w*1.
•The headlight switch is off, or in .
•The parking brake is released.
The lights remain on even if you set the parking brake. Turning off the ignition
switch or setting the power mode to VEHICLE OFF will turn off the daytime running
lights.
The daytime running lights are off once the headlight switch is turned on, or when
the head light switch is in AUTO* and it is getting darker outside.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.
1Daytime Running Lights
The daytime running lights come on dimmer when
the headlight switch is in than when it is in
AUTO*. In AUTO*, if the ambient brightness is dark,
the low beam headlights come on.
* Not available on all models
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 133 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
134
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluWipers and Washers
Controls
Wipers and Washers
The windshield wipers and washers can be
used when the ignition switch is in ON (w*1.
■MIST
The wipers run at high speed until you release
the lever.
■Wiper switch (OFF, INT, LO, HI)
Change the wiper switch setting according to
the amount of rain.
■Adjusting wiper operation*
Turn the adjustment ring to adjust the wiper
delay.
■Washer
Sprays while you pull the lever toward you.
When you release the lever for more than one
second, the spray stops, the wipers sweep two
or three more times to clear the windshield,
then stop.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.
■Windshield Wiper/Washer
1Wipers and Washers
NOTICE
Do not use the wipers when the windshield is dry.
The windshield will get scratched, or the rubber
blades will get damaged.
NOTICE
In cold weather, the blades may freeze to the
windshield.
Operating the wipers in this condition may damage
the wipers. Use the defroster to warm the
windshield, then turn the wipers on.
If the vehicle speeds up while the wipers are
operating intermittently, the length of the wipe
interval shortens. When the vehicle starts moving, the
wipers make a single sweep.
When the vehicle speeds up, the wiper operation's
shortest delay setting ( ) and the LO setting
become the same.
Turn the washers off if no washer fluid comes out.
The pump may get damaged.
Models with adjustment ring
All models
Pull to
use
washer.
MIST
INT: Low speed with
intermittent
OFF
LO: Low speed wipe
HI: High speed wipe
Intermittent Time
Adjustment Ring*
Lower speed, fewer sweeps
Higher speed, more sweeps
* Not available on all models
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 134 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
135
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluWipers and Washers
Controls
The rear wiper and washer can be used when
the ignition switch is in ON (w*1.
■Wiper switch (OFF, INT, ON)
Change the wiper switch setting according to
the amount of rain.
■Washer ( )
Sprays while you rotate the switch to this
position.
Hold it to activate the wiper and to spray the
washer. Once released, it stops operating
after a few more sweeps.
■Operating in reverse
When you shift the transmission to (R with the windshield wiper activated, the rear
wiper operates automatically as follows even if its switch is off.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.
■Rear Wiper/Washer
1Wipers and Washers
If the wipers stop operating due to any obstacle such
as the build-up of snow, park the vehicle in a safe
place.
Rotate the wiper switch to OFF, and turn the ignition
switch to ACCESSORY (q or LOCK (0*1, then
remove the obstacle.
The wiper motor may stop motor operation
temporarily to prevent an overload.
Wiper operation will return to normal within a few
minutes, once the circuit has returned to normal.
ON
INT: Intermittent
OFF
Washer
Front Wiper Position Rear Wiper Operation
INT (Intermittent) Intermittent
LO (Low speed wipe)
HI (High speed wipe) Continuous
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 135 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
136
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluBrightness Control
Controls
Brightness Control
When the ignition switch is in ON (w*1, you
can use the (select/reset) knob to adjust
instrument panel brightness.
Brighten: Turn the knob to the right.
Dim: Turn the knob to the left.
You will hear a beeper when the brightness
reaches minimum or maximum. Several
seconds after you have adjusted the
brightness, you will be returned to the
previous screen.
■Brightness level indicator
The brightness level is shown on the
information display while you are adjusting it.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.
1Brightness Control
Instrument panel brightness varies, depending on
whether the exterior lights are on or off. The
instrument panel dims to reduce glare when they are
on.
If you turn the knob to the right until the brightness
display is up to max, the beeper sounds. This cancels
the reduced instrument panel brightness when the
exterior lights are on.
The brightness can be set differently for when the
exterior lights are on, and when they are off.
(Select/Reset) Knob
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 136 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
137
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluDefogger/Heated Door Mirror*/Heated Windshield*
Continued
Controls
Defogger/Heated Door Mirror
*
/Heated Windshield
*
Press the rear defogger button or touch the
icon to defog the rear window and mirrors
when the ignition switch is in ON (w*1.
The rear defogger and heated door mirrors
automatically switch off after 10-30 minutes
depending on the outside temperature.
However, if the outside temperature is 32°F
(0°C) or below, they do not automatically
switch off.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.
■Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror* Button
1Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror* Button
NOTICE
When cleaning the inside of the rear window, be
careful not to damage the heating wires.
It is critical to wipe the window from side to side
along the defogger heating wires.
This system consumes a lot of power, so turn it off
when the window has been defogged.
Also, do not use the system for a long time while the
engine is idling. This may weaken the battery, making
it difficult to start the engine.
Models with heating and cooling system
Models with climate control system
Models with climate control system
* Not available on all models
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 137 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluDefogger/Heated Door Mirror*/Heated Windshield*
138
Controls
Press the heated windshield button to deice
the windshield when the ignition switch is
turned to ON (w*1.
The heated windshield automatically switch
off after 15 minutes.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.
■Heated Windshield Button
Canadian models
1Heated Windshield Button
This system consumes a lot of power, so turn it off
when the window has been defogged or deiced.
Also, do not use the system for a long time while the
engine is idling. This may weaken the battery, making
it difficult to start the engine.
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 138 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
139
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluAdjusting the Steering Wheel
Controls
Adjusting the Steering Wheel
The steering wheel height and distance from your body can be adjusted so that you
can comfortably grip the steering wheel in an appropriate driving posture.
1. Pull the steering wheel adjustment lever up.
uThe steering wheel adjustment lever is
under the steering column.
2. Move the steering wheel up or down, and
in or out.
uMake sure you can see the instrument
panel gauges and indicators.
3. Push the steering wheel adjustment lever
down to lock the steering wheel in position.
uAfter adjusting the position, make sure
you have securely locked the steering
wheel in place by trying to move it up,
down, in, and out.
1Adjusting the Steering Wheel
3
WARNING
Adjusting the steering wheel position while
driving may cause you to lose control of the
vehicle and be seriously injured in a crash.
Adjust the steering wheel only when the
vehicle is stopped.
To adjust
To lock
Lever
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 139 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
140
Controls
Adjusting the Mirrors
Interior Rearview Mirror
Adjust the angle of the rearview mirror when you are sitting in the correct driving
position.
Flip the tab to switch the position.
The night position will help to reduce the glare
from headlights behind you when driving
after dark.
When you are driving after dark, the
automatic dimming rearview mirror reduces
the glare from headlights behind you. Press
the AUTO button to turn this function on and
off. When activated, the AUTO indicator
comes on.
■Rearview Mirror with Day and Night Positions*
1Adjusting the Mirrors
Keep the inside and outside mirrors clean and
adjusted for best visibility.
Adjust the mirrors before you start driving.
2Front Seats P. 142
Tab
Daytime
Position
Night Position
Up
Down
■Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror*
1Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror*
The auto dimming function cancels when the shift
position is in (R.
Sensor
Auto Button
Indicator
* Not available on all models
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 140 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
141
uuAdjusting the MirrorsuPower Door Mirrors
Controls
Power Door Mirrors
You can adjust the door mirrors when the
ignition switch is in ON (w*1.
■Mirror position adjustment
L/R selector switch: Select the left or right
mirror. After adjusting the mirror, return the
switch to the center position.
Mirror position adjustment switch: Press
the switch left, right, up, or down to move the
mirror.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.
Selector Switch
Adjustment Switch
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 141 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
142
Controls
Adjusting the Seats
Front Seats
Adjust the driver’s seat as far back as possible
while allowing you to maintain full control of
the vehicle. You should be able to sit upright,
well back in the seat and be able to
adequately press the pedals without leaning
forward, and grip the steering wheel
comfortably. The passenger’s seat should be
adjusted in a similar manner, so that it is as far
back from the front airbag in the dashboard
as possible.
1Adjusting the Seats
The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration
and Transport Canada recommend that drivers allow
at least 10 inches (25 cm) between the center of the
steering wheel and the chest.
Always make seat adjustments before driving.
3
WARNING
Sitting too close to a front airbag can result
in serious injury or death if the front
airbags inflate.
Always sit as far back from the front
airbags as possible while maintaining
control of the vehicle.
Move back.
Allow sufficient
space.
■Adjusting the Front Seat
1Adjusting the Front Seat
Once a seat is adjusted correctly, rock it back and
forth to make sure it is locked in position.
Horizontal Position
Adjustment
Pull up on the bar to move the
seat, then release the bar.
Driver’s seat is shown.
Seat-back Angle Adjustment
Pull up the lever to change the
angle.
Height Adjustment
(Driver side only)
Pull up or push down the lever
to raise or lower the seat.
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 142 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
143
uuAdjusting the SeatsuFront Seats
Controls
Adjust the driver’s seat-back to a comfortable,
upright position, leaving ample space
between your chest and the airbag cover in
the center of the steering wheel.
The front seat passenger should also adjust
their seat-back to a comfortable, upright
position.
Reclining a seat-back so that the shoulder part of the belt no longer rests against the
occupant’s chest reduces the protective capability of the belt. It also increases the
chance of sliding under the belt in a crash and being seriously injured. The farther a
seat-back is reclined, the greater the risk of injury.
■Adjusting the Seat-Backs
1Adjusting the Seat-Backs
Do not put a cushion, or other object, between the
seat-back and your back.
Doing so may interfere with proper seat belt or airbag
operation.
If you cannot get far enough away from the steering
wheel and still reach the controls, we recommend
that you investigate whether some type of adaptive
equipment may help.
3
WARNING
Reclining the seat-back too far can result in
serious injury or death in a crash.
Adjust the seat-back to an upright position,
and sit well back in the seat.
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 143 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
144
uuAdjusting the SeatsuHead Restraints
Controls
Head Restraints
Your vehicle is equipped with head restraints in all seating positions.
Head restraints are most effective for
protection against whiplash and other rear-
impact crash injuries when the center of the
back of the occupant’s head rests against the
center of the restraint. The tops of the
occupant’s ears should be level with the
center height of the restraint.
■Adjusting the front head restraint positions
To raise the head restraint:
Pull it upward.
To lower the head restraint:
Push it down while pressing the release
button.
■Adjusting the Head Restraints
1Adjusting the Head Restraints
In order for the head restraint system to work
properly:
•Do not hang any items on the head restraints, or
from the restraint legs.
•Do not place any objects between an occupant and
the seat-back.
•Install each restraint in its proper location.
3
WARNING
Improperly positioning head restraints
reduces their effectiveness and increases
the likelihood of serious injury in a crash.
Make sure head restraints are in place and
positioned properly before driving.
Position head in the center
of the head restraint.
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 144 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
145
uuAdjusting the SeatsuHead Restraints
Continued
Controls
A passenger sitting in a back seating position
should adjust the height of their head restraint
to an appropriate position before the vehicle
begins moving.
To raise the head restraint:
Pull it upward.
To lower the head restraint:
Push it down while pressing the release
button.
■Changing the Rear Seat Head Restraint Positions
Outer
Center
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 145 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
uuAdjusting the SeatsuHead Restraints
146
Controls
Head restraints can be removed for cleaning or repair.
To remove a head restraint:
Pull the restraint up as far as it will go. Then push the release button, and pull the
restraint up and out.
To reinstall a head restraint:
Insert the legs back in place, then adjust the head restraint to an appropriate height
while pressing the release button. Pull up on the restraint to make sure it is locked
in position.
■Removing and Reinstalling the Head Restraints
1Removing and Reinstalling the Head Restraints
To remove and install the rear outer head restraint,
recline the seat-back slightly forward as the space
between the ceiling and the seat-back is limited.
3
WARNING
Failure to reinstall, or correctly reinstall, the
head restraints can result in severe injury
during a crash.
Always replace the head restraints before
driving.
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 146 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
147
uuAdjusting the SeatsuMaintain a Proper Sitting Position
Controls
Maintain a Proper Sitting Position
After all occupants have adjusted their seats and head restraints, and put on their
seat belts, it is very important that they continue to sit upright, well back in their
seats, with their feet on the floor, until the vehicle is safely parked and the engine is
off.
Sitting improperly can increase the chance of injury during a crash. For example, if
an occupant slouches, lies down, turns sideways, sits forward, leans forward or
sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the chance of injury during a crash is greatly
increased.
In addition, an occupant who is out of position in the front seat can be seriously or
fatally injured in a crash by striking interior parts of the vehicle or being struck by an
inflating front airbag.
1Maintain a Proper Sitting Position
3
WARNING
Sitting improperly or out of position can
result in serious injury or death in a crash.
Always sit upright, well back in the seat,
with your feet on the floor.
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 147 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
148
uuAdjusting the SeatsuRear Seats
Controls
Rear Seats
Pull the lever on the right to change the angle
of the right half of the seat-back, and left for
the left half.
■Adjusting the Rear Seat-Backs
Release Lever
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 148 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
Continued 149
uuAdjusting the SeatsuRear Seats
Controls
The rear seats can be folded down separately to allow for additional storage space.
■To fold down the seat
1. Store the center seat belt first. Insert the
latch plate into the slot on the side of the
anchor buckle.
2. Retract the seat belt into the holder on the
ceiling.
2Seat Belt with Detachable Anchor P. 41
3. Lower the head restraint to its lowest
position.
4. Pull the release lever and fold down the
seat-back.
To return the seat to the original position, pull
up the seat-back in the upright position.
■Folding Down the Rear Seats
1Folding Down the Rear Seats
Make sure all items in the cargo area or items
extending to the rear seats are properly
secured. Loose items can fly forward if you have
to brake hard.
Remove any items from the rear seat cushion and
floor before you fold down the rear seat.
To lock the seat-back upright, push it backwards until
it locks.
Make sure the seat-back, head restraints and seat
cushion are securely latched back into place before
driving. Also, make sure all rear shoulder belts are
positioned in front of the seat-back, and the center
shoulder belt is re-positioned in the holding slot.
Make sure that the folded seat-back does not press
against the front passenger seat, as this can cause the
weight sensors in the front passenger seat to work
improperly.
2Passenger Front Airbag Off Indicator P. 55
Anchor
Buckle Latch Plate
Release Lever
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 149 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
uuAdjusting the SeatsuRear Seats
150
Controls
Separately lift up the left and right halves of
the rear seat cushions to make room for cargo
area.
■Lifting up the seat cushion
1. Make sure the seat belt buckles are in their
loops on the seat.
2. Pull up the rear seat cushion.
3. Fold the seat leg down while pushing the
seat cushion firmly against the seat-back to
lock it.
■Putting the seat in the original position
1. Hold the seat cushion in the upright
position, and pull up the seat leg fully.
uThe seat cushion can abruptly fall down
once you pull up the seat leg.
2. Slowly put down the seat cushion and set
the seat leg in the floor guide.
uA latch comes out when the leg is set
properly.
■Folding the Rear Seat Up
1Folding the Rear Seat Up
After you fold the seat up, or put it back in the
original position, make sure the seat is firmly secured
by rocking it forward and back.
Check if there are any items on the seat before you
pull the seat cushion up. Check if there are any
obstacles around the floor guide before you put the
seat back in the original position.
Loop
Seat Leg
Floor Guide
Latch
Seat Leg
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 150 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
151
uuAdjusting the SeatsuArmrest
Controls
Armrest
The console lid can be used as an armrest.
To adjust:
Slide the armrest to the desired position.
Pull down the armrest in the center backrest.
■Using the Front Seat Armrest
■Using the Rear Seat Armrest*
* Not available on all models
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 151 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
152
Controls
Interior Lights/Interior Convenience Items
Interior Lights
■ON
The interior lights come on regardless of
whether the doors are open or closed.
■Door activated
The interior lights come on in the following
situations:
•When any doors are opened.
•You unlock the driver’s door.
•You remove the key from the ignition
switch.
•When the power mode is set to VEHICLE
OFF (LOCK).
■OFF
The interior lights remain off regardless of
whether the doors are open or closed.
■Interior Light Switches
1Interior Light Switches
In the door activated position, the interior lights fade
out and go off about 30 seconds after the doors are
closed.
The lights go off after 30 seconds in the following
situations:
•When you unlock the driver’s door but do not open it.
•When you remove the key from the ignition switch
but do not open a door.
•When you set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF
(LOCK) but do not open a door.
The interior lights go off immediately in the following
situations:
•When you lock the driver’s door.
•When you turn the ignition switch to ON (w*1.
•When you close the driver’s door with the key in
the ignition switch.
•When you close the driver’s door in ACCESSORY
mode.
If you leave any of the doors open in VEHICLE OFF
(LOCK) mode, or without the key in the ignition
switch, the interior lights go off after about 15
minutes.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE
START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
Models without smart entry system
Models with smart entry system
Models without smart entry system
Models with smart entry system
On
Off
Door Activated Position
Front*
Rear
Door Activated Position
Off
Models without smart entry system
Models with smart entry system
* Not available on all models
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 152 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
153
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Lights
Controls
The map lights can be turned on and off by
pressing the lenses.
■ON
The light comes on when you open the
tailgate, and goes off when closed.
■OFF
The light stays off with or without opening the
tailgate.
■Map Lights
1Map Lights
When the front interior light switch is in the door
activated position and any door is open, the map
light will not go off when you press the lens.
Models with moonroof
Models with moonroof
Models without moonroof
■Cargo Area Light
On
Off
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 153 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
154
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
Controls
Interior Convenience Items
Pull the handle to open the glove box.
Pull the handle to open the console
compartment.
■Glove Box
1Glove Box
3
WARNING
An open glove box can cause serious injury
to your passenger in a crash, even if the
passenger is wearing the seat belt.
Always keep the glove box closed while
driving.
■Console Compartment
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 154 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
Continued 155
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
Controls
■Front seat beverage holders
■Center console beverage holders
To put a short-size beverage: Push down
the bottom plate.
To put a tall-size beverage: Pull up the
bottom plate.
■Beverage Holders
1Beverage Holders
NOTICE
Spilled liquids can damage the upholstery, carpeting,
and electrical components in the interior.
Be careful when you are using the beverage holders.
Hot liquid can scald you.
Front Door
Center Console
Bottom plate
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 155 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
156
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
Controls
■Rear seat beverage holders
Rear Door
At the Back of the Center Console
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 156 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
157
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
Continued
Controls
Pull up the cargo area floor lid.
■Cargo Floor Box
Cargo Floor Box
2WD models
AWD models
Cargo Floor Box
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 157 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
158
Controls
The accessory power socket can be used when the ignition switch is in ACCESSORY
(q or ON (w*1.
■Accessory power socket (console panel)
Open the cover to use it.
■Accessory power socket (rearward of
center console)
Open the cover to use it.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.
■Accessory Power Sockets
1Accessory Power Sockets
NOTICE
Do not insert an automotive type cigarette lighter
element.
This can overheat the power socket.
Each accessory power socket is designed to supply
power for 12 volt DC accessories that are rated 180
watts (15 amps) or less.
To prevent battery drain, only use the power socket
with the engine running.
When both sockets are being used, the combined
power rating of the accessories should not exceed
180 watts (15 amps).
Cover
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 158 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
Continued 159
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
Controls
■Accessory power socket (cargo area)
Open the cover to use it.
There is a coat hook on the rear left grab
handle. Pull it down to use it.
Canadian models
■Coat Hook
1Coat Hook
The coat hook is not designed for large or heavy
items.
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 159 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
160
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
Controls
The tie-down anchors on the cargo area floor
can be used to install a net for securing items.
■Tie-down Anchors
Front Anchors
Rear Anchors
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 160 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
Continued 161
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
Controls
The cargo cover can be used to conceal your
items and protect them from direct sunlight.
■To remove:
Pull out the cargo cover rearwards and
remove it.
■To fold:
The cargo cover is collapsible.
1. Take the opposite sides, fold the cover
halfway, then twist into opposite ways.
2. Curl to narrow the cover as shown.
■Cargo Cover
Canadian models
1Cargo Cover
Do not let anyone access items in the cargo area
while driving. Loose items can cause injury if you have
to brake hard.
Do not stack objects higher than the top of the seat
in the cargo area. They could block your view and be
thrown about the vehicle during a sudden stop.
To prevent cargo cover damage, do not:
•Place items on the cargo cover.
•Put weight on the cargo cover.
When reinstalling the cargo cover, put the tagged
side first.
Tag
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 161 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
162
Controls
The ignition switch must be in ON (w*1 to use
the seat heaters.
Touch the seat heater icon.
Once - The HI setting (two indicators on)
Twice - The LO setting
Three times - The OFF setting (no indicator on)
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.
■Seat Heaters*
1Seat Heaters*
Do not use the seat heaters even in LO when the
engine is off. Under such conditions, the battery may
be weakened, making the engine difficult to start.
In the LO setting, the heater runs continuously and
does not automatically turn off.
3
WARNING
Heat induced burns are possible when
using seat heaters.
Persons with a diminished ability to sense
temperature (e.g., persons with diabetes,
lower-limb nerve damage, or paralysis) or
with sensitive skin should not use seat
heaters.
* Not available on all models
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 162 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
163
Continued
Controls
Heating and Cooling System*
Using Vents, Heating and A/C
Mode Control Dial
Changes airflow.
Fan Control Dial
Adjusts the fan speed. Rotate the dial all
the way to OFF to turn everything off.
A/C Button
Press to cool the interior or dehumidify
while heating.
Temperature Control Dial
Adjusts the interior temperature.
(Recirculation) Button
Press the button and switch the mode depending on
environmental conditions.
Recirculation mode (indicator on):
Recirculates air from the vehicle’s interior through the system.
Fresh air mode (indicator off):
Maintains outside ventilation. Keep the system in fresh air mode in
normal situations.
Dashboard
vents
Dashboard
and floor
vents
Floor vents Floor and
defroster
vents
Defroster
vents
* Not available on all models
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 163 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
164
uuHeating and Cooling System*uUsing Vents, Heating and A/C
Controls
Three separate front passenger side air vents allow for different air flow rates
through the vehicle. Passengers can separately:
•Adjust each vent to optimize airflow
throughout the vehicle.
•Close individual vents to adjust passenger
comfort levels.
■Passenger Side Vents
Adjust from side to side or up and
down
Mid Low High
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 164 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
Continued 165
uuHeating and Cooling System*uUsing Vents, Heating and A/C
Controls
The heater uses heat from the engine coolant
to warm the air.
1. Adjust the fan speed using the fan control
dial.
2. Select .
3. Adjust the temperature using the
temperature control dial.
■To rapidly warm up the interior
1. Set the fan to the maximum speed.
2. Select .
3. Set the temperature to maximum warm.
4. Press the button (the indicator on).
■To dehumidify the interior
When used in combination with the heater, the air conditioning system makes the
interior warm and dry and can prevent the windows from fogging up.
1. Turn the fan on.
2. Press the A/C button to turn on the air conditioning.
■Heating
1Heating
When you select , the mode automatically
switches to fresh air.
1To rapidly warm up the interior
Change to fresh air mode as soon as the interior gets
warm enough. The windows may fog up if kept in
recirculation mode.
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 165 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
uuHeating and Cooling System*uUsing Vents, Heating and A/C
166
Controls
1. Adjust the fan speed using the fan control
dial.
2. Select .
3. Adjust the temperature using the
temperature control dial.
4. Press the A/C button (indicator on).
■To rapidly cool down the interior
1. Set the fan to the maximum speed.
2. Set the temperature to maximum cool.
3. Press the button (the indicator on).
Selecting turns the air conditioning
system on and automatically switches the
system to fresh air mode.
■To rapidly defrost the windows
1. Set the fan to the maximum speed.
2. Select .
3. Press the button.
4. Set the temperature to maximum warm.
■Cooling
1To rapidly cool down the interior
If the interior is very warm, you can cool it down
more rapidly by partially opening the windows.
While in ECON mode, the system has greater
temperature fluctuations.
Models with ECON button
■Defrosting the Windshield and Windows
1Defrosting the Windshield and Windows
For your safety, make sure you have a clear view
through all the windows before driving.
Do not set the temperature near the upper or lower
limit.
When cold air hits the windshield, the outside of the
windshield may fog up.
If the side windows fog up, adjust the vents so that
the air hits the side windows.
1To rapidly defrost the windows
After defrosting the windows, switch over to fresh air
mode.
If you keep the system in recirculation mode, the
windows may fog up from humidity. This impedes
visibility.
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 166 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
167
Continued
Controls
Climate Control System*
Using Automatic Climate Control
The automatic climate control system maintains the interior temperature you select.
The system also selects the proper mix of heated or cooled air that raises or lowers
the interior temperature to your preference as quickly as possible.
Use the system when the engine is running.
1. Select the AUTO icon.
2. Adjust the interior temperature using the temperature control icons.
3. Select the icon to cancel.
1Using Automatic Climate Control
If any icons are selected while using the climate
control system in auto, the function of the icon that
was selected will take priority.
The AUTO indicator will go off, but functions
unrelated to the icon that was selected will be
controlled automatically.
To prevent cold air from blowing in from outside, the
fan may not start immediately when the AUTO icon
is selected.
If the interior is very warm, you can cool it down
more rapidly by partially opening the windows,
turning the system on auto, and setting the
temperature to low. Change the fresh air mode to
recirculation mode until the temperature cools down.
When you set the temperature to the lower or upper
limit, Lo or Hi is displayed.
You can raise or lower the temperature or fan speed
setting flicking either control icon.
Models without SYNC icon
Dashboard
vents
Dashboard
and floor
vents
Floor vents Floor and
defroster
vents
Temperature Control
Icons
AUTO Icon
Mode Control Icon
Fan Control Icons
(On/Off) Icon
(Recirculation) Icon
A/C (Air Conditioning) Icon
(Fresh Air) Icon
* Not available on all models
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 167 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
uuClimate Control System*uUsing Automatic Climate Control
168
Controls
Use the system when the engine is running.
1. Select the AUTO icon.
2. Adjust the interior temperature using the driver side temperature control icons.
3. Select the icon to cancel.
1Using Automatic Climate Control
Selecting the icon switches the climate control
system between on and off. When turned on, the
system returns to your last selection.
The climate control system is voice operable. See the
navigation system manual.
While in ECON mode, the system has greater
temperature fluctuations.
Models with ECON button
Models with SYNC icon
Dashboard
vents
Dashboard
and floor
vents
Floor vents Floor and
defroster
vents
Driver Side
Temperature Control
Icons
AUTO Icon
Mode Control Icon
Passenger Side
Temperature
Control Icons
(On/Off) Icon (Recirculation) Icon
A/C (Air Conditioning) IconSYNC Icon
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 168 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
169
uuClimate Control System*uUsing Automatic Climate Control
Continued
Controls
■Switching between the recirculation and fresh air modes
Select the (recirculation) or (fresh air) icon to switch the mode
depending on environmental conditions.
Recirculation mode (indicator on): Recirculates air from the vehicle’s interior
through the system.
Fresh air mode (indicator on): Maintains outside ventilation. Keep the system
in fresh air mode in normal situations.
Select the (recirculation) icon to switch the mode depending on
environmental conditions.
Recirculation mode (indicator on): Recirculates air from the vehicle’s interior through
the system.
Fresh air mode (indicator off): Maintains outside ventilation. Keep the system in
fresh air mode in normal situations.
Models without SYNC icon
Models with SYNC icon
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 169 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
uuClimate Control System*uUsing Automatic Climate Control
170
Controls
Select the icon to turn the air conditioning
system on and automatically switch the
system to fresh air mode.
Select the icon again to turn off, the
system returns to the previous settings.
■Defrosting the Windshield and Windows
1Defrosting the Windshield and Windows
For your safety, make sure you have a clear view
through all the windows before driving.
Do not set the temperature near the upper or lower
limit.
When cold air hits the windshield, the outside of the
windshield may fog up.
If the side windows fog up, adjust the vents so that
the air hits the side windows.
Models without SYNC icon
Models with SYNC icon
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 170 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
Continued 171
uuClimate Control System*uUsing Automatic Climate Control
Controls
■To rapidly defrost the windows
1. Select the icon.
2. Select the icon.
1To rapidly defrost the windows
After defrosting the windows, switch over to fresh air
mode. If you keep the system in recirculation mode,
the windows may fog up from humidity. This
impedes visibility.
Models without SYNC icon
Models with SYNC icon
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 171 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
uuClimate Control System*uUsing Automatic Climate Control
172
Controls
You hear the beep when operating the climate control system on the touch screen.
This can be turned on and off.
To turn off the beep:
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (w*1.
2. Touch the of the temperature control
icon five times while pressing and holding
the .
3. Release the , after -- blinks five times
and OF is displayed.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.
■Turning On and Off the Touch Screen Beep
1Turning On and Off the Touch Screen Beep
If you touch any other icons during this procedure,
the setting may fail. In this case, once you turn the
ignition switch to OFF (0*1, then follow this
procedure again.
Models without SYNC icon
Models with SYNC icon
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 172 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
173
uuClimate Control System*uUsing Automatic Climate Control
Continued
Controls
To turn on the beep:
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (w*1.
2. Touch the of the temperature control
icon five times while pressing and holding
the .
3. Release the , after OF blinks five times
and -- is displayed.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.
Models without SYNC icon
Models with SYNC icon
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 173 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
uuClimate Control System*uUsing Automatic Climate Control
174
Controls
You can set the temperature synchronously for the driver side and the passenger
side in synchronization mode.
1. Select the SYNC icon.
uThe system switches to synchronization mode.
2. Adjust the temperature using the driver’s side temperature control icon.
Select the SYNC icon to return to dual mode.
■Synchronization Mode*
1Synchronization Mode*
When the system is in dual mode, the driver side
temperature and the passenger side temperature can
be set separately.
SYNC Icon
Driver Side
Temperature
Control Icon
Passenger Side
Temperature
Control Icon
* Not available on all models
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 174 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
175
uuClimate Control System*uAutomatic Climate Control Sensors
Controls
Automatic Climate Control Sensors
The automatic climate control system is
equipped with sensors. Do not cover or spill
any liquid on them.
Sensor
Sensor
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 175 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
176
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 176 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
177
Features
This chapter describes how to operate technology features.
Audio System
About Your Audio System.................... 178
USB Port(s)........................................... 179
HDMI® Port*........................................ 180
Auxiliary Input Jack*............................. 180
Audio System Theft Protection ............. 181
Audio Remote Controls........................ 182
Audio System Basic Operation............. 184
Audio/Information Screen .................... 185
Adjusting the Sound ............................ 189
Display Setup ....................................... 190
Playing AM/FM Radio ........................... 191
Playing a CD ........................................ 193
Playing an iPod..................................... 196
Models with color audio system
Playing a USB Flash Drive ..................... 199
Playing Bluetooth® Audio..................... 202
Audio System Basic Operation ............ 205
Audio/Information Screen .................... 206
Adjusting the Sound ............................ 211
Display Setup....................................... 212
Playing AM/FM Radio........................... 213
Playing a CD ........................................ 216
Playing an iPod .................................... 219
Playing Internet Radio .......................... 222
Playing a USB Flash Drive ..................... 224
Playing Bluetooth® Audio..................... 227
Playing a Video Using the HDMI®......... 229
Smartphone Apps................................ 231
Models with display audio system
Siri® Eyes Free.......................................232
Audio Error Messages ...........................233
General Information on the Audio
System ............................................. 237
Customized Features.............................252
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®..................274
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®..................297
Models with color audio system
Models with display audio system
* Not available on all models
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 177 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
178
Features
Audio System
About Your Audio System
The audio system features AM/FM radio. It can also play audio CDs, WMA/MP3/AAC
files, USB flash drives, and iPod, iPhone and Bluetooth® devices.
You can operate the audio system from the buttons and switches on the panel, the
remote controls on the steering wheel, or the icons on the touchscreen interface*.
*1:Models with display audio system
*2:Models with color audio system
1About Your Audio System
Video CDs, DVDs, and 3-inch (8-cm) mini CDs are not
supported.
iPod, iPhone and iTunes are trademarks of Apple Inc.
State or local laws may prohibit the operation of
handheld electronic devices while operating a
vehicle.
iPod
USB
Flash
Drive
USB Port*1
Remote Controls
HDMI® Port*1
Auxiliary Input Jack*2
USB Port*1, *2 HDMI®*1
* Not available on all models
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 178 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
179
uuAudio SystemuUSB Port(s)
Features
USB Port(s)
1. Open the cover.
2. Install the iPod dock connector or the USB
flash drive to the USB port.
1USB Port(s)
•Do not leave the iPod or USB flash drive in the
vehicle. Direct sunlight and high temperatures may
damage it.
•We recommend using an extension cable with the
USB port.
•Do not connect the iPod or USB flash drive using a
hub.
•Do not use a device such as a card reader or hard
disk drive, as the device or your files may be
damaged.
•We recommend your data backed up before using
the device in your vehicle.
•Displayed messages may vary depending on the
device model and software version.
If the audio system does not recognize the iPod, try
reconnecting it a few times or reboot the device. To
reboot, follow the manufacturer’s instructions
provided with the iPod or visit www.apple.com/ipod.
USB Port
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 179 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
180
uuAudio SystemuHDMI® Port*
Features
HDMI® Port*
1. Open the cover.
2. Install the HDMI® cable to the HDMI® port.
Auxiliary Input Jack*
Use the jack to connect standard audio devices.
1. Open the AUX cover.
2. Connect a standard audio device to the
input jack using a 1/8 inch (3.5 mm) stereo
miniplug.
uThe audio system automatically switches
to the AUX mode.
1HDMI® Port*
•Do not leave the HDMI® connected device in the
vehicle. Direct sunlight and high temperatures may
damage it.
•We recommend your data backed up before using
the device in your vehicle.
•Displayed messages may vary depending on the
device model and software version.
The terms HDMI and HDMI High-Definition
Multimedia Interface, and the HDMI Logo are
trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI
Licensing LLC in the United States and other
countries.
HDMI Port
1Auxiliary Input Jack*
To switch mode, press any of the audio mode
buttons. You can return to AUX mode by pressing
the CD/AUX button.
* Not available on all models
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 180 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
181
uuAudio SystemuAudio System Theft Protection
Features
Audio System Theft Protection
The audio system is disabled when it is disconnected from the power source, such as
when the battery is disconnected or goes dead. In certain conditions, the system
may display a cord entry screen. If this occurs, reactivate the audio system.
■Reactivating the audio system
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (w*1.
2. Turn on the audio system.
3. Press and hold the audio system power button for more than two seconds.
uThe audio system is reactivated when the audio control unit establishes a
connection with the vehicle control unit. If the control unit fails to recognize
the audio unit, you must go to a dealer and have the audio unit checked.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 181 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
182
uuAudio SystemuAudio Remote Controls
Features
Audio Remote Controls
Allow you to operate the audio system while driving.
SOURCE Button
Cycles through the audio modes as follows:
FMAMCDUSBiPod
Bluetooth®AudioPandora®*AhaTM*
Apps*, *1AUX*/AUX HDMI®*
(Volume) Buttons
Press : To increase the volume.
Press : To decrease the volume.
Button
•When listening to the radio
Press : To select the next preset radio station.
Press : To select the previous preset radio station.
Press and hold : To select the next strong radio station.
Press and hold : To select the previous strong radio station.
•When listening to a CD, iPod, USB flash drive, or Bluetooth® Audio
Press : To skip to the next song.
Press : To go back to the beginning of the current or previous song.
•When listening to a CD or USB flash drive
Press and hold : To skip to the next folder.
Press and hold : To go back to the previous folder.
•When listening to Internet radio*
Press : To skip to the next song.
Press and hold : To select the next station.
Press and hold : To select the previous station.
*1: Appears only when connected to HondaLink®.
1Audio Remote Controls
Some mode appear only when an appropriate device
or medium is used.
Depending on the Bluetooth® device you connect,
some functions may not be operated.
Button
Button
Button
Button
(Menu)
Button*
SOURCE
Button
* Not available on all models
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 182 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
183
uuAudio SystemuAudio Remote Controls
Features
Steering Wheel (Menu) Button
•When listening to the radio
Press : To display the menu items. You can select Scan, Save Preset, or
Seek.
•When listening to a CD or USB flash drive
Press : To display the menu items. You can select Scan, Repeat, or Random.
•When listening to an iPod
Press : To display the menu items. You can select Repeat or Shuffle.
•When listening to a Bluetooth® Audio
Press : To display the menu items. You can select Pause or Play.
•When listening to a Pandora®*
Press : To display the menu items. You can select Bookmark, or Play/Pause.
1Audio Remote Controls
The button is available only when the audio
mode is FM, AM, CD, USB, iPod, Pandora®*, AhaTM*,
or Bluetooth® Audio.
Models with display audio system
* Not available on all models
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 183 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
184
Features
Audio System Basic Operation
To use the audio system, the ignition switch must be in ACCESSORY (q or ON (w.
Use the selector knob or MENU/CLOCK
button to access some audio functions.
Press to switch between the normal and
extended display for some functions.
Selector knob: Rotate left or right to scroll
through the available choices. Press to set
your selection.
MENU/CLOCK button: Press to select any
mode.
The available mode includes the wallpaper,
display, clock, language setup, and play
modes. Play modes can be also selected from
scan, random, repeat, and so on.
(Back) button: Press to go back to the previous display.
(Sound) button: Press to select the sound setting mode.
(Day/Night) button: Press to change the audio/information screen
brightness.
Press , then adjust the brightness using .
uEach time you press , the mode switches between the daytime mode,
nighttime mode and OFF mode.
Models with color audio system
1Audio System Basic Operation
These indications are used to show how to operate
the selector knob.
Rotate to select.
Press to enter.
Menu Items
2Adjust Clock P. 97
2Wallpaper Setup P. 187
2Display Setup P. 190
2Scan P. 192, 195, 201
2Play Mode P. 195, 198, 201
2RDS Settings P. 192
2Bluetooth P. 256, 280
Press the SOURCE, , , or button on the
steering wheel to change any audio setting.
2Audio Remote Controls P. 182
One of the operating system used in this unit is eCos.
For software license terms and conditions, visit their
website (eCos license URL: http://
ecos.sourceware.org/license-overview.html)
For source code disclosure and other details
regarding eCos, visit: http://
www.hondaopensource2.com
(Back)
Button
Selector Knob
MENU/
CLOCK
Button
(Day/Night)
Button
(Sound)
Button
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 184 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
185
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
Continued
Features
Audio/Information Screen
Displays the audio status and wallpaper. From this screen, you can go to various
setup options.
■Switching the Display
Audio/Information Screen
Audio
Clock/Wallpaper
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 185 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
186
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
Features
■Audio
Shows the current audio information.
■Clock/Wallpaper
Shows a clock screen or an image you import.
■Change display
1. Press the MENU/CLOCK button.
2. Rotate to select Settings, then press .
3. Rotate to select Display Change, then press .
4. Rotate to select Wallpaper, then press .
uIf you want to return to the audio display, select Audio.
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 186 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
Continued 187
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
Features
You can change, store, and delete the wallpaper on the audio/information screen.
■Import wallpaper
You can import up to three images, one at a time, for wallpaper from a USB flash
drive.
1. Connect the USB flash drive to the USB
port.
2USB Port(s) P. 179
2. Press the MENU/CLOCK button.
3. Rotate to select Settings, then press
.
4. Rotate to select Wallpaper, then press
.
5. Rotate to select Import, then press .
uThe picture name is displayed on the list.
6. Rotate to select a desired picture, then
press .
uThe selected picture is displayed.
7. Press to save the picture.
8. Press to select OK.
9. Rotate to select a location to save the
picture, then press .
uThe display will return to the wallpaper
setting screen.
■Wallpaper Setup
1Wallpaper Setup
•When importing wallpaper files, the image must be
in the USB flash drive’s root directory. Images in a
folder cannot be imported.
•The file name must be fewer than 64 characters.
•The file format of the image that can be imported
is BMP (bmp) or JPEG (jpg).
•The individual file size limit is 2 MB.
•The maximum image size is 1,920 x 936 pixels. If
the image size is less than 480 × 234 pixels, the
image is displayed in the middle of the screen with
the extra area appearing in black.
•Up to 255 files can be selected.
•If the USB flash drive does not have any pictures,
the No compatible images were found. See
Owner’s Manual. message appears.
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 187 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
188
Features
■Select wallpaper
1. Press the MENU/CLOCK button.
2. Rotate to select Settings, then press .
3. Rotate to select Wallpaper, then press .
4. Rotate to select Select, then press .
uThe screen changes to the wallpaper list.
5. Rotate to select a desired wallpaper, then press .
■To view wallpaper once it is set
1. Press the MENU/CLOCK button.
2. Rotate to select Settings, then press .
3. Rotate to select Display Change, then press .
4. Rotate to select Wallpaper, then press .
uThe screen changes to the wallpaper list.
5. Rotate to select a wallpaper that you want to set, then press .
■Delete wallpaper
1. Press the MENU/CLOCK button.
2. Rotate to select Settings, then press .
3. Rotate to select Wallpaper, then press .
4. Rotate to select Delete, then press .
uThe screen changes to the wallpaper list.
5. Rotate to select a wallpaper that you want to delete, then press .
6. Rotate to select Yes, then press .
uThe display will return to the wallpaper setting screen.
1Wallpaper Setup
To go back to the previous screen, press the
(Back) button.
When the file size is large, it takes a while to be
previewed.
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 188 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
189
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAdjusting the Sound
Features
Adjusting the Sound
Press the (sound) button, and rotate
to scroll through the following choices:
Rotate to adjust the sound setting, then
press .
1Adjusting the Sound
The SVC has four modes: Off, Low, Mid, and High.
SVC adjusts the volume level based on the vehicle
speed. As you go faster, audio volume increases. As
you slow down, audio volume decreases.
LIST/SELECT (Selector) Knob
(sound) Button
TRE is selectable.
BAS
TRE
FAD
BAL
SVC
Bass
Treble
Fader
Balance
Speed-sensitive
Volume
Compensation
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 189 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
190
uuAudio System Basic OperationuDisplay Setup
Features
Display Setup
You can change the brightness or color theme of the audio/information screen.
1. Press the MENU/CLOCK button.
2. Rotate to select Settings, then press
.
3. Rotate to select Display Adjustment,
then press .
4. Rotate to select Brightness, then press
.
5. Rotate to adjust the setting, then press
.
1. Press the MENU/CLOCK button.
2. Rotate to select Settings, then press
.
3. Rotate to select Color Theme, then
press .
4. Rotate to select the setting you want,
then press .
■Changing the Screen Brightness
1Changing the Screen Brightness
You can change the Contrast and Black Level
settings in the same manner.
■Changing the Screen’s Color Theme
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 190 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
191
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio
Continued
Features
Playing AM/FM Radio
RADIO Button
Press to select a band.
(Back) Button
Press to go back to the previous
display or cancel a setting.
/ (Seek/Skip) Buttons
Press or to search up and down
the selected band for a station with a strong
signal.
VOL/ (Power/volume) Knob
Press to turn the audio system
on and off.
Turn to adjust the volume.
Preset Buttons (1-6)
To store a station:
1. Tune to the selected station.
2. Pick a preset button and hold it until you hear a beep.
To listen to a stored station, select a band, then press the preset button.
Selector Knob
Turn to tune the radio frequency.
Press, and then turn to select an
item. After that, press again to
make your selection.
MENU/CLOCK Button
Press to display the menu items.
Audio/Information Screen
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 191 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio
192
Features
Provides text data information related to your selected RDS capable FM station.
■To find an RDS station from Station List
1. Press while listening to an FM station.
2. Rotate to select the station, then press .
■Update List
Updates your available station list at any time.
1. Press while listening to an FM station.
2. Rotate to select Update List, then press .
■Radio text
Displays the radio text information of the selected RDS station.
1. Press the MENU/CLOCK button.
2. Rotate to select Settings, then press .
3. Rotate to select RDS Settings, then press .
4. Rotate to select Radio Text, then press .
■Scan
Samples each of the strongest stations on the selected band for 10 seconds.
1. Press the MENU/CLOCK button.
2. Rotate to select Scan, then press .
To turn off scan, press .
■Radio Data System (RDS)
1Playing AM/FM Radio
The ST indicator appears on the display indicating
stereo FM broadcasts.
Stereo reproduction in AM is not available.
You can store 6 AM stations and 12 FM stations into
the preset memory.
Switching the Audio Mode
Press the SOURCE button on the steering wheel.
2Audio Remote Controls P. 182
1Radio Data System (RDS)
When you select an RDS-capable FM station, the RDS
automatically turns on, and the frequency display
changes to the station name. However, when the
signals of that station become weak, the display
changes from the station name to the frequency.
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 192 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
193
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD
Continued
Features
Playing a CD
Your audio system supports audio CDs, CD-Rs, and CD-RWs in either MP3 or WMA,
or AAC*1 format. With the CD loaded, press the CD/AUX button.
*1:Only AAC format files recorded with iTunes are playable on this unit.
CD/AUX Button
Press to play a CD.
(CD Eject) Button
Press to eject a CD.
CD Slot
Insert a CD about halfway into the CD slot.
(Back) Button
Press to go back to the previous
display or cancel a setting.
/ (Seek/Skip) Buttons
Press or to change tracks
(files in MP3, WMA, or AAC).
Press and hold to move rapidly within a
track/file.
VOL/ (Power/volume) Knob
Press to turn the audio system
on and off.
Turn to adjust the volume.
Selector Knob
Turn to change tracks/files. Press
to display a track/folder list.
Press and turn to select an item,
then press to set your selection.
MENU/CLOCK Button
Press to display the menu items.
Audio/Information Screen
Play Mode Buttons (1-6)
Press to select a play mode.
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 193 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD
194
Features
1. Press to switch the display to a folder list.
2. Rotate to select a folder.
3. Press to display a list of tracks in that
folder.
4. Rotate to select a track, then press .
■How to Select a File from a Folder with the Selector Knob
(MP3/WMA/AAC)
1Playing a CD
NOTICE
Do not use CDs with adhesive labels. The label can
cause the CD to jam in the unit.
WMA files protected by digital rights management
(DRM) cannot be played.
The audio system displays Unplayable File, then
skips to the next file.
Text data appears on the display under the following
circumstances:
•When you select a new folder, file, or track.
•When you change the audio mode to CD.
•When you insert a CD.
If you eject the CD but do not remove it from the slot,
the system reloads the CD automatically after several
seconds.
Track
Selection
Folder
Selection
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 194 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
195
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD
Features
You can select repeat, random, and scan modes when playing a track or file.
Available mode icons appear above the play
mode buttons.
Press the button corresponding to the mode
you want to select.
■To turn off a play mode
Press the selected button.
■How to Select a Play Mode
1How to Select a Play Mode
Play Mode Menu Items
Repeat
Repeat One Folder (MP3/WMA/AAC):
Repeats all files in the current folder.
Repeat One Track: Repeats the current
track/file.
Random
Random in Folder (MP3/WMA/AAC): Plays
all files in the current folder in random order.
Random All: Plays all tracks/files in random
order.
Scan
Scan Folders (MP3/WMA/AAC): Provides
10-second sampling of the first file in each of the
main folders.
Scan Tracks: Provides 10-second sampling of
all tracks on the CD (all files in the current folder in
MP3, WMA, or AAC).
You can also select a play mode by pressing the
MENU/CLOCK button.
Rotate to select Play Mode, then press .
Rotate to select a mode, then press .
To turn it off, rotate to select Normal Play, then
press .
Play Mode Buttons
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 195 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
196
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod
Features
Playing an iPod
Connect the iPod using your dock connector to the USB port, then press the CD/
AUX button.
2USB Port(s) P. 179
USB Indicator
Appears when an iPod is connected.
CD/AUX Button
Press to select iPod (if connected).
(Back) Button
Press to go back to the previous
display or cancel a setting.
/ (Seek/Skip) Buttons
Press or to change songs.
Press and hold to move rapidly within a song.
VOL/ (Power/volume) Knob
Press to turn the audio system
on and off.
Turn to adjust the volume.
Selector Knob
Turn to change songs.
Press and turn to select an item,
then press to set your selection.
MENU/CLOCK Button
Press to display the menu items.
Audio/Information Screen
Album Art
Play Mode Buttons
Press to select a play mode.
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 196 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
Continued 197
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod
Features
1. Press to display the iPod music list.
2. Rotate to select a category.
3. Press to display a list of items in the
category.
4. Rotate to select an item, then press .
uPress and rotate repeatedly until a
desired item you want to listen is
displayed.
■How to Select a Song from the iPod Music List with the
Selector Knob
1Playing an iPod
Available operating functions vary on models or
versions. Some functions may not be available on the
vehicle’s audio system.
If there is a problem, you may see an error message
on the audio display.
2iPod/USB Flash Drive P. 234
Item
Selection
Category
Selection
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 197 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod
198
Features
You can select repeat and shuffle modes when playing a song.
Available mode icons appear above the play
mode buttons.
Press the button corresponding to the mode
you want to select.
■To turn off a play mode
Press the selected button.
■How to Select a Play Mode
1How to Select a Play Mode
Play Mode Menu Items
Shuffle Album: Plays all available albums in
a selected category (playlists, artists, albums, songs,
genres, or composers) in random order.
Shuffle All: Plays all available songs in a
selected category (playlists, artists, albums, songs,
genres, or composers) in random order.
Repeat One Track: Repeats the current
song.
You can also select a play mode by pressing the
MENU/CLOCK button.
Rotate to select Play Mode, then press .
Rotate to select a mode, then press .
To turn it off, rotate to select Normal Play, then
press .
Play Mode Buttons
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 198 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
199
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive
Continued
Features
Playing a USB Flash Drive
Your audio system reads and plays sound files on a USB flash drive in either MP3,
WMA or AAC*1 format.
Connect your USB flash drive to the USB port, then press the CD/AUX button.
2USB Port(s) P. 179
*1:Only AAC format files recorded with iTunes are playable on this unit.
USB Indicator
Appears when a USB flash drive is connected.
CD/AUX Button
Press to select USB flash drive
(if connected).
(Back) Button
Press to go back to the previous display.
/ (Seek/Skip) Buttons
Press or to change files.
Press and hold to move rapidly within a file.
VOL/ (Power/volume) Knob
Press to turn the audio system
on and off.
Turn to adjust the volume.
Selector Knob
Turn to change files.
Press and turn to select an item,
then press to set your selection.
MENU/CLOCK Button
Press to display the menu items.
Audio/Information Screen
Play Mode Buttons (1-6)
Press to select a play mode.
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 199 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive
200
Features
1. Press to display a folder list.
2. Rotate to select a folder.
3. Press to display a list of files in that
folder.
4. Rotate to select a file, then press .
■How to Select a File from a Folder with the Selector Knob
1Playing a USB Flash Drive
Use the recommended USB flash drives.
2General Information on the Audio System
P. 237
Files in WMA format protected by digital rights
management (DRM) cannot be played.
The audio system displays Unplayable File, and then
skips to the next file.
If there is a problem, you may see an error message
on the audio/information screen.
2iPod/USB Flash Drive P. 234
Track
Selection
Folder
Selection
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 200 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
201
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive
Features
You can select repeat, random, and scan modes when playing a file.
Available mode icons appear above the play
mode buttons.
Press the button corresponding to the mode
you want to select.
■To turn off a play mode
Press the selected button.
■How to Select a Play Mode
1How to Select a Play Mode
Play Mode Menu Items
Repeat
Repeat One Folder: Repeats all files in the
current folder.
Repeat One Track: Repeats the current file.
Random
Random in Folder: Plays all files in the
current folder in random order.
Random All: Plays all files in random order.
Scan
Scan Folders: Provides 10-second sampling
of the first file in each of the main folders.
Scan Tracks: Provides 10-second sampling of
all files in the current folder.
You can also select a play mode by pressing the
MENU/CLOCK button.
Rotate to select Play Mode, then press .
Rotate to select a mode, then press .
To turn it off, rotate to select Normal Play, then
press .
Play Mode Buttons
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 201 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
202
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio
Features
Playing Bluetooth® Audio
Your audio system allows you to listen to music from your Bluetooth-compatible
phone.
This function is available when the phone is paired and connected to the vehicle’s
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) system.
2Phone Setup P. 280
1Playing Bluetooth® Audio
Not all Bluetooth-enabled phones with streaming
audio capabilities are compatible with the system.
For a list of compatible phones:
•U.S.: Visit automobiles.honda.com/handsfreelink/,
or call 1-888-528-7876.
•Canada: Visit www.handsfreelink.ca, or call 1-888-
528-7876.
In some states, it may be illegal to perform some data
device functions while driving.
Only one phone can be used with HFL at a time.
When there are more than two paired phones in the
vehicle, the first paired phone the system finds is
automatically connected.
If more than one phone is paired to the HFL system,
there will be a delay before the system begins to play.
In some cases, the name of the artist, album, or track
may not appear correctly.
Some functions may not be available on some
devices.
CD/AUX Button
Press to select
Bluetooth® Audio.
VOL/
(Volume/
Power) Knob
Press to turn
the audio
system on and
off.
Turn to adjust
the volume.
MENU/CLOCK
Button
Press to display
the menu
items.
Audio/Information Screen
Bluetooth Indicator
Appears when your phone is connected to HFL.
/ (Seek/Skip) Buttons
Press or to change files.
Play Button (Preset 1)
Press to resume playing a file.
Pause Button (Preset 2)
Press to pause playing a
file.
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 202 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
Continued 203
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio
Features
1. Make sure that your phone is paired and
connected to HFL.
2. Press the CD/AUX button until the
Bluetooth Audio Source is selected.
If the phone is not recognized, another HFL-
compatible phone, which is not compatible
for Bluetooth® Audio, may already be
connected.
■To pause or resume a file
Press a Play or Pause button to select a mode.
■To Play Bluetooth® Audio Files
1To Play Bluetooth® Audio Files
To play the audio files, you may need to operate your
phone. If so, follow the phone maker's operating
instructions.
The pause function may not be available on some
phones.
If any audio device is connected to the auxiliary input
jack or USB port, you may need to press the CD/AUX
button repeatedly to select the Bluetooth® Audio
system.
Switching to another mode pauses the music playing
from your phone.
Play Button
Pause Button
CD/AUX Button
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 203 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio
204
Features
1. Press to display the music search list.
2. Rotate to select a category.
3. Press to display a list of items in the
category.
4. Rotate to select an item, then press .
uPress and rotate repeatedly until a
desired item you want to listen is
displayed.
■How to Select a Song from the Music Search List with the
Selector Knob
1How to Select a Song from the Music Search List with the Selector
Knob
Depending on the Bluetooth® device you connect,
some or all of the categories may not be displayed.
Item
Selection
Category
Selection
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 204 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
205
Features
Audio System Basic Operation
To use the audio system function, the ignition switch must be in ACCESSORY (q or
ON (w*1.
: Select to go to the HOME screen.
2Switching the Display P. 206
: Touch to select any mode.
The available mode includes Change Source,
Station List, Save Preset, Radio Text,
Music Search, and play modes. Play modes
can be also selected from Scan, Random/
Repeat, and so on.
: Select to go back to the previous display
when it is displayed.
(Day/Night) button: Press to change
the audio/information screen brightness.
Press once and select or to make
an adjustment.
uEach time you press , the mode
switches between the daytime mode,
nighttime mode and OFF mode.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.
1Audio System Basic Operation
Audio Menu Items
2Station List P. 214
2Music Search P. 217, 220, 225
2Random/Repeat P. 218, 226
2Scan P. 215, 218, 226
Models with display audio system
VOL
HOME
MENU
BACK
(Day/Night)
Button
(HOME)
Icon
(MENU) Icon
(BACK) Icon
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 205 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
206
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
Features
Audio/Information Screen
Displays the audio status and wallpaper. From this screen, you can go to various
setup options.
Press the (display) button on the steering wheel to change the display.
■Switching the Display
1Audio/Information Screen
•Use simple gestures — including touching,
swiping, and scrolling — to operate certain audio
functions.
•Wearing gloves may limit or prevent touchscreen
response.
•You can use the microfiber soft cleaning cloth to
remove dust or fingerprints from the touchscreen.
Using the button
(Display) Button Audio/Information Screen
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 206 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
207
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
Continued
Features
Select HOME to go to the HOME screen.
Select Phone, Info, Audio, Settings, or HondaLink.
■Phone
Shows the HFL information.
2Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® P. 297
■Info
Shows the Trip Computer, Clock/Wallpaper, Voice Info, or System/Device
Information.
Using the HOME screen
HOME screen
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 207 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
208
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
Features
■Audio
Shows the current audio information.
■Settings
Enters the customizing menu screen.
2Customized Features P. 252
■HondaLink Apps
Connects with your smartphone*1 to play personalized music, information, and
social media streams.
2Smartphone Apps P. 231
*1: Available on specific phones only. Check handsfreelink.honda.com for compatible phones
and hondalink.com for feature details.
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 208 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
Continued 209
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
Features
You can change, store, and delete the wallpaper on the audio/information screen.
■Import wallpaper
You can import up to five images, one at a time, for wallpaper from a USB flash
drive.
1. Connect the USB flash drive to the USB
port.
2USB Port(s) P. 179
2. Select Settings to go to the Settings
screen.
3. Select Info.
4. Select Clock/Wallpaper Type, then the
Wallpaper tab.
5. Select Add New.
uThe picture name is displayed on the list.
6. Select a desired picture.
uThe preview is displayed on the left side
on the screen.
7. Select Start Import to save the data.
uThen the display will return to the
wallpaper list.
■Wallpaper Setup
1Wallpaper Setup
•When importing wallpaper files, the image must be
in the USB flash drive’s root directory. Images in a
folder cannot be imported.
•The file name must be fewer than 256 characters.
•The file format of the image that can be imported
is BMP (bmp) or JPEG (jpg).
•The individual file size limit is 5 MB.
•The maximum image size is 4,096 x 4,096 pixels. If
the image size is less than 800 × 480 pixels, the
image is displayed in the middle of the screen with
the extra area appearing in black.
•Up to 5 files can be selected.
•If the USB flash drive does not have any pictures,
the No files detected message appears.
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 209 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
210
Features
■Select wallpaper
1. Select Settings to go to the Settings screen.
2. Select Info.
3. Select Clock/Wallpaper Type, then the Wallpaper tab.
uThe screen changes to the wallpaper list.
4. Select a desired wallpaper.
uThe preview is displayed on the left side on the screen.
uThe pop-up menu appears on the screen.
5. Select Set.
uThe display will return to the wallpaper list.
■To view wallpaper once it is set
1. Press the (Home) button.
2. Select Info.
3. Press the (Menu) button.
4. Select Clock/Wallpaper.
■Delete wallpaper
1. Select Settings to go to the Settings screen.
2. Select Info.
3. Select Clock/Wallpaper Type, then the Wallpaper tab.
uThe screen changes to the wallpaper list.
4. Select a wallpaper that you want to delete.
uThe preview is displayed on the left side on the screen.
uThe pop-up menu appears on the screen.
5. Select Delete.
uThe confirmation message will appear.
6. Select Yes to delete completely.
uThe display will return to the wallpaper list.
1Wallpaper Setup
From the pop-up menu, select Preview to see a
preview at full-size screen.
To go back to the previous screen, select OK, or
BACK.
When the file size is large, it takes a while to be
previewed.
To delete all wallpapers you add, select Delete All,
then Yes.
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 210 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
211
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAdjusting the Sound
Features
Adjusting the Sound
1. Select HOME.
2. Select Settings.
3. Select Audio.
4. Select Sound.
Select the tabs to adjust the following choices:
BASS, TREBLE, FADER, BALANCE, SVC
(Speed-sensitive Volume Compensation)
1Adjusting the Sound
The SVC has four modes: Off, Low, Mid, and High.
SVC adjusts the volume level based on the vehicle
speed. As you go faster, audio volume increases. As
you slow down, audio volume decreases.
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 211 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
212
uuAudio System Basic OperationuDisplay Setup
Features
Display Setup
You can change the brightness or color theme of the audio/information screen.
1. Select HOME.
2. Select Settings to go to the Settings
screen.
3. Select System.
4. Select the Display tab.
5. Select Display Settings.
6. Select the setting you want.
7. Select OK.
1. Select HOME.
2. Select Settings to go to the Settings
screen.
3. Select System.
4. Select the Display tab.
5. Select Background Color.
6. Select the setting you want.
7. Select OK.
■Changing the Screen Brightness
1Changing the Screen Brightness
You can change the Contrast and Black Level
settings in the same manner.
■Changing the Screen’s Color Theme
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 212 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
213
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio
Continued
Features
Playing AM/FM Radio
*1:Some or all of the lists may not be displayed.
VOL
HOME
MENU
BACK
VOL (Volume) Icons
Select to adjust the volume.
(BACK) Icon
Select to go back to the previous
display.
Seek Icons
Select or to search
up and down the selected band
for a station with a strong
signal.
(Power) Button
Press to turn the audio system on
and off.
Open/Close Icon*1
Displays/hides the detailed
information.
(MENU) Icon
Select to display the menu items.
Audio/Information Screen
Tune Icons
Select or to tune the radio
frequency.
Preset Icons
Turn the radio frequency for preset memory.
Select and hold the preset icon to store that station.
Select to display preset 7 onwards.
Scan
Select to scan each station with a
strong signal.
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 213 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio
214
Features
To store a station:
1. Tune to the selected station.
2. Select MENU.
3. Select Save Preset.
4. Select the preset number you want to store that station.
Provides text data information related to your selected RDS-capable FM station.
■To find an RDS station from Station List
1. Select MENU while listening to an FM station.
2. Select Station List.
3. Select the station.
■Manual update
Updates your available station list at any time.
1. Select MENU while listening to an FM station.
2. Select Station List.
3. Select Refresh.
■Preset Memory
■Radio Data System (RDS)
1Playing AM/FM Radio
The ST indicator appears on the display indicating
stereo FM broadcasts.
Stereo reproduction in AM is not available.
Switching the Audio Mode
Press the SOURCE button on the steering wheel or
select SOURCE on the list.
2Audio Remote Controls P. 182
You can also switch the mode by selecting Change
Source on the MENU screen.
You can store 6 AM stations and 12 FM stations into
the preset memory.
1Radio Data System (RDS)
When you select an RDS-capable FM station, the RDS
automatically turns on, and the frequency display
changes to the station name. However, when the
signals of that station become weak, the display
changes from the station name to the frequency.
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 214 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
215
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio
Features
■Radio text
Displays the radio text information of the selected RDS station.
1. Select MENU.
2. Select View Radio Text.
■Scan
Samples each of the strongest stations on the selected band for 10 seconds.
1. Select MENU.
2. Select Scan.
To turn off scan, select Cancel.
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 215 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
216
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD
Features
Playing a CD
Your audio system supports audio CDs, CD-Rs, and CD-RWs in either MP3 or WMA,
or AAC*1 format. With the CD loaded, select the CD mode.
*1:Only AAC format files recorded with iTunes are playable on this unit.
*2:Some or all of the lists may not be displayed.
VOL
HOME
MENU
BACK
VOL (Volume) Icons
Select to adjust the volume.
(BACK) Icon
Select to go back to the previous
display. Track Icons
Select or to change tracks
(files in MP3, WMA, or AAC).
Select and hold to move rapidly within
a track.
(Power) Button
Press to turn the audio system
on and off.
Open/Close Icon*2
Displays/hides the detailed
information.
(MENU) Icon
Select to display the menu items.
Audio/Information Screen
Folder Icons
Select to skip to the next folder,
and to skip to the beginning of
the previous folder in MP3, WMA, or
AAC.
(CD Eject) Button
Press to eject a CD.
CD Slot
Insert a CD about halfway into the CD slot.
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 216 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
Continued 217
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD
Features
1. Select MENU and select Music Search.
2. Select a folder.
3. Select a track.
■How to Select a File from the Music Search List (MP3/WMA/
AAC)
1Playing a CD
NOTICE
Do not use CDs with adhesive labels. The label can
cause the CD to jam in the unit.
WMA files protected by digital rights management
(DRM) cannot be played.
The audio system displays Unplayable File, then
skips to the next file.
Text data appears on the display under the following
circumstances:
•When you select a new folder, file, or track.
•When you change the audio mode to CD.
•When you insert a CD.
If you eject the CD but do not remove it from the slot,
the system reloads the CD automatically after several
seconds.
Track
Selection
Folder
Selection
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 217 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD
218
Features
You can select scan, repeat, and random modes when playing a track or file.
1. Select MENU.
2. Select Scan or Random/Repeat.
3. Select a mode.
■To turn off a play mode
1. Select MENU.
2. Select the mode you want to turn off.
■How to Select a Play Mode
1How to Select a Play Mode
Play Mode Menu Items
Scan
Scan Folders (MP3/WMA/AAC): Provides 10-
second sampling of the first file in each of the main
folders.
Scan Tracks: Provides 10-second sampling of all
tracks on the CD (all files in the current folder in MP3,
WMA, or AAC).
Random/Repeat
Repeat Folder (MP3/WMA/AAC): Repeats all files
in the current folder.
Repeat Track: Repeats the current track/file.
Random in Folder (MP3/WMA/AAC): Plays all files
in the current folder in random order.
Random All Tracks: Plays all tracks/files in random
order.
Random/Repeat is selected.
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 218 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
219
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod
Continued
Features
Playing an iPod
Connect the iPod using your dock connector to the USB port, then select the iPod
mode.
2USB Port(s) P. 179
*1:Some or all of the lists may not be displayed.
VOL
HOME
MENU
BACK
USB Indicator
Appears when an iPod is connected.
Songs Icons
Select or to change songs.
Select and hold to move rapidly within a song.
Audio/Information Screen
Cover Art
VOL (Volume) Icons
Select to adjust the volume.
(BACK) Icon
Select to go back to the previous
display.
(Power) Button
Press to turn the audio system
on and off.
(MENU) Icon
Select to display the menu items.
Open/Close Icon*1
Displays/hides the detailed
information.
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 219 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod
220
Features
1. Select MENU and select Music Search.
2. Select the items on that menu.
■How to Select a Song from the Music Search List
1How to Select a Song from the Music Search List
Available operating functions vary on models or
versions. Some functions may not be available on the
vehicle’s audio system.
If there is a problem, you may see an error message
on the audio/information screen.
2iPod/USB Flash Drive P. 234
If you operate the music app on your iPhone/iPod
while the phone is connected to the display audio
system, you may no longer be able to operate the
same app on the display audio. Reconnect the device
if necessary.
Track
Selection
Folder
Selection
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 220 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
221
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod
Features
You can select repeat and shuffle modes when playing a file.
1. Select MENU.
2. Select Shuffle/Repeat.
3. Select a mode.
■To turn off a play mode
1. Select MENU.
2. Select the mode you want to turn off.
■How to Select a Play Mode
1How to Select a Play Mode
Play Mode Menu Items
Repeat Song: Repeats the current file.
Shuffle Albums: Plays all available albums in a
selected list (playlists, artists, albums, songs, genres,
or composers) in random order.
Shuffle All Songs: Plays all available files in a
selected list (playlists, artists, albums, songs, genres,
or composers) in random order.
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 221 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
222
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Internet Radio
Features
Playing Internet Radio
Connect a compatible phone through Bluetooth®.
2Phone Setup P. 305
You can also connect the phone using your dock connector to the USB port. Select
Source to select Pandora mode.
*1:Some or all of the lists may not be displayed.
U.S. models
Compatible phones only
1Playing Internet Radio
Pandora®, the Pandora logo, and the Pandora trade
dress are trademarks or registered trademarks of
Pandora Media, Inc., used with permission. Pandora
is currently available exclusively in the United States.
To find out if your phone is compatible with this
feature, visit automobiles.honda.com/handsfreelink/,
or call 1-888-528-7876
To use this service in your vehicle, the Pandora® app
must first be installed on your phone. Visit
www.pandora.com. for more information.
iPhone only
Audio/Information ScreenCover Art
VOL (Volume) Icons
Select to adjust the
volume.
(BACK) Icon
Select to go back to the previous
display.
(Power) Button
Press to turn the audio
system on and off.
(MENU) Icon
Select to display
the menu items.
Play/Pause Icon
Select to resume or play
a song.
Open/Close Icon*1
Displays/hides the detailed
information.
Station Up/Down Icons
Select to change a station. Skip Icon
Select to skip a song.
Like/Dislike Icons
Select to evaluate a
song.
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 222 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
223
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Internet Radio
Features
You can operate some of the Pandora® menu items from your vehicle’s audio
system. The available items are:
•Bookmark
•Station List
•New Station
•Change Source
•Sound
■Operating a menu item
1. Select MENU.
2. Select an item.
■Pandora® Menu
1Playing Internet Radio
Pandora® is free, personalized radio that plays music
and comedy you’ll love. Just start with the name of
one of your favorite artists, songs, comedians or
composers and Pandora® will create a custom station
that plays similar tracks. Pandora® also features
hundreds of genre stations ranging from Dubstep to
Smooth Jazz to Power Workout.
If you cannot operate Pandora® through the audio
system, it may be streaming through Bluetooth®
Audio. Make sure Pandora® mode on your audio
system is selected.
Changing Stations
To change stations, activate the Pandora® menu,
select Station List, and then select a new station.
1Pandora® Menu
Available operating functions vary on software
versions. Some functions may not be available on the
vehicle’s audio system.
If there is a problem, you may see an error message
on the audio/information screen.
2Pandora® P. 235
Pandora® may limit the total number of skips allowed
on the service. If you dislike a track after the skip limit
has been reached, your feedback will be saved but
the current track will continue to play.
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 223 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
224
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive
Features
Playing a USB Flash Drive
Your audio system reads and plays sound files on a USB flash drive in either MP3,
WMA or AAC*1 format.
Connect your USB flash drive to the USB port, then select the USB mode.
2USB Port(s) P. 179
*1:Only AAC format files recorded with iTunes are playable on this unit.
*2:Some or all of the lists may not be displayed.
VOL
HOME
MENU
BACK
USB Indicator
Appears when a USB flash drive is connected.
Track Icons
Select or to change files.
Select and hold to move rapidly within
a track.
Audio/Information Screen
VOL (Volume) Icons
Select to adjust the volume.
(BACK) Icon
Select to go back to the previous
display.
(Power) Button
Press to turn the audio system
on and off.
Open/Close Icon*2
Displays/hides the detailed
information.
(MENU) Icon
Select to display the menu items.
Folder Icons
Select to skip to the next folder,
and to skip to the beginning of
the previous folder.
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 224 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
Continued 225
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive
Features
1. Select MENU and select Music Search.
2. Select a folder.
3. Select a track.
■How to Select a File from the Music Research List
1Playing a USB Flash Drive
Use the recommended USB flash drives.
2General Information on the Audio System
P. 237
Files in WMA format protected by digital rights
management (DRM) cannot be played.
The audio system displays Unplayable File, and then
skips to the next file.
If there is a problem, you may see an error message
on the audio/information screen.
2iPod/USB Flash Drive P. 234
Track
Selection
Folder
Selection
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 225 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive
226
Features
You can select scan, repeat, and random modes when playing a file.
1. Select MENU.
2. Select Scan or Random/Repeat.
3. Select a mode.
■To turn off a play mode
1. Select MENU.
2. Select the mode you want to turn off.
■How to Select a Play Mode
1How to Select a Play Mode
Play Mode Menu Items
Scan
Scan Folders: Provides 10-second sampling of the
first file in each of the main folders.
Scan Tracks: Provides 10-second sampling of all files
in the current folder.
Random/Repeat
Repeat Folder: Repeats all files in the current folder.
Repeat Track: Repeats the current file.
Random in Folder: Plays all files in the current
folder in random order.
Random All Tracks: Plays all files in random order.
Random/Repeat is selected.
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 226 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
227
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio
Continued
Features
Playing Bluetooth® Audio
Your audio system allows you to listen to music from your Bluetooth-compatible
phone.
This function is available when the phone is paired and connected to the vehicle’s
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) system.
2Phone Setup P. 305
*1:Depending on the Bluetooth device you connect, some or all of the lists may not
be displayed.
1Playing Bluetooth® Audio
Not all Bluetooth-enabled phones with streaming
audio capabilities are compatible with the system.
For a list of compatible phones:
•U.S.: Visit automobiles.honda.com/handsfreelink/,
or call 1-888-528-7876.
•Canada: Visit www.handsfreelink.ca, or call 1-888-
528-7876.
In some states, it may be illegal to perform some data
device functions while driving.
Only one phone can be used with HFL at a time.
When there are more than two paired phones in the
vehicle, the first paired phone the system finds is
automatically linked.
If more than one phone is paired to the HFL system,
there may be a delay before the system begins to
play.
In some cases, the name of the artist, album, or track
may not appear correctly.
A No Device Connected message may be displayed
if:
•The phone is not linked to HFL.
•The phone is not turned on.
•The phone is not in the vehicle.
•An incompatible phone is connected.
The following functions may not be available on
some devices:
•Pause function
•Group selection
VOL
HOME
MENU
BACK
Audio/Information Screen Bluetooth Indicator
Appears when your phone is
connected to HFL.
Track Icons
Select or to change
tracks.
VOL (Volume) Icons
Select to adjust the
volume.
(BACK) Icon
Select to go back to the previous
display.
(Power) Button
Press to turn the audio
system on and off.
Open/Close Icon*1
Displays/hides the detailed
information.
(MENU) Icon
Select to display the
menu items.
Group Icons
Select or to change group.
Pause Icon
Play Icon
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 227 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio
228
Features
1. Make sure that your phone is paired and
connected to HFL.
2Phone Setup P. 305
2. Press the Bluetooth® Audio mode.
If the phone is not recognized, another HFL-
compatible phone, which is not compatible
for Bluetooth® Audio, may already be
connected.
■To pause or resume a file
Select the play icon or pause icon, respectively.
1. Select MENU.
2. Select Music Search.
3. Select a search category (e.g., Albums).
4. Select an item.
uThe selection begins playing.
■To Play Bluetooth® Audio Files
1To Play Bluetooth® Audio Files
To play the audio files, you may need to operate your
phone. If so, follow the phone maker's operating
instructions.
Switching to another mode pauses the music playing
from your phone.
▲
▲
■Searching for Music
1Searching for Music
Depending on the Bluetooth device you connect,
some or all of the lists may not be displayed.
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 228 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
229
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a Video Using the HDMI®
Continued
Features
Playing a Video Using the HDMI®
Your audio system allows you to play videos from an HDMI®-compatible device
when parked.
Connect the device, using an HDMI® cable, then select the HDMI® mode.
2HDMI® Port* P. 180
VOL
HOME
MENU
BACK
Audio/Information Screen
VOL (Volume) Icons
Select to adjust the volume.
(BACK) Icon
Select to go back to the previous display.
(Power) Button
Press to turn the audio system
on and off.
(MENU) Icon
Select to display the menu
items.
* Not available on all models
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 229 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a Video Using the HDMI®
230
Features
1. Select HOME.
2. Select Settings to go to the Settings
screen.
3. Select Audio.
4. Select Aspect Ratio Adjustment.
5. Select the setting you want.
6. Select OK.
■Changing the Screen Aspect
1Playing a Video Using the HDMI®
This feature is limited while driving. To play videos,
stop your vehicle and apply the parking brake.
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 230 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
231
uuAudio System Basic OperationuSmartphone Apps
Features
Smartphone Apps
You can connect a compatible smartphone to the system to enable integration
between the smartphone’s approved apps and the vehicle. This allows you to
control the phone through the vehicle display. To check smart phone compatibility,
download the HondaLink app, and view connection instructions, visit
handsfreelink.honda.com. For the latest apps and feature details, check
hondalink.com.
1Smartphone Apps
Park in a safe place before connecting your phone
and while operating the displayed apps.
Not all phones and apps are compatible with the
system. The system does not display all the available
apps on smartphone, and some apps need to be
preinstalled. Ask a dealer for details.
You need to switch the Bluetooth connection to your
smartphone if another electronic device is connected.
2Changing the currently paired phone
P. 306
The following may vary by phone type:
•How to connect a smartphone to the system.
•Apps that can be operated on the screen.
•Display response time/update time.
We do not support every app operation on the
display audio.
Ask the app provider for any questions on the app’s
features.
VOL
HOME
MENU
BACK
Microphone
(BACK) Icon
Select to go back to the previous display.
(Not available on all phones.)
(HOME) Icon
Select to go back to HOME or to a previous
display.
(MENU) Icon
Select to display
the menu on the
app you selected.
(Not available on
all apps.)
Microphone
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 231 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
232
uuAudio System Basic OperationuSiri® Eyes Free
Features
Siri® Eyes Free
You can talk to Siri using the Talk button on the steering wheel when your iPhone is
paired to Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®.
2Phone Setup P. 305
■Using Siri® Eyes Free
1Siri® Eyes Free
Siri is a trademark of Apple Inc.
Check Apple Inc. website for features available for
Siri.
When operating the vehicle, only use Siri through the
Talk button.
1Using Siri® Eyes Free
Some commands work only on specific phone
features or apps.
(Hang-up/back) button:
Press to deactivate Siri® Eyes Free.
(Talk) button:
Press and hold until the display changes as shown.
Appears
when Siri is
activated in
Eyes Free
While in Siri® Eyes Free:
The display remains the same.
No feedback or commands
appear.
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 232 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
233
Features
Audio Error Messages
CD Player
If a disc error occurs, you may see the following error messages.
*1: Display audio system
*2: Color audio system
Error Message Cause Solution
Unplayable File Track/file format not supported •Current track/file will be skipped. The next supported track/file
plays automatically.
Bad Disc
Please check Owner’s
Manual
Please push eject button*1
Bad Disc
Please check
owners manual.
Push Eject*2
Mechanical error
•Press the (eject) button and remove the disc, and check that
the error message is cleared.
•Check that the disc is not damaged or deformed, and insert the
disc again.
2Protecting CDs P. 238
•If the error message reappears, press the button, and pull out
the disc.
•Insert a different disc.
If the new disc plays, there is a problem with the first disc.
•If the error message repeats, or the disc cannot be removed,
contact a dealer.
Do not try to force the disc out of the player.
Mecha Error
Bad Disc
Please Check Owner’s
Manual*1
Bad Disc
Please check
owners manual.*2
Servo error
Check Disc Disc error •Check that the disc is not damaged or deformed.
2Protecting CDs P. 238
Heat Error High temperature •Turn the audio system off and allow the player to cool down until
the error message is cleared.
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 233 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
234
uuAudio Error MessagesuiPod/USB Flash Drive
Features
iPod/USB Flash Drive
If an error occurs while playing an iPod or USB flash drive, you may see the following
error messages. If you cannot clear the error message, contact a dealer.
*1: Display audio system
*2: Color audio system
Error Message Solution
USB Error Appears when there is a problem with the USB adapter unit. Check if the device is compatible
with the USB adapter unit.
The connected USB device has a problem.
See Owner’s Manual*1
Bad USB Device*2
Appears when an incompatible device is connected. Disconnect the device. Then turn the
audio system off, and turn it on again. Do not reconnect the device that caused the error.
Unsupported Version*1
Unsupported Ver*2
Appears when an unsupported iPod is connected. If it appears when a supported iPod is
connected, update the iPod software to the newer version.
Connect Retry*1
Retry Connection*2 Appears when the system does not acknowledge the iPod. Reconnect the iPod.
Unplayable File Appears when the files in the USB flash drive are DRM or an unsupported format. This error
message appears for about 3 seconds, then plays the next song.
No Data*1, *2
USB No Song*2
iPod No Song*2
Appears when the iPod is empty.
Appears when the USB flash drive is empty or there are no MP3, WMA, or AAC files in the
USB flash drive.
Check that compatible files are stored on the device.
Unsupported Appears when an unsupported device is connected. If it appears when a supported device is
connected, reconnect the device.
iPod
USB flash drive
iPod and USB flash drive
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 234 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
235
uuAudio Error MessagesuPandora®
Continued
Features
Pandora®
If an error occurs while playing Pandora®, you may see the following error messages.
If you cannot clear the error message, contact a dealer.
Error Message Solution
The maximum number of stations has been created.
To create more, please delete one or more previously created
stations.
●Appears when the number of stations that can be created is
exceeded. Follow the message.
Unable to create new station. Please try again.
●Appears when the commanded operation is failed. Try again
later.
Unable to play Pandora. Please try again later.
Unable to save bookmark.
This Pandora station is currently not available. Please select
another station.
●Appears when the station you selected is not available. Change a
station, or try again later.
Unable to play Pandora. When stopped, log-in to Pandora. ●Appears when you have not logged into Pandora®. Follow the
message.
Unable to connect to Pandora. When stopped, check your
mobile phone.
●Appears when failed to connect. Check your device and try again.
Unable to play Pandora. Please try again later.
Connect Retry
Models with display audio system
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 235 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
236
uuAudio Error MessagesuPandora®
Features
Error Message Solution
Unsupported •Appears when the device is not supported. Use another device.
Unsupported Version •Appears when Pandora® version is not supported. Update
Pandora® to the latest version.
Pandora App version is not supported
Unable to connect to the phone.
Please make sure the phone’s Bluetooth setting is ON and try
again.
•Appears when Pandora® is unable to play music. Check the
Bluetooth status on your device.
No Data •Appears when no data is available with Pandora® activated.
Reboot the app and reconnect the device.
The connected USB device has a problem.
See Owner’s Manual
•Appears when an incompatible device is connected. Disconnect
the device. Then turn the audio system off, and turn it again. Do
not reconnect the device that caused the error.
No stations found. Please create a station. •Appears when there is no station list on the device. Create one
on your device.
The maximum number of tracks that can be skipped per hour
has been reached.
•Appears when you try to skip a song or select dislike over the
predetermined number of times in an hour.
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 236 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
237
Continued
Features
General Information on the Audio System
Recommended CDs
•Use only high-quality CD-R or CD-RW discs labeled for audio use.
•Use only CD-R or CD-RW discs on which the recordings are closed.
•Play only standard round-shaped CDs.
•Some software files may not allow for audio play or text data display.
•Some versions of MP3, WMA, or AAC formats may be unsupported.
1Recommended CDs
A Dual-disc cannot play on this audio unit. If recorded
under certain conditions, a CD-R or CD-RW may not
play either.
■CDs with MP3, WMA, or AAC files
The CD packages or jackets should have one of these marks.
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 237 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuRecommended CDs
238
Features
■Protecting CDs
Follow these precautions when handling or storing CDs:
•Store a CD in its case when it is not being played.
•When wiping a CD, use a soft clean cloth from the center to the outside edge.
•Handle a CD by its edge. Never touch either surface.
•Never insert foreign objects into the CD player.
•Keep CDs out of direct sunlight and extreme heat.
•Do not place stabilizer rings or labels on the CD.
•Avoid fingerprints, liquids, and felt-tip pens on the CD.
1Protecting CDs
NOTICE
Do not insert a damaged CD. It may be stuck inside
and damage the audio unit.
Examples:
●Damaged CDs
Bubbled/
Wrinkled
With Label/
Sticker
Using
Printer Label
Kit
Sealed With Plastic Ring
●Poor quality
CDs
Chipped/
Cracked
Warped Burrs
●Small CDs
3-inch (8-cm)
CD
●Bubbled, wrinkled, labeled, and
excessively thick CDs
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 238 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
239
uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuCompatible iPod, iPhone, and USB Flash Drives
Features
Compatible iPod, iPhone, and USB Flash Drives
•A USB flash drive of 256 MB or higher is recommended.
•Some digital audio players may not be compatible.
•Some USB flash drives (e.g., a device with security lockout) may not work.
•Some software files may not allow for audio play or text data display.
•Some versions of MP3, WMA, or AAC formats may be unsupported.
■iPod and iPhone Model Compatibility
Model
iPod (5th generation)
iPod classic 80GB/160GB (launch in 2007)
iPod classic 120GB (launch in 2008)
iPod classic 160GB (launch in 2009)
iPod nano (1st to 7th generation) released between 2005 and 2012
iPod touch (1st to 5th generation) released between 2007 and 2012
iPhone 3G/iPhone 3GS/iPhone 4/iPhone 4S/iPhone 5
■USB Flash Drives
1iPod and iPhone Model Compatibility
This system may not work with all software versions
of these devices.
1USB Flash Drives
Files on the USB flash drive are played in their stored
order. This order may be different from the order
displayed on your PC or device.
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 239 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
240
uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement
Features
Honda App License Agreement
PLEASE CAREFULLY READ THIS END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT (THIS “AGREEMENT”) WHICH GOVERNS YOUR USE OF THE SOFTWARE
INSTALLED ON YOUR HONDA OR ACURA VEHICLE (YOUR “VEHICLE”) AS WELL AS THE APPLICATIONS, SERVICES, FUNCTIONS, AND
CONTENT PROVIDED THROUGH THE SOFTWARE (COLLECTIVELY, THE “SERVICES”). YOUR USE OF THE SOFTWARE OR SERVICES WILL
SERVE AS YOUR CONSENT TO THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT. THE SOFTWARE IS OWNED (OR LICENSED), PROVIDED, AND/OR
OPERATED BY AMERICAN HONDA MOTOR CO. INC., (“HONDA,” “US,” “WE,” OR “OUR”), WITH ITS BUSINESS ADDRESS AT 1919
TORRANCE BLVD., TORRANCE, CA 90501. REFERENCE TO “HONDA” IN THIS AGREEMENT INCLUDES HONDA’S PARENT COMPANY AND
ITS AFFILIATES AND DESIGNATED AGENTS. THE SERVICES ARE OWNED (OR LICENSED), PROVIDED, AND/OR OPERATED BY HONDA OR A
THIRD-PARTY SERVICE PROVIDER (A “PROVIDER”). REFERENCE TO A “PROVIDER” IN THIS AGREEMENT INCLUDES SUCH PROVIDER’S
PARENT COMPANY, AFFILIATES, AND DESIGNATED AGENTS.
A. Description of the Software. The SOFTWARE includes the software, firmware and the like, installed and executing on your VEHICLE
during manufacture, and thereafter updated from time to time by HONDA, you or an authorized HONDA dealer (a “DEALER”). The
SOFTWARE allows you to access and use a variety of SERVICES, including but not limited to: (a) HONDA applications, services, and content
provided through the SOFTWARE (together, “HONDA SERVICES”); and (b) PROVIDER applications, services, and content provided through
the SOFTWARE (together, “PROVIDER SERVICES”), each of which may provide access to various information, media, content, and services.
B. SOFTWARE Licensing and Intellectual Property.
1. SOFTWARE. This AGREEMENT grants you a non-exclusive, limited, and revocable license to use the SOFTWARE and SERVICES solely (a)
as installed on your VEHICLE by HONDA, (b) as updated on your Vehicle by HONDA, you (but only as and when directed by HONDA), or a
DEALER and (c) as permitted under the terms of this AGREEMENT.
2. HONDA Services. The SOFTWARE may provide you with access to various HONDA SERVICES. Installation, activation, or use of HONDA
SERVICES may require your consent to additional terms, conditions, and privacy policies applicable to those HONDA SERVICES (the
“HONDA TERMS”). You acknowledge and agree that any collection, use, sharing of data generated by your VEHICLE or your use of your
VEHICLE, and your use of the HONDA SERVICES shall be subject to this AGREEMENT and any additional HONDA TERMS that may be
specifically applicable to such HONDA SERVICES or data generation. The HONDA SERVICES may collect, use, and share such data while
you are using the SOFTWARE.
■END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 240 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
241
uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement
Continued
Features
3. Open-Source Software. The SOFTWARE and SERVICES may incorporate software licensed to HONDA under free or open-source
licenses which govern HONDA’s distribution and your use of such software. HONDA and the third-party authors, licensors, and distributors
of such software disclaim all warranties and all liability arising from any and all use or distribution of the software. To the extent such
software is provided under terms that differ from the applicable free or open-source licenses, those terms are offered by HONDA alone.
Additional information regarding free and open-source software incorporated in the SOFTWARE and SERVICES is available in this manual
or within the SOFTWARE.
4. Provider Services. The SOFTWARE may provide you with access to various PROVIDER SERVICES. Installation or use of such PROVIDER
SERVICES may require your consent to additional terms, conditions, and privacy policies of the applicable PROVIDER (the “PROVIDER
TERMS”). This AGREEMENT restricts the manner in which you can install and use PROVIDER SERVICES but does not grant you a license or
permission to use such PROVIDER SERVICES. Your permission to use PROVIDER SERVICES is limited and subject to any license grants,
conditions, and limitations included in the PROVIDER TERMS. You acknowledge that any collection, use, sharing of your information,
targeted advertising practices by PROVIDERS, and your use of the PROVIDER SERVICES shall be subject to both this AGREEMENT and any
applicable PROVIDER TERMS. The PROVIDER SERVICES may collect, use, and share such information while you are using the SOFTWARE.
5. License Limitations and Restrictions on Use.
(a) Limited License. You understand and agree that the SOFTWARE and SERVICES are licensed, not sold, to you solely for use in accordance
with this AGREEMENT and any applicable PROVIDER TERMS, and any documentation for the VEHICLE made available to you by HONDA
(any “DOCUMENTATION”). HONDA and its licensors reserve all rights in the SOFTWARE and HONDA SERVICES not expressly granted to
you under this AGREEMENT. PROVIDERS and their licensors reserve all rights in the PROVIDER SERVICES not expressly granted to you under
the applicable PROVIDER TERMS.
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 241 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
242
uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement
Features
(b) Restrictions on Use. The licenses granted under this AGREEMENT do not permit you to use the SOFTWARE or SERVICES on a device
other than your VEHICLE. As a condition of using the SOFTWARE and SERVICES, you agree that you may not and will not:
6. Intellectual Property Rights. All title and intellectual property rights in and to the SOFTWARE and SERVICES, the accompanying
DOCUMENTATION, and all copies of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES are owned by HONDA, PROVIDERS, or their suppliers or licensors. This
AGREEMENT does not grant you any rights in connection with any trademarks or service marks of HONDA, PROVIDERS, or their licensors,
affiliates, or suppliers.
(1) copy, download, distribute, modify, publish, sell, rent, lease, lend, license, sublicense, reuse, or create derivative works of the
SOFTWARE or SERVICES or any of the content or other material within the SOFTWARE or SERVICES, including without limitation,
HONDA or PROVIDER names, logos, or any other trademarks of HONDA or PROVIDERS or used in association with the SOFTWARE or
any SERVICES, except as required to use the SOFTWARE or SERVICES in accordance with this AGREEMENT, any applicable PROVIDER
TERMS, and the DOCUMENTATION;
(2) access or use the SOFTWARE or SERVICES in any manner intended to damage or impair the operation of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES
or interfere with anyone else’s use and enjoyment of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES;
(3) access or attempt to access any system or server on which the SOFTWARE or SERVICES is hosted or modify or alter the SOFTWARE
or SERVICES in any way;
(4) use the SOFTWARE or SERVICES for any unlawful purpose, or in violation of any third party rights;
(5) use the SOFTWARE or SERVICES in violation of any applicable traffic regulations, rules or laws, including but not limited to any driver
distraction laws, rules or regulations;
(6) violate the terms of this AGREEMENT, any HONDA TERMS, any PROVIDER TERMS or other applicable third-party terms, conditions,
and privacy policies; or
(7) reverse engineer, decompile, disassemble, attempt to derive the source code of, nor permit others to reverse engineer, decompile,
or disassemble, or attempt to derive the source code of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES, except and only to the extent that such activity is
expressly permitted (a) by applicable law notwithstanding this limitation or (b) the terms of applicable free or opensource software
licenses.
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 242 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
243
uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement
Continued
Features
7. Export Restrictions: You acknowledge that the SOFTWARE and SERVICES are subject to U.S., European Union, and other export
jurisdictions. You agree to comply with all applicable international and national laws that apply to the SOFTWARE and SERVICES, including
the U.S. Export Administration Regulations, as well as end-user, end-use, and destination restrictions issued by the U.S. and other
governments.
C. SOFTWARE Operation
1. HONDA reserves the right to suspend or terminate your access to and use of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES if you are found to be in
violation of this AGREEMENT or as reasonably deemed necessary by HONDA.
2. Eligibility/Registration/Activation. The SOFTWARE is intended for and available to individuals who (a) are of legal age of majority in their
jurisdiction of residence (and at least 18 years of age), or are younger than 18 years of age and possess a valid driver’s license issued by
their jurisdiction of residence, and (b) own or have permissive access to a compatible VEHICLE. We do not knowingly collect any
information, including personal information, from children under 13. If we learn or are notified that we have collected personal
information of a child under 13, we will immediately take steps to delete such information.
3. Use of PROVIDER SERVICES through the SOFTWARE. Certain PROVIDER SERVICES made available through the SOFTWARE may require
that you register or otherwise have an account with the PROVIDER and agree to PROVIDER TERMS. Any use of any of such PROVIDER
SERVICES within the SOFTWARE is subject to this AGREEMENT and the applicable PROVIDER TERMS. HONDA does not exercise control
over such PROVIDER SERVICES and is not responsible or liable for the availability, security, or content of such PROVIDER SERVICES, and the
inclusion of any PROVIDER SERVICES does not imply a referral from, the approval of, or the endorsement by HONDA of such PROVIDER
SERVICES. HONDA is not responsible or liable, directly or indirectly, for any damage relating to or resulting from your use of the PROVIDER
SERVICES.
4. Links to Third Party Sites: The SOFTWARE may provide you with the ability to access third-party sites and content through the use of the
SOFTWARE or SERVICES. The third-party sites and content are not under the control of HONDA. HONDA is not responsible or liable,
directly or indirectly, for such third-party websites and their content or for any damage relating to or resulting from your access or use of
such websites and content.
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 243 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
244
uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement
Features
5. Unauthorized Use and Abuse. You are responsible for ensuring your (and any authorized third parties’) use of the SOFTWARE and
SERVICES remains in compliance with this AGREEMENT and all other applicable HONDA TERMS and PROVIDER TERMS. You acknowledge
and agree that any use of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES occurring through your VEHICLE will be deemed your actions and that HONDA and
PROVIDERS may rely upon such actions. You agree to immediately notify us if you suspect fraudulent or abusive activity involving the
SOFTWARE or SERVICES. If you so notify us or if we otherwise suspect fraudulent or abusive activity, you agree to cooperate with us in any
fraud investigation and to use any fraud prevention measures we prescribe. Your failure to immediately notify us or cooperate to use such
measures will result in your liability for all fraudulent usage or abusive activity associated with your VEHICLE.
6. SOFTWARE Updates. The SOFTWARE and SERVICES may be updated when your VEHICLE is serviced by a DEALER or remotely, over-the-
air, by HONDA from time to time; such updates may occur with or without further notice or your future consent. The SOFTWARE may be
updated at HONDA’s discretion and for any purpose including, without limitation, to patch or otherwise improve the SOFTWARE or
SERVICES functionality, security, or stability. All updates to the SOFTWARE and SERVICES are subject to this AGREEMENT and any other
applicable HONDA TERMS and PROVIDER TERMS.
7. Uninstalling, Removing, and Replacing the SOFTWARE. Replacing SOFTWARE or HONDA SERVICES with software or firmware not
provided and installed by HONDA or a DEALER will render all representations and warranties for the SOFTWARE, HONDA SERVICES, and
VEHICLE functionality reliant upon the SOFTWARE or HONDA SERVICES null and void.
D. SOFTWARE Operational Notices and Warnings
1. Vehicle Geolocation Information. You acknowledge that your VEHICLE may be equipped with certain traffic and map features. The
traffic feature will automatically collect and transmit, through GPS technology, your Vehicle’s current location (longitude and latitude),
travel direction and speed (“VEHICLE GEOLOCATION INFORMATION”) to HONDA and PROVIDERS. The VEHICLE GEOLOCATION
INFORMATION is used by HONDA and PROVIDERS to provide traffic and navigation-related information to you, but may also be used to
provide other SERVICES or offers to you. HONDA will not use such VEHICLE GEOLOCATION INFORMATION for its own marketing efforts,
or provide such information to unaffiliated third parties for their own purposes, without your express consent.
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 244 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
245
uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement
Continued
Features
2. Potential Map Inaccuracy and Route Safety. Maps used by this system may be inaccurate because of changes in roads, traffic controls,
routing, or driving conditions. Always use good judgment and common sense when following suggested routes. Do not follow the route
suggestions if doing so would result in an unsafe or illegal driving maneuver, if you would be placed in an unsafe situation, or if you would
be directed into an area that you consider unsafe. Do not rely on any navigation features included in the system to route you to emergency
services. Not all emergency services such as police, fire stations, hospitals, or clinics are likely to be contained in the map database for such
navigation features. Ask local authorities or an emergency services operator for such locations and routes. The driver is ultimately
responsible for the safe operation of the vehicle and therefore, must evaluate whether it is safe to follow the suggested directions. Any
navigation features are provided only as an aid. Make your driving decisions based on your observations of local conditions and existing
traffic regulations. Navigation features are not a substitute for your personal judgment. Any route suggestions made by the SOFTWARE or
SERVICES should never replace any local traffic regulations or your personal judgment or knowledge of safe driving practices.
3. Speech Recognition: You acknowledge and understand that HONDA and PROVIDERS may record, retain, and use voices commands
when you use the speech recognition components of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. You and all VEHICLE operators and passengers (a)
consent to the recording and retention of voice commands in support of providing speech recognition components and (b) release HONDA
and PROVIDERS from all claims, liabilities, and losses that may result from any use of such recorded voice commands. Recognition errors
are inherent in speech recognition. It is your responsibility to monitor any speech recognition functions included in the system and address
any errors. Neither HONDA nor PROVIDERS will be liable for any damages arising out of errors in the speech recognition process.
4. Distraction Hazards. Navigation features may require manual (non-verbal) input or setup. Attempting to perform such set-up or insert
data while driving can seriously distract your attention and could cause a crash or other serious consequences; the ability to undertake such
interactions may also be limited by state or local law, which laws you are responsible to know and follow. Even occasional short scans of
the screen may be hazardous if your attention has been diverted away from your driving at a critical time. Pull over and stop the vehicle in
a safe and legal manner before attempting to access a function of the system requiring prolonged attention. Do not raise the volume
excessively. Keep the volume at a level where you can still hear outside traffic and emergency signals while driving. Driving while unable
to hear these sounds could result in a crash.
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 245 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
246
uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement
Features
E. Information Collection and Storage
1. Information Collection, Use, Transmission and Storage of Data. Consent to Use of Data: You agree that HONDA and PROVIDERS may
collect and use your information gathered in any manner as part of product support services related to the SOFTWARE or related services.
HONDA may share such information with third parties, including, without limitation, PROVIDERS, third party software and services
suppliers, their affiliates and/or their designated agents, solely to improve their products or to provide services or technologies to you.
HONDA, third party software and systems suppliers, their affiliates and/or their designated agent may disclose this information to others,
but not in a form that personally identifies you.
2. Information Storage. Depending on the type of multimedia system you have in your VEHICLE, certain information may be stored for ease
of use of the SOFTWARE including, without limitation, search history, location history in certain applications, previous and saved
destinations, map locations within certain applications, and device numbers and contact information.
(a) Vehicle Health Information. Your VEHICLE may remotely transmit information regarding the status and health of your VEHICLE
(“VEHICLE INFORMATION”) to HONDA without notification to you. VEHICLE INFORMATION may contain VEHICLE maintenance and
malfunction status that is derived from VEHICLE diagnostic data and includes, but is not limited to, status of powered doors and windows,
battery life data, battery charging data, VEHICLE speed, coolant temperature, air compressor revolution, output power, warning codes,
diagnostic trouble codes, fuel injection volume, and engine rotations per minute. VEHICLE HEALTH INFORMATION may be used by HONDA
for research and development, to deliver HONDA SERVICES and information to you, and to contact you, and is retained only for a period
of time necessary to fulfill these goals.
(b) VEHICLE Geolocation Data (non-navigation/map based). If you opt-in to geolocation-based SERVICES, your vehicle’s geolocation data
(latitude and longitude) will be automatically sent from your VEHICLE to HONDA and PROVIDERS.
(c) You understand that the inputting or uploading of information to your VEHICLE’s multimedia system or the SOFTWARE or SERVICES is
at your own risk and that HONDA is not responsible for unauthorized access to or use of any personal or other information. All information
uploaded to the SOFTWARE and SERVICES may be stored on your VEHICLES’s multimedia system and you understand that the security and
safety of your VEHICLE’s multimedia system is your sole responsibility.
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 246 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
247
uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement
Continued
Features
F. NO WARRANTY. You understand and agree that your use of the SOFTWARE and SERVICES are solely at your own risk and that you
will be solely responsible for any damage to your VEHICLE’s multimedia system or any other equipment or any loss of data that may result
from your use of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. THE SOFTWARE AND SERVICES ARE PROVIDED ON AN “AS IS” AND “AS AVAILABLE” BASIS
WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESSED, IMPLIED OR STATUTORY. WE SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIM ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES
OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT. HONDA makes no warranties that the
SOFTWARE or SERVICES will meet your requirements, or that the SOFTWARE or SERVICES will be uninterrupted, timely, secure, non-
infringing or error free. You understand and agree that you are responsible for any and all charges, costs or expenses associated with your
use of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. Advice or information, whether oral or written, obtained by you from us or through the SOFTWARE
or SERVICES are provided for informational purposes only and will not create any warranty not expressly made herein. You should not rely
on any such information or advice. We assume no liability or responsibility for any errors or omissions in the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. We
do not make any warranty or representation that your use of the material displayed on, or obtained through, the SOFTWARE or SERVICES
is non-infringing of any rights of any third party. Any decision or action taken by you on the basis of information or content provided via
the application is at your sole discretion and risk. HONDA and PROVIDERS are not responsible or liable for any such decision, or for the
accuracy, completeness, usefulness, or availability of any content or information displayed, transmitted, or otherwise made available via
the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. To the extent jurisdictions do not allow the exclusion of certain warranties, some of the above exclusions may
not apply to you.
G. LIMITATIONS ON LIABILITY. You and HONDA are each waiving important rights.
1. Limitations on YOUR liability. HONDA cannot recover from you any consequential, indirect, incidental, or special damages, or attorney’s
fees in connection with your use of the SOFTWARE or HONDA SERVICES. HONDA WAIVES TO THE FULLEST EXTENT ALLOWED BY LAW
ANY CLAIM FOR DAMAGES OTHER THAN DIRECT, COMPENSATORY DAMAGES AS LIMITED IN THIS AGREEMENT.
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 247 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
248
uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement
Features
2. Limitation on HONDA and PROVIDER liability. Neither HONDA nor PROVIDERS will be liable to you or any other party for consequential,
indirect, incidental, special, or punitive damages (including without limitation lost profits) in connection with your use of the SOFTWARE
or SERVICES, even if HONDA or PROVIDERS are aware of the possibility of such damages. These limitations apply to all claims, including,
without limitation, claims in contract and tort (such as negligence, product liability and strict liability). To the extent that a jurisdiction does
not permit the exclusion or limitation of liability as set forth herein our liability is limited to the maximum extent permitted by law in such
states. If HONDA or PROVIDERS are found liable to you for any reason, you agree that the aggregate liability of all these parties to you for
any claim is limited to ten U.S. dollars (US $10.00). Neither HONDA nor any PROVIDER would have agreed to provide the SOFTWARE or
SERVICES to you if you did not agree to this limitation. This amount is the sole and exclusive liability of HONDA and PROVIDERS to you,
and is payable as liquidated damages and not as a penalty. Except where prohibited by law, you may not bring any claim against HONDA
or any third-party beneficiary more than two (2) years after the claim arises. We do not have any liability for SOFTWARE or SERVICES
interruptions of any length.
(a) Release of HONDA and PROVIDERS For yourself and anyone else claiming under you, you agree to release and discharge HONDA,
PROVIDERS, their respective officers, directors, and employees, and each third-party beneficiary from all claims, liabilities and losses in
connection with the SOFTWARE or SERVICES, including, but not limited to claims for personal injury or property damage arising from the
total or partial failure of performance of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES, even if caused by or based upon the negligence, gross negligence,
strict products liability, Deceptive Trade Practices Act violations, bad faith, or breach of warranty of us or the malfunction of the SOFTWARE
or SOFTWARE SERVICES. YOU AGREE TO WAIVE TO THE FULLEST EXTENT ALLOWED BY LAW, ANY CLAIM FOR DAMAGES OTHER THAN
DIRECT, COMPENSATORY DAMAGES AS LIMITED IN THIS AGREEMENT. YOU HEREBY RELEASE AND DISCHARGE HONDA AND ITS
LICENSORS AND CONTRACTORS (INCLUDING ANY THIRD PARTIES PROVIDING ALL OR PART OF THE SOFTWARE OR SERVICES) FROM AND
AGAINST ANY CLAIMS, DAMAGES, EXPENSES AND LIABILITY ARISING FROM OR RELATED TO ANY INJURIES, DAMAGES, OR LOSSES TO
ANY PERSON (INCLUDING DEATH) OR PROPERTY OF ANY KIND RESULTING IN WHOLE OR PART, DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY, FROM YOUR
USE OF THE SOFTWARE OR SERVICES.
H. Survival. You agree that the limitations of liability and indemnities in this AGREEMENT will survive even after the AGREEMENT has
ended. These limitations of liability apply not only to you, but to anyone using the SOFTWARE or SERVICES via your VEHICLE, to anyone
making a claim on your behalf, and to any claims made by your family, employees, customers, or others arising out of or relating to your
VEHICLE, the SOFTWARE, or SERVICES.
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 248 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
249
uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement
Continued
Features
I. Availability/Interruption. The SOFTWARE and certain SERVICES are made available through your VEHICLE’s compatible multimedia
system when the VEHICLE is turned on. Certain SERVICES may be available only through your compatible mobile device when it is within
the operating range of the VEHICLE and a wireless carrier. The availability of the SOFTWARE and SERVICES may be subject to transmission
limitation or interruption, including but not limited to technical obsolesce or sunsetting of the hardware, software or firmware, inside of
or external to the Vehicle, required for data transmission or receipt. HONDA does not guarantee that the SOFTWARE, SERVICES, or any
portion thereof will be available at all times or in all areas. You acknowledge and agree that HONDA is not responsible for performance
degradation, interruption or delays. You acknowledge that HONDA shall not be liable to you if the SOFTWARE or SERVICES in a given
location are not available. If the SOFTWARE or SERVICES are not available within your intended location, you agree that your sole remedy
shall be to cease using the SOFTWARE and SERVICES.
J. PRODUCT SUPPORT: Product support for the SOFTWARE is provided by HONDA. For product support, please refer to HONDA
instructions provided in the DOCUMENTATION. Should you have any questions concerning this AGREEMENT, or if you desire to contact
HONDA for any other reason, please refer to the HONDA contact information provided in the DOCUMENTATION.
K. Termination and Transfer.
1. Termination. This AGREEMENT is effective until terminated by you or US. WE may terminate this AGREEMENT for any or no reason,
and with or without notice to you. Your rights under this AGREEMENT will terminate automatically without notice from US if you fail to
comply with any term of this AGREEMENT. Upon termination of this AGREEMENT, you shall cease all use of the SOFTWARE and SERVICES.
2. Transfer: You may permanently transfer your rights under this AGREEMENT only as part of a sale or transfer of the VEHICLE, provided
you retain no copies, you transfer all of the SOFTWARE and HONDA SERVICES (including all component parts, the media and printed
materials, and any upgrades), and the recipient agrees to the terms of this AGREEMENT. You agree to notify HONDA upon the sale or
transfer of the VEHICLE. To contact HONDA, please refer to the HONDA contact information provided in the DOCUMENTATION.
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 249 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
250
uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement
Features
L. Changes to the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. WE may change, modify, or update the SOFTWARE or SERVICES from time to time. Unless
explicitly stated otherwise, any new features or services that augment or enhance the SOFTWARE or SERVICES in the future shall
respectively be considered part of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES and subject to this AGREEMENT. WE reserve the right at any time and from
time to time to interrupt, restrict, modify, suspend, discontinue, temporarily or permanently, the SOFTWARE or SERVICES (or any portion
thereof), with or without notice to you, and you agree that HONDA shall not be liable to you or to any third party for any modification,
suspension or discontinuance of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES.
M. ARBITRATION:
PLEASE READ THIS ARBITRATION PROVISION CAREFULLY TO UNDERSTAND YOUR RIGHTS. YOU AGREE THAT ANY CLAIM THAT YOU
MAY HAVE IN THE FUTURE MUST BE RESOLVED THROUGH BINDING ARBITRATION. YOU WAIVE THE RIGHT TO HAVE YOUR DISPUTE
HEARD IN COURT AND WAIVE THE RIGHT TO BRING CLASS CLAIMS. YOU UNDERSTAND THAT DISCOVERY AND APPEAL RIGHTS ARE
MORE LIMITED IN ARBITRATION.
Arbitration is a method of resolving a claim, dispute or controversy without filing a lawsuit. By agreeing to arbitrate, the right to go to
court is waived and instead claims, disputes or controversies are submitted to binding arbitration. This provision sets forth the terms and
conditions of our agreement. YOU and HONDA agree and acknowledge that this Agreement affects interstate commerce and the
Federal Arbitration Act (“FAA”) applies. By using the Software, Vehicle, or Services, YOU elect to have disputes resolved by arbitration.
YOU, HONDA or any involved third party may pursue a Claim. “Claim” means any dispute between YOU, HONDA, or any involved third
party relating to your use of the Software, the Vehicle, or the Services, this Agreement, or our relationship, including any
representations, omissions or warranties. “Claim” does not include personal injury or wrongful death claims. YOU or HONDA may seek
remedies in small claims court or provisional judicial remedies without arbitrating. In addition, notwithstanding anything herein to the
contrary, YOU or HONDA may seek equitable relief in a court of competent jurisdiction.
YOU or HONDA may select arbitration with American Arbitration Association, JAMS or National Arbitration and Mediation. Contact
these sponsors for their rules. The hearing will be in the federal district where YOU reside. If agreed, it may be by telephone or written
submissions. Filing and arbitrator fees to be paid per the sponsor rules. You may contact the sponsor for a fee waiver. If no fee waivers,
HONDA will pay filing and arbitrator fees up to $5,000, unless law requires more. Each party is responsible for other fees. Arbitrator
may award costs or fees to prevailing party, if permitted by law. HONDA will not seek fees, unless the claims are frivolous.
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 250 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
251
uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement
Features
N. Miscellaneous: You may not assign this AGREEMENT without HONDA’s prior written consent. This AGREEMENT and any additional
HONDA TERMS and PROVIDER TERMS represents the entire agreement between you and US. HONDA may amend the terms of this
AGREEMENT by providing you with notices of such updated terms. If you do not consent to be bound by the updated terms, your sole
remedy will be to cease using the SOFTWARE and SERVICES. If any part of this AGREEMENT is found invalid, void, or unenforceable, the
balance of the AGREEMENT will remain valid and enforceable according to its terms. To the fullest extent permitted by law, and except as
explicitly provided otherwise, this AGREEMENT and any disputes arising out of or relating to it will be governed by the laws of the State of
California, except that California laws concerning choice of law or conflicts shall not apply if they would cause the substantive law of
another jurisdiction to apply. Notwithstanding the foregoing, Section M shall be governed by the Federal Arbitration Act and the laws of
the State of California, as applicable, as set forth therein. The failure to enforce any term of this AGREEMENT on one occasion shall not
prevent enforcement on any other occasion or the enforcement of any other term. Headings and captions shall not be considered included
for purposes of interpretation or application hereof, but are for convenience only.
Arbitrator shall be an attorney or current or retired judge familiar with automotive or consumer software. The arbitrator shall follow
substantive law, statute of limitations and decide all issues relating to the interpretation, construction, enforceability and applicability of
this provision. The arbitrator may order relief permitted by law. This provision is governed and enforceable by the FAA. An award shall
include a written opinion and be final, subject to appeal by the FAA.
This provision survives termination of this Agreement or relationship, bankruptcy, assignment or transfer. If part of this provision is
unenforceable, the remainder remains in effect. If unenforceability allows arbitration as a class action, then this provision is entirely
unenforceable. YOU may opt out within 30 days of your initial use of the Software by sending a signed, written notice to HONDA at
Honda Financial Services, P.O. Box 165007, Irving, TX 75016. HONDA reserves the right to make changes to this provision after
providing written notice and an opportunity to opt out.
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 251 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
252
Features
Customized Features
Use the audio/information screen to customize certain features.
■How to customize
While the vehicle is at a complete stop with the ignition switch in ON (w, press the
MENU/CLOCK button, then select Settings. To customize the phone settings,
press the button, then select Phone Setup.
1Customized Features
When you customize settings:
•Make sure that the vehicle is at a complete stop.
•Shift to (P.
•Set the parking brake.
Continuously variable transmission models
Manual transmission models
1How to customize
These indications are used to show how to operate
the selector knob.
Rotate to select.
Press to enter.
To customize other features, select Settings, rotate
, then press .
2List of customizable options P. 256
Models with color audio system
Audio/Information Screen
MENU/CLOCK Button
Selector Knob
(Phone) Button
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 252 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
253
uuCustomized Featuresu
Continued
Features
■Customization Flow
Models with color audio system
Press the MENU/CLOCK button.
Adjust Clock
Settings Bluetooth Add New Device
Connect an Audio Device
Display Adjustment Brightness
Contrast
Black Level
Rear Camera Camera Guideline
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 253 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
254
uuCustomized Featuresu
Features
Display Change Audio
Wallpaper
Wallpaper Select
Import
Delete
Color Theme Blue
Red
Amber
Gray
Language
Clock Format 12h
24h
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 254 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
255
uuCustomized Featuresu
Continued
Features
Press the button and rotate to select Phone Setup, then press .
Ringtone Fixed
Mobile Phone
Bluetooth Setup Add New Device
Connect a Phone
Connect an Audio Device
Disconnect All Devices
Delete Device
Pass-Key
Speed Dial
Caller ID Info Name Priority
Number Priority
System Clear
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 255 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
256
uuCustomized Featuresu
Features
■List of customizable options
*1:Default Setting
Setup
Group Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Adjust Clock Adjusts the clock.
2Clock P. 96 —
Settings
Bluetooth
Add New Device
Pairs a new phone to HFL, edits and deletes a
paired phone, and create a code for a paired
phone.
2Phone Setup P. 280
—
Connect an Audio
Device
Connects, disconnects or pairs a Bluetooth®
Audio device to HFL. —
Display
Adjustment
Brightness Changes the brightness of the audio/
information screen. —
Contrast Changes the contrast of the audio/
information screen. —
Black Level Changes the black level of the audio/
information screen. —
Rear
Camera Camera Guideline Selects whether the guidelines come on the
audio/information screen. On*1/Off
Models with color audio system
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 256 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
257
uuCustomized Featuresu
Continued
Features
*1:Default Setting
Setup
Group Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Settings
Display Change Changes the display type. Audio*1/Wallpaper
Wallpaper
Select Changes the wallpaper type. Clock*1/Image1/Image2/
Image3
Import Imports an image file for a new wallpaper.
2Wallpaper Setup P. 187 —
Delete Deletes an image file for a wallpaper. Image1*1/Image2/Image3
Color Theme Changes the background color of the audio/
information screen. Blue*1/Red/Amber/Gray
Language Changes the display language. English*1/Français/Español
Clock Format Selects the digital clock display from 12H to
24H. 12h*1/24h
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 257 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
258
uuCustomized Featuresu
Features
*1:Default Setting
Setup
Group Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Phone
Setup
Bluetooth
Setup
Add New Device Pairs a new phone to HFL.
2Phone Setup P. 280 —
Connect a Phone
Pairs a new phone or connects a paired phone
to HFL.
2Phone Setup P. 280
—
Connect an Audio
Device Connects a Bluetooth® Audio device to HFL. —
Disconnect All Devices Disconnects a paired phone from HFL. —
Delete Device Deletes a paired phone. —
Pass-Key Inputs and changes a code for a paired phone. —
Speed Dial Edits, adds or deletes a speed dial entry.
2Speed Dial P. 287 —
Ringtone Selects the ring tone. Fixed*1/Mobile Phone
Caller ID Info Prioritizes the caller’s name or phone number
as the caller ID.
Name Priority*1/Number
Priority
System Clear Cancels/Resets all customized items in the
Phone Setup group as default. —
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 258 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
Continued 259
uuCustomized Featuresu
Features
■How to customize
While the vehicle is at a complete stop with the ignition switch in ON (w*1, select
Settings, then select a setting item.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.
Models with display audio system
1Customized Features
When you customize settings:
•Make sure that the vehicle is at a complete stop.
•
Shift to (P.
•
Set the parking brake.
Continuously variable transmission models
Manual transmission models
1How to customize
To customize other features, select Settings.
2List of customizable options P. 265
VOL
HOME
MENU
BACK
Audio/Information Screen
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 259 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
260
uuCustomized Featuresu
Features
■Customization Flow
Models with display audio system
Select HOME.
Select Settings.
Home Home Screen Edit Order
Background Color
Display Display Settings Brightness
Contrast
Black Level
Beep Volume
Sound/Beep Volume
Volume
Voice Recog Voice Prompt
Automatic Phone Sync
Phonebook Phonetic Modification
Default
Factory Data Reset
Clock Format
Clock Clock/Wallpaper Type Clock
Wallpaper
Clock Adjustment
Clock Display
Clock Location
Clock Reset
Keyboard Layout
Others Language
Remember Last Screen
Voice Command Tips*
System
* Not available on all models
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 260 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
261
uuCustomized Featuresu
Continued
Features
*1: May change depending on your currently selected source.
Sound
Color
Tint
Audio
Audio Source Pop-Up
[Your selected media] Cover Art*1
Color
Display Adjustment*1 Display Brightness
Contrast
Black Level
Aspect Ratio Adjustment*1
Change Bluetooth Audio Device*1
Bluetooth Device List*1
Default
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 261 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
262
uuCustomized Featuresu
Features
Clock Format
Clock Clock/Wallpaper Type Clock
Wallpaper
Clock Adjustment
Clock Display
Clock Location
Clock Reset
Info
Default
Other Info Screen Preference
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 262 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
263
uuCustomized Featuresu
Continued
Features
Edit Speed Dial
Phone Connect Phone
Bluetooth Device List
Ring Tone
Automatic Phone Sync
HondaLink Assist
Phone
Default
Text/Email Enable Text/Email
Select Account
New Message Notification
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 263 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
264
uuCustomized Featuresu
Features
Reference Line
LaneWatch*Show with Turn Signal
Display Time after Turn Signal Off
Default
Camera
Default
Rear Wide Camera
Fixed Guideline
Dynamic Guideline
Default
Bluetooth On/Off Status
Bluetooth Device List
Edit Pairing Code
Bluetooth
* Not available on all models
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 264 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
265
uuCustomized Featuresu
Continued
Features
■List of customizable options
*1:Default Setting
Setup
Group Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
System
Home Home Screen Edit Order Changes the HOME screen icon layout. —
Display
Display
Settings
Brightness Changes the brightness of the audio/
information screen. —
Contrast Changes the contrast of the audio/
information screen. —
Black Level Changes the black level of the audio/
information screen. —
Background Color Changes the background color of the audio/
information screen. Blue*1/Amber/Red/Violet
Sound/
Beep
Volume Changes the sound volume. 0-6*1-11
Beep Volume Changes the beep volume. Off/1/2*1/3
Models with display audio system
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 265 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
266
uuCustomized Featuresu
Features
*1:Default Setting
Setup
Group Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
System
Voice
Recog
Voice Prompt Turns the voice prompt on and off. On*1/Off
Volume Changes the volume of the voice prompt. 0-6*1-11
Phonebook Phonetic
Modification Modifies a voice command for the phonebook. —
Automatic Phone Sync Sets a phonebook data to be automatically
imported when a phone is paired to HFL. On/Off
Clock
Clock/
Wallpaper
Type
Clock Changes the clock display type. Analog/Digital*1/Small
Digital/Off
Wallpaper
●Changes the wallpaper type.
●Imports an image file for a new wallpaper.
●Deletes an image file for a wallpaper.
2Wallpaper Setup P. 209
Blank/Galaxy*1/Metallic
Clock Adjustment Adjusts the clock.
2Clock P. 96 —
Clock Format Selects the digital clock display from 12H to
24H. 12H*1/24H
Clock Display Selects whether the clock display comes on. On*1/Off
Clock Location
Changes the clock display layout.
Upper Right*1/Upper Left/
Lower Right/Lower Left/
Off
Clock Reset Cancels/Resets all customized items for clock
display as default. Yes/No
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 266 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
267
uuCustomized Featuresu
Continued
Features
*1:Default Setting
Setup
Group Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
System
Others
Language Changes the display language. English*1/French/Spanish
Keyboard Layout Selects the on-screen keyboard type. Alphabet/QWERTY*1
Voice Command Tips*
Alerts you when manual control of the system
is disabled to prevent distraction while driving.
Only voice commands are available.
On*1/Off
Remember Last Screen Selects whether the device remembers the last
screen. On/Off*1
Factory Data Reset Resets all the settings to their factory default.
2Defaulting All the Settings P. 273 Yes/No
Default Cancels/Resets all customized items in the
System group as default. Yes/No
Audio
Sound
Adjusts the settings of the audio speaker’s
sound
2Adjusting the Sound P. 211
-6 ~ 0*1 ~ +6 (BASS and
TREBLE), RR9~0*1~FR9
(FADER), L9~0*1~R9
(BALANCE), Off/Low/Mid*1/
High (SVC)
Audio Source Pop-Up
Selects whether the list of selectable audio
sources comes on when Audio is selected on
the HOME screen.
On/Off*1
* Not available on all models
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 267 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
268
uuCustomized Featuresu
Features
*1:Default Setting
Setup
Group Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Audio
[Your selected media] Cover Art Turns on and off the cover art display. On*1/Off
Display
Adjustment
Display
Brightness
2System P. 265
Contrast
Black Level
Color
Color Changes the color of the audio/information
screen. —
Tint Changes the tint of the audio/information
screen. —
Aspect Ratio Adjustment
Changes the aspect ratio and zoom settings of
the audio/information screen. Normal/Full*1/Zoom
Change Bluetooth Audio Device
Connects, disconnects or pairs a Bluetooth®
Audio device to HFL. —
Bluetooth Device List
Pairs a new phone to HFL, edits or deletes a
paired phone.
2Phone Setup P. 305
—
Default Cancels/Resets all customized items in the
Audio group as default. Yes/No
iPod or USB mode
HDMI® mode
HDMI® mode
Bluetooth® Audio mode
Bluetooth® Audio mode
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 268 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
269
uuCustomized Featuresu
Continued
Features
*1:Default Setting
Setup
Group Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Info
Clock
Clock/
Wallpaper
type
Clock
2System P. 265
Wallpaper
Clock Adjustment
Clock Format
Clock Display
Clock Location
Clock Reset
Other Info Screen Preference Changes the Info Screen type. Info Top/Info Menu/Off*1
Default Cancels/Resets all customized items in the
Info group as default. Yes/No
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 269 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
270
uuCustomized Featuresu
Features
*1:Default Setting
Setup
Group Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Phone
Phone
Connect Phone
Pairs a new phone to HFL, connects or
disconnects a paired phone.
2Phone Setup P. 305
—
Bluetooth Device List
Pairs a new phone to HFL, edits or deletes a
paired phone.
2Phone Setup P. 305
—
Edit Speed Dial Edits, adds or deletes a speed dial entry.
2Speed Dial P. 312 —
Ring Tone Selects the ring tone. Fixed/Mobile Phone*1
Automatic Phone Sync Sets a phonebook data to be automatically
imported when a phone is paired to HFL. On/Off
HondaLink Assist Turns HondaLink Assist on and off. On/Off*1
Text/Email
Enable Text/Email Turns the text/e-mail message function on and
off. On*1/Off
Select Account Selects a mail or text message account. —
New Message
Notification
Selects whether a pop-up alert comes on the
screen when HFL receives a new text/e-mail
message.
On/Off*1
Default Cancels/Resets all customized items in the
Phone and Text/Email group as default. Yes/No
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 270 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
271
uuCustomized Featuresu
Continued
Features
*1:Default Setting
Setup
Group Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Camera
Rear Wide
Camera
Fixed Guideline Selects whether the fixed guidelines come on
on the rear camera monitor. On*1/Off
Dynamic Guideline Selects whether the dynamic guidelines come
on on the rear camera monitor. On*1/Off
Default Cancels/Resets all customized items in the
Rear Wide Camera group as default. Yes/No
LaneWatch*
Show with Turn Signal
Selects whether the LaneWatch display comes
on when you move the turn signal lever to the
passenger side.
On*1/Off
Display Time after Turn
Signal Off
Changes the length of time the LaneWatch
display stays on after you pull the turn signal
lever back.
0 second*1/2 seconds
Reference Line Selects whether the reference lines come on
the LaneWatch monitor. On*1/Off
Default Cancels/Resets all customized items in the
LaneWatch group as default. Yes/No
* Not available on all models
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 271 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
272
uuCustomized Featuresu
Features
*1:Default Setting
Setup
Group Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings
Bluetooth
Bluetooth On/Off Status Changes the Bluetooth® status. On*1/Off
Bluetooth Device List
Pairs a new phone to HFL, edits or deletes a
paired phone, or creates a security PIN.
2Phone Setup P. 305
—
Edit Pairing Code Edits Pairing Code.
2To change the pairing code setting P. 306 Random/Fixed*1
Default Cancels/Resets all customized items in the
Bluetooth group as default. Yes/No
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 272 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
273
uuCustomized FeaturesuDefaulting All the Settings
Features
Defaulting All the Settings
Reset all the menu and customized settings as the factory defaults.
1. Select HOME.
2. Select Settings.
3. Select System.
uRepeat the procedure to select the
Others tab, then Factory Data Reset.
uThe confirmation message will appear.
4. Select Yes to reset the settings.
5. Select Yes again to reset the settings.
uThe confirmation message will appear.
Select OK.
1Defaulting All the Settings
When you transfer the vehicle to a third party, reset
all settings to default and delete all personal data.
The following settings will be reset:
•Audio preset settings
•Phonebook entries
•Other display and personal settings.
Models with display audio system
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 273 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
274
Features
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) allows you to place and receive phone calls using
your vehicle’s audio system, without handling your cell phone.
Using HFL
(Pick-up) button: Press to go directly to the Phone screen or to answer an
incoming call.
(Hang-up/Back) button: Press to end a call or to cancel a command.
(Talk) button: Press to call a number with a stored voice tag.
(Phone) button: Press to go directly to the Phone screen.
Selector knob: Rotate to select an item on the screen, then press .
■HFL Buttons
1Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®
To use HFL, you need a Bluetooth-compatible cell
phone. For a list of compatible phones, pairing
procedures, and special feature capabilities:
•U.S.: Visit automobiles.honda.com/handsfreelink/,
or call 1-888-528-7876.
•Canada: Visit www.handsfreelink.ca, or call 1-888-
528-7876.
Voice control tips
•Aim the vents away from the ceiling and close the
windows, as noise coming from them may interfere
with the microphone.
•Press and release the button when you want to
call a number using a stored voice tag. Speak
clearly and naturally after a beep.
•If the microphone picks up voices other than yours,
the command may be misinterpreted.
•To change the volume level, use the audio system’s
volume knob or the remote audio controls on the
steering wheel.
State or local laws may prohibit the operation of
handheld electronic devices while operating a
vehicle.
If you receive a call while using the audio system, the
system resumes its operation after ending the call.
Up to 20 speed dial entries can be stored. If there is
no entry in the system, Speed Dial is disabled.
2Speed Dial P. 287
Up to 20 call histories can be stored. If there is no call
history, Call History is disabled.
Models with color audio system
Microphone
(Talk) Button
(Hang-up/Back) Button
(Pick-up) Button
Selector Knob
(Phone) Button
Volume up
Volume down
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 274 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
275
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uUsing HFL
Features
The audio/information screen notifies you
when there is an incoming call.
Certain manual functions are disabled or inoperable while the vehicle is in motion.
You cannot select a grayed-out option until the vehicle is stopped.
Only previously stored speed dial entries can be called using voice commands while
the vehicle is in motion.
2Speed Dial P. 287
■HFL Status Display
1Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered
trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc., and any
use of such marks by Honda Motor Co., Ltd., is under
license. Other trademarks and trade names are those
of their respective owners.
HFL Limitations
An incoming call on HFL will interrupt the audio
system when it is playing. It will resume when the call
is ended.
HFL Mode
Battery Level Status
Signal Strength
Bluetooth Indicator
Appears when your
phone is connected
to HFL.
Roam Status
Call Name
■Limitations for Manual Operation
1HFL Status Display
The information that appears on the audio/
information screen varies between phone models.
You can change the system language to English,
French, or Spanish.
2Customized Features P. 252
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 275 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
276
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features
HFL Menus
The ignition switch must be in ACCESSORY (q or ON (w to use HFL.
1HFL Menus
To use HFL, you must first pair your Bluetooth-
compatible cell phone to the system while the vehicle
is parked.
Some functions are limited while driving. A message
appears on the screen when the vehicle is moving
and the operation is canceled.
or
Display the last 20 outgoing calls.
Display the last 20 incoming calls.
Display the last 20 missed calls.
*1: Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.
Phone Speed Dial*1 Add New
Select a phone number from the call history to
store as a speed dial number.
Call History
Phonebook Select a phone number from the phonebook to
store as a speed dial number.
Phone Number Enter a phone number to store as a speed dial
number.
Dialed Calls
Received Calls
Missed Calls
Phonebook*1
Dial*1
Call History*1
Display the paired phones’s phonebook.
Enter a phone number to dial.
(Existing entry list)
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 276 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
277
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Continued
Features
*1: Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.
Redial the last number dialed in the phone’s history.
Add New Device
Connect a Phone
Connect an Audio Device
Bluetooth SetupPhone Setup
Redial*1
Pair a phone to the system.
Connect a phone to the system.
Create a code for a paired phone.
Disconnect All Devices
Delete Device
Pass-Key
Disconnect a paired phone from the system.
Delete a previously paired phone.
Connect a Bluetooth® Audio device to the
system.
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 277 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
278
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features
*1: Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.
Call History
Phonebook
Phone Number
Speed Dial*1
Select a phone number from the phonebook
to store as a speed dial number.
Select a phone number from the call history
to store as a speed dial number.
Create a voice tag for a speed dial number.
Change Speed Dial
Delete Speed Dial
Store Voice Tag
Enter a phone number to store as a speed dial
number.
Delete a previously stored speed dial number.
Change Voice Tag
Delete Voice Tag
Change a previously stored speed dial
number.
Change a voice tag for a speed dial number.
Delete a voice tag for a speed dial number.
Add New
Existing entry list
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 278 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
279
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Continued
Features
Fixed
Mobile Phone
System Clear
Ringtone
Select the ring tone stored in the connected
cell phone.
Name Priority
Number Priority
Caller ID Info Prioritize the caller’s name as the caller ID.
Clear the system of all paired phones, phonebook entries,
and security codes.
Prioritize the caller’s phone number as the
caller ID.
Select the ring tone stored in HFL.
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 279 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
280
Features
■To pair a cell phone (No phone has
been paired to the system)
1. Press the button or the button.
2. Rotate to select Yes, then press .
3. Make sure your phone is in search or
discoverable mode, then press .
uHFL automatically searches for a
Bluetooth® device.
4. When your phone appears on the list, select
it by pressing .
uIf your phone doesn’t appear, select
Phone Not Found? and search for
Bluetooth® devices using your phone.
From your phone, select
HandsFreeLink.
5. The system gives you a pairing code on the
audio/information screen.
uConfirm if the pairing code on the screen
and your phone match.
This may vary by phone.
6. A notification appears on the screen if
pairing is successful.
■Phone Setup
1Phone Setup
Your Bluetooth-compatible phone must be paired to
HFL before you can make and receive hands-free
calls.
Phone Pairing Tips:
•You cannot pair your phone while the vehicle is
moving.
•Up to six phones can be paired.
•Your phone’s battery may drain faster when it is
connected to HFL.
•If your phone is not ready for pairing or not found
by the system within three minutes, the system will
time out and returns to idle.
Once you have paired a phone, you can see it
displayed on the screen with one or two icons on the
right side.
These icons indicate the following:
: The phone can be used with HFL.
: The phone is compatible with Bluetooth® Audio.
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 280 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
Continued 281
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features
■To Change the currently paired phone
1. Press the button or the button.
2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then
press .
3. Rotate to select Bluetooth Setup, then
press .
4. Rotate to select Connect a Phone,
then press .
uThe screen changes to a device list.
5. Rotate to select a desired device name,
then press .
uHFL disconnects the connected phone
and starts searching for another paired
phone.
1Phone Setup
You can pair a phone in the following steps.
Phone Setup Bluetooth Setup Add New
Device confirmation message Yes
confirmation message OK Select a Phone
pairing code.
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 281 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
282
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features
■To change the pairing code setting
1. Press the button or the button.
2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then
press .
3. Rotate to select Bluetooth Setup, then
press .
4. Rotate to select Pass-Key, then press
.
5. Input a new pairing code, then press .
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 282 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
283
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Continued
Features
■To delete a paired phone
1. Press the button or the button.
2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then
press .
3. Rotate to select Bluetooth Setup, then
press .
4. Rotate to select Delete Device, then
press .
uThe screen changes to a device list.
5. Rotate to select a phone you want to
delete, then press .
6. A confirmation message appears on the
screen. Rotate to select Yes, then press
.
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 283 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
284
Features
You can change the ring tone setting.
1. Press the button or the button.
2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then
press .
3. Rotate to select Ringtone, then press
.
4. Rotate to select Fixed or Mobile
Phone, then press .
You can select a caller’s information to be displayed when you have an incoming
call.
1. Press the button or the button.
2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then
press .
3. Rotate to select Caller ID Info, then
press .
4. Rotate to select a mode you want, then
press .
■Ring Tone
1Ring Tone
Fixed: The fixed ring tone sounds from the speakers.
Mobile Phone: For certain connected phones, the
ring tone stored in the phone sounds from the
speakers.
■Caller’s ID Information
1Caller’s ID Information
Name Priority: A caller’s name is displayed if it is
stored in the phonebook.
Number Priority: A caller’s phone number is
displayed.
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 284 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
285
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Continued
Features
Pairing codes, paired phones, all stored voice tags, all speed dial entries, all call
history data, and all imported phonebook data are erased.
1. Press the button or the button.
2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then
press .
3. Rotate to select System Clear, then
press .
4. Rotate to select Yes, then press .
5. A confirmation message appears on the
screen. Rotate to select Yes, then press
.
6. A notification appears on the screen. Press
.
■To Clear the System
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 285 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
286
Features
When your phone is paired, the contents of its phonebook and call history are
automatically imported to HFL.
■Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History
1Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History
When you select a person from the list in the cellular
phonebook, you can see up to three category icons.
The icons indicate what types of numbers are stored
for that name.
If a name has four or more numbers, ... appears
instead of category icons.
On some phones, it may not be possible to import the
category icons to HFL.
The phonebook is updated after every connection.
Call history is updated after every connection or call.
Pref
Home
Mobile
Pager
Work
Fax
Car
Voice
Other
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 286 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
Continued 287
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features
Up to 20 speed dial numbers can be stored per phone.
To store a speed dial number:
1. Press the button or the button.
2. Rotate to select Speed Dial, then press
.
3. Rotate to select Add New, then press
.
4. Rotate to select a place to choose a
number from, then press .
From Call History:
uSelect a number from the call history.
From Phonebook:
uSelect a number from the connected cell
phone’s imported phonebook.
From Phone Number:
uInput the number manually.
5. When the speed dial is successfully stored,
you are asked to create a voice tag for the
number. Rotate to select Yes or No,
then press .
6. Using the button, follow the prompts to
say the name for the speed dial entry.
■Speed Dial
1Speed Dial
You can use the audio preset buttons during a call to
store a speed dial number:
1. Press and hold the desired audio preset button
during a call.
2. The contact information for the active call will be
stored for the corresponding speed dial.
When a voice tag is stored, you can press the
button and call the number using voice commands.
Change Speed Dial
Delete Speed Dial
Cha
Cha
Cha
Cha
ha
Cha
nge
ngenge
nge
ge
nge
Sp
Sp
Sp
Sp
Sp
Sp
eed
eed
eed
eed
eed
eed
Di
a
l
Del
Del
Del
Dl
ete
ete
ete
t
Sp
Sp
Sp
S
eed
eed
eed
d
Di
Di
Di
Di
Di
Di
Di
Di
Di
Di
i
Di
Di
i
Di
i
l
al
a
a
a
a
al
a
a
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 287 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
288
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features
■To edit a speed dial
1. Press the button or the button.
2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then
press .
3. Rotate to select Speed Dial, then press
.
4. Select an existing speed dial entry.
5. Rotate to select Change Speed Dial,
then press .
6. Select a new speed dial number, then press
.
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 288 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
Continued 289
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features
■To add a voice tag to a stored speed
dial number
1. Press the button or the button.
2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then
press .
3. Rotate to select Speed Dial, then press
.
4. Select an existing speed dial entry.
5. Rotate to select Store Voice Tag, then
press .
6. Using the button, follow the prompts to
complete the voice tag.
■To change a voice tag
1. Press the button or the button.
2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then
press .
3. Rotate to select Speed Dial, then press
.
4. Select an existing speed dial entry.
5. Rotate to select Change Voice Tag,
then press .
6. Using the button, follow the prompts to
complete the voice tag.
1Speed Dial
Avoid using duplicate voice tags.
Avoid using “home” as a voice tag.
It is easier for HFL to recognize a longer name. For
example, use “John Smith” instead of “John.”
Change Speed Dial
Delete Speed Dial
Store Voice Tag
Change Speed Dial
Delete Speed Dial
Cha
Cha
Cha
Cha
Cha
nge
nge
nge
e
e
Sp
Sp
Sp
Sp
p
eed
eed
eed
ee
ee
Di
Di
Di
Di
Di
al
al
al
al
al
Del
Del
Del
Del
Del
eteeteete
ete
ete
Sp
SpSp
Sp
p
eedeedeed
eed
ee
Di Di
Di
Di
alal
al
al
al
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 289 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
290
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features
■To delete a voice tag
1. Press the button or the button.
2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then
press .
3. Rotate to select Speed Dial, then press
.
4. Select an existing speed dial entry.
5. Rotate to select Delete Voice Tag,
then press .
uA confirmation message appears on the
screen. Rotate to select Yes, then
press .
■To delete a speed dial number
1. Press the button or the button.
2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then
press .
3. Rotate to select Speed Dial, then press
.
4. Select an existing speed dial entry.
5. Rotate to select Delete Speed Dial,
then press .
uA confirmation message appears on the
screen. Rotate to select Yes, then
press .
Change Speed Dial
Delete Speed Dial
Store Voice Tag
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 290 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
Continued 291
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features
You can make calls by inputting any phone number, or by using the imported
phonebook, call history, speed dial entries, or redial.
■Making a Call
1Making a Call
Any voice-tagged speed dial entry can be dialed by
voice from any screen.
Press the button and follow the prompts.
The maximum range between your phone and
vehicles is 30 feet (10 meters).
Once a call is connected, you can hear the voice of
the person you are calling through the audio
speakers.
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 291 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
292
Features
■To make a call using the imported
phonebook
When your phone is paired, the contents of its
phonebook are automatically imported to
HFL.
1. Press the button or the button.
2. Rotate to select Phonebook, then
press .
3. The phonebook is stored alphabetically.
Rotate to select the initial, then press
.
4. Rotate to select a name, then press .
5. Rotate to select a number, then press
.
uDialing starts automatically.
■To make a call using a phone number
1. Press the button or the button.
2. Rotate to select Dial, then press .
3. Rotate to select a number, then press
.
4. Rotate to select , then press .
uDialing starts automatically.
1To make a call using the imported phonebook
This function is disabled while the vehicle is moving.
However, you can call a stored voice-tagged speed
dial number using voice commands.
2Limitations for Manual Operation P. 275
2Speed Dial P. 287
1To make a call using a phone number
This function is disabled while the vehicle is moving.
However, you can call a stored voice-tagged speed
dial number using voice commands.
2Limitations for Manual Operation P. 275
2Speed Dial P. 287
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 292 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
Continued 293
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features
■To make a call using redial
1. Press the button or the button.
2. Rotate to select Redial, then press .
uDialing starts automatically.
■To make a call using the call history
Call history is stored by Dialed Calls,
Received Calls, and Missed Calls.
1. Press the button or the button.
2. Rotate to select Call History, then
press .
3. Rotate to select Dialed Calls, Received
Calls, or Missed Calls, then press .
4. Rotate to select a number, then press
.
uDialing starts automatically.
1To make a call using redial
Press and hold the button to redial the last
number dialed in your phone’s call history.
1To make a call using the call history
The call history appears only when a phone is
connected to HFL, and displays the last 20 dialed,
received, or missed calls.
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 293 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
294
Features
■To make a call using a speed dial entry
1. Press the button or the button.
2. Rotate to select Speed Dial, then press
.
3. Rotate to select a number, then press
.
uDialing starts automatically.
1To make a call using a speed dial entry
On the Phone screen, the first six speed dials on the
list can be directly selected by pressing the
corresponding audio preset buttons (1-6).
Select Others to view another paired phone’s speed
dial list.
When a voice tag is stored, press the button and
call the number using voice commands.
2Speed Dial P. 287
Any voice-tagged speed dial entry can be dialed by
voice from any screen. Press the button and
follow the prompts.
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 294 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
Continued 295
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features
When there is an incoming call, an audible
notification sounds and the Incoming Call
screen appears.
Press the button to answer the call.
Press the button to decline or end the call.
■Receiving a Call
1Receiving a Call
Call Waiting
Press the button to put the current call on hold
to answer the incoming call.
Press the button again to return to the current
call.
Select Ignore to ignore the incoming call if you do
not want to answer it.
Press the button if you want to hang up the
current call.
You can select the icons on the audio/information
screen instead of the and buttons. Rotate
to select the icon, then press .
HFL Mode
Caller’s Name
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 295 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
296
Features
The following options are available during a call.
Swap Call: Put the current call on hold to answer the incoming call.
Mute: Mute your voice.
Transfer Call: Transfer a call from HFL to your phone.
Dial Tones: Send numbers during a call. This is useful when you call a menu-driven
phone system.
1. To view the available options, press the
button.
2. Rotate to select the option, then press
.
uThe check box is checked when Mute is
selected. Select Mute again to turn it off.
■Options During a Call
1Options During a Call
Dial Tones: Available on some phones.
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 296 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
297
Continued
Features
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) allows you to place and receive phone calls using
your vehicle’s audio system, without handling your cell phone.
Using HFL
■HFL Buttons
1Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®
Place your phone where you can get good reception.
To use HFL, you need a Bluetooth-compatible cell
phone. For a list of compatible phones, pairing
procedures, and special feature capabilities:
•U.S.: Visit automobiles.honda.com/handsfreelink/,
or call 1-888-528-7876.
•Canada: Visit www.handsfreelink.ca, or call 1-888-
528-7876.
To use HFL, the Bluetooth On/Off Status setting
must be On.
2Customized Features P. 252
Voice control tips
•Aim the vents away from the ceiling and close the
windows, as noise coming from them may interfere
with the microphones.
•Press and release the button when you want to
call a number using a stored voice tag, a
phonebook, name or a number. Speak clearly and
naturally after a beep
•If the microphone picks up voices other than yours,
the command may be misinterpreted.
•To change the volume level, use the audio system’s
VOL (Volume) or use the remote audio controls on
the steering wheel.
State or local laws may prohibit the operation of
handheld electronic devices while operating a
vehicle.
Models with display audio system
VOL
HOME
MENU
BACK
Microphones
(Pick-up) Button
(Hang-up/Back) Button
Volume up
(Talk) Button
(MENU) Button
Volume down
SOURCE Button
/ Buttons
(MENU) Icon
(HOME) Icon
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 297 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uUsing HFL
298
Features
(Pick-up) button: Press to go directly to the Phone screen, or to answer an
incoming call.
(Hang-up/Back) button: Press to end a call, go back to the previous
command, or to cancel a command.
(Talk) button: Press to call a number with a stored voice tag, a phonebook,
name, or a number.
button: Press to display Speed Dial, Call History, or Redial on the Phone
screen.
/ button: Press to select an item displayed on the Phone screen.
SOURCE button: Press to call a number listed in the selected item on the Phone
screen.
To go to the Phone menu screen:
1. Select HOME.
2. Select Phone to switch the display to the Phone screen.
3. Select MENU.
1Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®
Up to six speed dial entries can be displayed among a
total of 20 that can be entered. If there is no entries
in the system, Speed Dial is disabled.
2Speed Dial P. 312
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered
trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc., and any
use of such marks by Honda Motor Co., Ltd., is under
license. Other trademarks and trade names are those
of their respective owners.
HFL Limitations
An incoming call on HFL will interrupt the audio
system when it is playing. It will resume when the call
is ended.
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 298 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
299
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uUsing HFL
Features
The audio/information screen notifies you when there is an incoming call.
Certain manual functions are disabled or inoperable while the vehicle is in motion.
You cannot select a grayed-out option until the vehicle is stopped.
Only previously stored speed dial entries with voice tags, phone book names, or
numbers can be called using voice commands while the vehicle is in motion.
2Speed Dial P. 312
■HFL Status Display
1HFL Status Display
The information that appears on the audio/
information screen varies between phone models.
You can change the system language.
2Customized Features P. 252
HFL Mode
Battery Level Status
Signal Strength
Bluetooth Indicator
Comes on when your phone
is connected to HFL.
Caller’s Name
Caller’s Number
■Limitations for Manual Operation
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 299 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
300
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features
HFL Menus
The ignition switch must be in ACCESSORY (q or ON (w*1 to use HFL.
■Phone settings screen
1. Select HOME.
2. Select Settings.
3. Select Phone Settings.
1HFL Menus
To use HFL, you must first pair your Bluetooth-
compatible mobile phone to the system while the
vehicle is parked.
Some functions are limited while driving.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
*2: Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.
Phone Connect Phone*2 Add Bluetooth Device
(Existing entry list)*2
(Existing entry list)
Disconnect
Edit Device Name
Add Bluetooth Device
Bluetooth Device List
Delete This Device
Pair a phone to the system.
Connect a phone to the system.
Disconnect a paired phone from the system.
Edit a previously paired
phone name.
Pair a phone to the system.
Delete a previously paired
phone.
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 300 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
301
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Continued
Features
*1: Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.
Edit Speed Dial*1 New Entry
Delete All
Automatic Phone Sync*1
Manual Input
HondaLink Assist*1
Ring Tone
Import from Call History
Enter a phone number to
store as a speed dial number.
Select the ring tone.
Select a phone number from
the call history to store as a
speed dial number.
Import from Phonebook Select a phone number from
the phonebook to store as a
speed dial number.
(Existing entry list) Edit Edit a previously stored speed
dial number.
●Change a name.
●Change a number.
●Create or delete a voice tag.
Delete all of the previously stored speed dial number.
Delete Delete a previously stored
speed dial number.
Set phonebook data to be automatically imported when a phone is paired to HFL.
Turn HondaLink Assist on and off.
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 301 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
302
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features
*1: Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.
Text/Email*1 Enable Text/Email
New Message Notification
Default
Turn the text/e-mail message function on and off.
Select a mail or text message account.Select Account
Select whether a pop-up alert comes on the screen when HFL
receives a new text/e-mail message.
Cancel/Reset all customized items in the Phone Settings group as default.
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 302 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
303
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Continued
Features
■Phone menu screen
1. Press , or select HOME, then select
Phone.
2. Press (MENU) on the steering wheel, or
select MENU.
*1: Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.
Speed Dial*1 New Entry Manual Input Enter a phone number to store as a speed dial
number.
Phonebook*1
(Existing entry list)
Import from Call History
Import from Phonebook
Select a phone number from the call history to store
as a speed dial number.
Select a phone number from the phonebook to store
as a speed dial number.
Dial the selected number in the speed dial list.
Display the paired phone’s phonebook.
Redial*1 Redial the last number dialed in the phone’s history.
Dial*1 Enter a phone number to dial.
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 303 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
304
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features
*1: Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.
Call History*1 All
Read/Stop System reads received message aloud, or stop
message from being read.
Text/Email*1
(previous)
(next)
Display the last 20 outgoing, incoming and missed calls.
Dialed Display the last 20 outgoing calls.
Received Display the last 20 incoming calls.
Missed Display the last 20 missed calls.
Select Account*Select a mail or text message account.
Select a message.
Message is read aloud.
See the previous message.
See the next message.
Reply Reply to a received message using one of six fixed
phrases.
Call Make a call to the sender.
* Not available on all models
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 304 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
Continued 305
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features
■To pair a mobile phone (when there is
no phone paired to the system)
1. Select Phone.
2. Select Yes.
3. Make sure your phone is in search or
discoverable mode, then select OK.
uHFL automatically searches for a
Bluetooth device.
4. Select your phone when it appears on the
list.
uIf your phone does not appear, you can
select Refresh to search again.
uIf your phone still does not appear, select
Phone not found and search for
Bluetooth devices using your phone.
From your phone, select
HandsFreeLink.
5. The system gives you a pairing code on the
audio/information screen.
uConfirm if the pairing code on the screen
and your phone match.This may vary by
phone.
6. A notification appears on the screen if
pairing is successful.
■Phone Setup
1Phone Setup
Your Bluetooth-compatible phone must be paired to
HFL before you can make and receive hands-free
calls.
Phone Pairing Tips:
•You cannot pair your phone while the vehicle is
moving.
•Up to six phones can be paired.
•Your phone’s battery may drain faster when it is
paired to HFL.
•If your phone is not ready for pairing or not found
by the system, the system will return to the
previous screen.
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 305 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
306
Features
■Changing the currently paired phone
1. Go to the Phone settings screen.
2Phone settings screen P. 300
2. Select Connect Phone.
3. Select a phone to connect.
uHFL disconnects the current phone and
starts searching for another paired
phone.
■To change the pairing code setting
1. Select HOME.
2. Select Settings.
3. Select Bluetooth.
4. Select the Bluetooth tab.
5. Select Edit Pairing Code.
6. Select Fixed or Random.
1Changing the currently paired phone
If no other phones are found or paired when trying to
switch to another phone, HFL will inform you that the
original phone is connected again.
1To change the pairing code setting
The default pairing code is 0000 until you change the
setting.
To create your own, select Fixed, and delete the
current code, then enter a new one.
For a randomly generated pairing code each time you
pair a phone, select Random.
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 306 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
307
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Continued
Features
■To edit an already-paired phone name
1. Go to the Phone settings screen.
2Phone settings screen P. 300
2. Select the Phone tab.
3. Select Bluetooth Device List.
4. Select a paired phone you want to edit.
5. Select Edit Device Name.
6. Edit the name and select OK.
7. A notification appears if the change is
successful.
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 307 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
308
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features
■To delete a paired phone
1. Go to the Phone settings screen.
2Phone settings screen P. 300
2. Select the Phone tab.
3. Select Bluetooth Device List.
4. Select a phone you want to delete.
5. Select Delete This Device.
6. You will receive a confirmation message on
the screen. Select Yes.
7. A notification appears if the deletion is
successful.
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 308 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
Continued 309
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features
■To turn on or off the text/e-mail
function
1. Go to the Phone settings screen.
2Phone settings screen P. 300
2. Select the Text/Email tab, then Enable
Text/Email.
uA pop-up menu appears on the screen.
3. Select On or Off.
■To turn on or off the text/e-mail notice
1. Go to the Phone settings screen.
2Phone settings screen P. 300
2. Select the Text/Email tab, then New
Message Notification.
uA pop-up menu appears on the screen.
3. Select On or Off.
■To Set Up a Text/E-mail Message Options
1To turn on or off the text/e-mail notice
On: A pop-up notification comes on every time you
receive a new message.
Off: The message you receive is stored in the system
without notification.
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 309 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
310
Features
You can change the ring tone setting.
1. Go to the Phone settings screen.
2Phone settings screen P. 300
2. Select the Phone tab, then Ring Tone.
3. Select Fixed or Mobile Phone.
■Ring Tone
1Ring Tone
Fixed: The fixed ring tone sounds from the speaker.
Mobile Phone: The ring tone stored in the
connected cell phone is heard through the vehicle
speakers.
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 310 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
Continued 311
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features
■When Automatic Phone Sync is set to
On:
When your phone is paired, the contents of its
phonebook and call history are automatically
imported to the system.
■Changing the Automatic Phone Sync
setting
1. Go to the Phone settings screen.
2Phone settings screen P. 300
2. Select the Phone tab, then Automatic
Phone Sync.
3. Select On or Off.
■Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History
1Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History
When you select a person from the list in the cellular
phonebook, you can see up to three category icons.
The icons indicate what types of numbers are stored
for that name.
On some phones, it may not be possible to import the
category icons to the system.
The phonebook is updated after every connection.
Call history is updated after every connection or call.
Pref
Home
Mobile
Work
Pager
Fax
Car
Other
Voice
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 311 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
312
Features
Up to 20 speed dial numbers can be stored per phone.
To store a speed dial number:
1. Go to the Phone menu screen.
2Phone menu screen P. 303
2. Select Speed Dial.
uRepeat the procedure to select New
Entry.
3. Select a place to choose a number.
From Import from Call History:
uSelect a number from the call history.
From Manual Input:
uInput the number manually.
From Import from Phonebook:
uSelect a number from the linked cell
phone’s imported phonebook.
4. When the speed dial is successfully stored
from Import from Call History or Import
from Phonebook, you are asked to create
a voice tag for the number. Select Yes or
No.
5. Select Record to store a voice tag for the
speed dial entry.
uUsing the button, follow the prompts
to store a voice tag for the speed dial
entry.
■Speed Dial
1Speed Dial
When a voice tag is stored, press the button to
call the number using the voice tag. Say “Call” and
the voice tag name.
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 312 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
Continued 313
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features
■To add a voice tag to a stored speed
dial number
1. Go to the Phone settings screen.
2Phone settings screen P. 300
2. Select Phone tab, then Edit Speed Dial.
3. Select an existing speed dial entry.
uFrom the pop-up menu, select Edit.
4. Select Voice Tag.
uFrom the pop-up menu, select Record.
5. Select Record to store the voice tag.
6. Using the button, follow the prompts to
complete the voice tag.
■To delete a voice tag
1. Go to the Phone settings screen.
2Phone settings screen P. 300
2. Select Phone tab, then Edit Speed Dial.
3. Select an existing speed dial entry.
uFrom the pop-up menu, select Edit.
4. Select Voice Tag.
uFrom the pop-up menu, select Clear.
5. A confirmation message appears on the
screen. Select Yes.
1Speed Dial
Avoid using duplicate voice tags.
Avoid using “home” as a voice tag.
It is easier for the system to recognize a longer name.
For example, use “John Smith” instead of “John.”
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 313 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
314
Features
■To delete a speed dial
1. Go to the Phone settings screen.
2Phone settings screen P. 300
2. Select Phone tab, then Edit Speed Dial.
3. Select an existing speed dial entry.
uFrom the pop-up menu, select Delete.
4. A confirmation message appears on the
screen. Select Yes.
You can make calls by inputting any phone
number, or by using the imported
phonebook, call history, speed dial entries, or
redial.
■Making a Call
1Making a Call
Any voice-tagged speed dial entry, phonebook name,
or number can be dialed by voice from most screens.
Press the button and say “Call” and the stored
voice tag name.
Once a call is connected, you can hear the voice of
the person you are calling through the audio
speakers.
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 314 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
Continued 315
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features
■To make a call using the imported
phonebook
1. Go to the Phone menu screen.
2Phone menu screen P. 303
2. Select Phonebook.
3. Select a name.
uYou can also search by letter. Select
Search.
uUse the keyboard on the touch screen for
entering letters.
4. Select a number.
uDialing starts automatically.
■To make a call using a phone number
1. Go to the Phone menu screen.
2Phone menu screen P. 303
2. Select Dial.
3. Select a number.
uUse the keyboard on the touch screen for
entering numbers.
4. Select .
uDialing starts automatically.
1To make a call using the imported phonebook
This function is disabled while the vehicle is moving.
However, you can call a stored voice-tagged speed
dial number using voice commands.
2Limitations for Manual Operation P. 299
2Speed Dial P. 312
1To make a call using a phone number
This function is disabled while the vehicle is moving.
However, you can call a stored voice-tagged speed
dial number using voice commands.
2Limitations for Manual Operation P. 299
2Speed Dial P. 312
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 315 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
316
Features
■To make a call using redial
1. Go to the Phone menu screen.
2Phone menu screen P. 303
2. Select Redial.
uDialing starts automatically.
■To make a call using the call history
Call history is stored by All, Dialed,
Received, and Missed.
1. Go to the Phone menu screen.
2Phone menu screen P. 303
2. Select Call History.
3. Select All, Dialed, Received, or Missed.
4. Select a number.
uDialing starts automatically.
■To make a call using a speed dial entry
1. Go to the Phone menu screen.
2Phone menu screen P. 303
2. Select Speed Dial.
3. Select a number.
uDialing starts automatically.
1To make a call using redial
Press and hold the button to redial the last
number dialed in your phone’s history.
1To make a call using the call history
The call history displays the last 20 dialed, received, or
missed calls.
(Appears only when a phone is connected to the
system.)
1To make a call using a speed dial entry
When a voice tag is stored, press the button to
call the number using the voice tag.
2Speed Dial P. 312
Any voice-tagged speed dial entry can be dialed by
voice from any screen.
Press the button and follow the prompts.
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 316 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
Continued 317
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features
When there is an incoming call, an audible
notification sounds and the Incoming call
screen appears.
Press the button to answer the call.
Press the button to decline or end the call.
The available options appear on the screen during a call.
Mute: Mute your voice.
uThe mute icon appears when Mute is
selected. Select Mute again to turn it off.
Transfer: Transfer a call from the system to
your phone.
Touch Tones: Send numbers during a call.
This is useful when you call a menu-driven
phone system.
■Receiving a Call
1Receiving a Call
Call Waiting
Press the button to put the current call on hold
to answer the incoming call.
Press the button again to return to the current
call.
Select Ignore to ignore the incoming call if you do
not want to answer it.
Press the button if you want to hang up the
current call.
You can select the icons on the touch screen instead
of the and buttons.
■Options During a Call
1Options During a Call
Touch Tones: Available on some phones.
You can select the icons on the touch screen.
Mute Icon
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 317 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
318
Features
HFL can display newly received text and e-mail messages as well as 20 of the most
recently received messages on a linked cell phone. Each received message can be
read aloud and replied to using a fixed common phrase.
1. A pop-up appears and notifies you of a new
text or e-mail message.
2. Select Read to listen to the message.
uThe text or e-mail message is displayed.
The system automatically starts reading
out the message.
3. To discontinue the message read-out, select
Stop.
■Receiving a Text/E-mail Message
1Receiving a Text/E-mail Message
The system does not display any received messages
while you are driving. You can only hear them read
aloud.
With some phones, you may be able to display up to
20 most recent text and e-mail messages.
State or local laws may limit your use of the HFL text/
e-mail message feature. Only use the text/e-mail
message feature when conditions allow you to do so
safely.
When you receive a text or e-mail message for the
first time since the phone is paired to HFL, you are
asked to turn the New Message Notification
setting to On.
2To turn on or off the text/e-mail notice
P. 309
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 318 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
Continued 319
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features
If a paired phone has text or mail message accounts, you can select one of them to
be active and receive notifications.
1. Go to the Phone settings screen.
2Phone settings screen P. 300
2. Select Text/Email tab, then Select
Account.
uA pop-up menu appears on the screen.
3. Select Text Messages or an e-mail account
you want.
■Selecting a Mail Account
1Selecting a Mail Account
You can also select a mail account from the folder list
screen or the message list screen.
You can only receive notifications from one text
message or mail account at a time.
Select
Account
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 319 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
320
Features
■Displaying text messages
1. Go to the Phone menu screen.
2Phone menu screen P. 303
2. Select Text/Email.
uSelect account if necessary.
3. Select a message.
uThe text message is displayed. The
system automatically starts reading the
message aloud.
■Displaying Messages
1Displaying Messages
The icon appears next to an unread message.
If you delete a message on the phone, the message is
also deleted in the system. If you send a message
from the system, the message goes to your phone’s
outbox.
To see the previous or next message, select
(previous) or (next) on the message screen.
Message List
Text Message
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 320 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
321
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Continued
Features
■Displaying e-mails
1. Go to the Phone menu screen.
2Phone menu screen P. 303
2. Select Text/Email.
uSelect Select Account if necessary.
3. Select a folder.
4. Select a message.
uThe e-mail message is displayed. The
system automatically starts reading the
message aloud.
Folder List
Message List
E-mail
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 321 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
322
Features
■Read or Stop reading a message
1. Go to the text or e-mail message screen.
uThe system automatically starts reading
the message aloud.
2Displaying Messages P. 320
2. Select Stop to stop reading.
Select Read again to start reading the
message from the beginning.
■Reply to a message
1. Go to the text or e-mail message screen.
uThe system automatically starts reading
the message aloud.
2Displaying Messages P. 320
2. Select Reply.
3. Select the reply message.
uThe pop-up menu appears on the screen.
4. Select Send to send the message.
uComplete appears on the screen when
the reply message was successfully sent.
1Reply to a message
The available fixed reply messages are as follows:
•Talk to you later, I’m driving.
•I’m on my way.
•I’m running late.
•OK
•Yes
•No
You cannot add, edit, or delete reply messages.
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 322 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
323
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Continued
Features
■Making a call to a sender
1. Go to the text message screen.
2. Select Call.
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 323 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
324
Features
■Automatic collision notification
If your vehicle’s airbags deploy or if the unit
detects that the vehicle is severely impacted,
your vehicle automatically will attempt to
connect to the HondaLink operator. If
connected, information about your vehicle, its
location, and its condition will be sent to the
operator; you also can speak to the operator
when connected.
IMPORTANT: For vehicles equipped with HondaLink Assist, owner activation
constitutes authorization for Honda to collect information from your vehicle needed
to provide the service, and agreement to the Terms of Use at www.hondalink.com/
TermsAndConditions. In a crash, HondaLink Assist will attempt to notify emergency
services but NEITHER HONDA NOR ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS GUARANTEE THAT
SUCH NOTIFICATION WILL OCCUR.
Honda reserves the right to terminate HondaLink Assist services at any time or for
any reason, and in the future may not be able to provide services due to changes in,
or obsolescence of, technology integral to the service or changes in governmental
regulation.
■In Case of Emergency
1In Case of Emergency
Your vehicle may not be able to connect to the
operator if the battery level is low, the line is
disconnected, or you do not have adequate cellular
coverage.
You cannot use this emergency services when:
•You travel outside the HondaLink service coverage
areas.
•There is a problem with the connecting devices,
such as the microphones, speakers, or the unit
itself.
You cannot operate other phone-related functions
using the screen while talking to the operator.
Select Hang Up to terminate the connection to your
vehicle.
1Automatic collision notification
If the unit fails to connect to the operator, it
repeatedly tries until it succeeds.
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 324 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
325
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Features
■To enable notification
1. Go to the Phone settings screen.
2Phone settings screen P. 300
2. Select Phone tab, then HondaLink Assist.
uA pop-up menu appears on the screen.
3. Select On or Off.
1To enable notification
Setting options:
•On: Notification is available.
•Off: Disable the feature.
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 325 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
326
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 326 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
327
Driving
This chapter discusses driving and refueling.
Before Driving
Driving Preparation ................................... 328
Maximum Load Limit ................................ 331
Towing a Trailer
Towing Your Vehicle ................................. 334
Off-Highway Driving Guidelines............... 337
When Driving
Starting the Engine ................................... 339
Starting the Engine ................................... 342
Precautions While Driving ......................... 346
Continuously Variable Transmission*......... 347
Shifting..................................................... 348
Models without smart entry system
Models with smart entry system
Continuously variable transmission models
without paddle shifters
Shifting .......................................................... 350
Shifting .......................................................... 354
ECON Button*................................................ 357
Cruise Control................................................ 358
Forward Collision Warning (FCW)*................. 361
Lane Departure Warning (LDW)*.................... 365
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA®), aka Electronic Stability
Control (ESC), System .................................. 368
LaneWatchTM*................................................ 370
Real Time AWD with Intelligent Control System
TM
*
.... 372
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) ......... 373
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) - Required
Federal Explanation ...................................... 375
Continuously variable transmission models
with paddle shifters
Manual transmission models
Braking
Brake System ................................... 377
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) ........... 383
Brake Assist System ......................... 384
Parking Your Vehicle
When Stopped ................................ 385
Multi-View Rear Camera.................. 386
Refueling
Fuel Information .............................. 388
How to Refuel ................................. 389
Fuel Economy and CO2 Emissions
Improving Fuel Economy and Reducing
CO2 Emissions................................ 390
* Not available on all models
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 327 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
328
Driving
Before Driving
Driving Preparation
Check the following items before you start driving.
•Make sure there are no obstructions on the windows, door mirrors, exterior
lights, or other parts of the vehicle.
uRemove any frost, snow, or ice.
uRemove any snow on the roof, as this can slip down and obstruct your field of
vision while driving. If frozen solid, remove ice once it has softened.
uWhen removing ice from around the wheels, be sure not to damage the wheel
or wheel components.
•Make sure the hood is securely closed.
uIf the hood opens while driving, your front view will be blocked.
•Make sure the tires are in good condition.
uCheck air pressure, and check for damage and excessive wear.
2Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 423
•Make sure there are no people or objects behind or around the vehicle.
uThere are blind spots from the inside.
■Exterior Checks
1Exterior Checks
NOTICE
When doors are frozen shut, use warm water around
the door edges to melt any ice. Do not try to force
them open, as this can damage the rubber trim
around the doors. When done, wipe dry to avoid
further freezing.
Do not pour warm water into the key cylinder.
You will be unable to insert the key if the water
freezes in the hole.
Heat from the engine and exhaust can ignite
flammable materials left under the hood, causing a
fire. If you've parked your vehicle for an extended
period, inspect and remove any debris that may have
collected, such as dried grass and leaves that have
fallen or have been carried in for use as a nest by a
small animal. Also check under the hood for leftover
flammable materials after you or someone else has
performed maintenance on your vehicle.
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 328 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
Continued 329
uuBefore DrivinguDriving Preparation
Driving
•Store or secure all items on board properly.
uCarrying too much cargo, or improperly storing it, can affect your vehicle’s
handling, stability, stopping distance, and tires, and make it unsafe.
2Maximum Load Limit P. 331
•Do not pile items higher than the seat height.
uThey can block your view and may be thrown forward in the event of sudden
braking.
•Do not place anything in the front seat footwells. Make sure to secure the floor
mat.
uAn object or unsecured floor mat can interfere with your brake and accelerator
pedal operation while driving.
•If you have any animals on board, do not let them move around in the vehicle.
uThey may interfere with driving and a crash could occur.
•Securely close and lock all doors and the tailgate.
2Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside P. 107
•Adjust your seating position properly.
uAdjust the head restraint, too.
2Adjusting the Seats P. 142
2Adjusting the Head Restraints P. 144
•Adjust the mirrors and steering wheel properly for your driving.
uAdjust them while sitting in the proper driving position.
2Adjusting the Mirrors P. 140
2Adjusting the Steering Wheel P. 139
■Interior Checks
1Interior Checks
The headlight aim is set by the factory, and does not
need to be adjusted. However, if you regularly carry
heavy items in the cargo area, have the aiming
readjusted at a dealer or by a qualified technician.
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 329 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
330
uuBefore DrivinguDriving Preparation
Driving
•Be sure items placed on the floor behind the front seats cannot roll under the
seats.
uThey can interfere with the driver’s ability to operate the pedals, the operation
of the seats, or the operation of the sensors under the seats.
•Everyone in the vehicle must fasten their seat belt.
2Fastening a Seat Belt P. 38
•Make sure that the indicators in the instrument panel come on when you start the
vehicle, and go off soon after.
uAlways have a dealer check the vehicle if a problem is indicated.
2Indicators P. 74
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 330 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
331
uuBefore DrivinguMaximum Load Limit
Continued
Driving
Maximum Load Limit
The maximum load for your vehicle is 850 lbs (385 kg).
See the Tire and Loading Information label attached to the driver’s
doorjamb.
This figure includes the total weight of all occupants, cargo, and
accessories, and the tongue load if you are towing a trailer.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit -
(1) Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your
vehicle’s placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers
that will be riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers
from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
(4)
The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount equals
1,400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb. passengers in your vehicle, the
amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.
(1,400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.)
1Maximum Load Limit
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR):
The maximum allowable weight of the vehicle, all
occupants, all accessories, all cargo, and the tongue
load.
2Specifications P. 480
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR):
The maximum allowable weight of the vehicle axle.
2Specifications P. 480
3
WARNING
Overloading or improper loading
can affect handling and stability
and cause a crash in which you
can be hurt or killed.
Follow all load limits and other
loading guidelines in this manual.
Label Example
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 331 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
332
uuBefore DrivinguMaximum Load Limit
Driving
(5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being
loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the
available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will
be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to
determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage
load capacity of your vehicle.
In addition, the total weight of the vehicle, all occupants,
accessories, cargo, and trailer tongue load must not exceed the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR). Both are on a label on the driver’s doorjamb.
Load Limits Example
Example1
Max Load
850 lbs
(385 kg)
Passenger Weight
150 lbs x 2 = 300 lbs
(68 kg x 2 = 136 kg)
Cargo Weight
550 lbs
(249 kg)
Example2
Max Load
850 lbs
(385 kg)
Passenger Weight
150 lbs x 5 = 750 lbs
(68 kg x 5 = 340 kg)
Cargo Weight
100 lbs
(45 kg)
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 332 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
333
Driving
Towing a Trailer
Your vehicle is not designed to tow a trailer. Attempting to do so can void your
warranties.
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 333 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
334
uuTowing a TraileruTowing Your Vehicle
Driving
Towing Your Vehicle
Your vehicle is not designed to be towed behind a motorhome. If your vehicle needs
to be towed in an emergency, refer to the emergency towing information.
2Emergency Towing P. 475
Your vehicle can be towed behind a motorhome.
Perform the following procedure before towing your vehicle.
1. Shift to (N.
2. Release the parking brake.
3. Turn the ignition switch to ACCESSORY (q*1.
uMake sure the steering wheel does not lock.
4. Turn off all the electric devices. Do not use any accessory power sockets.
uThis can prevent the battery from running down.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.
■When Your Vehicle is Towed Behind a Motorhome
1Towing Your Vehicle
Do not exceed 65 mph (100 km/h).
Consult your towing parts sales or rental agency if
any other items are recommended or required for
your towing situation.
Manual transmission models
Continuously variable transmission models
Manual transmission models
Manual transmission models
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 334 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
Continued 335
uuTowing a TraileruTowing Your Vehicle
Driving
■Extended towing
If you tow more than eight hours in one day, you should repeat the “When Your
Vehicle is Towed Behind a Motorhome” at least every eight hours.
You also need to perform the following procedure to prevent the battery from
running down.
1. Remove the 20 A accessory power socket
and 7.5 A ACC fuses. These fuses are
located in the interior fuse box.
2Interior Fuse Boxes P. 472
2. Remove the 10 A Back up fuse. This fuse is
located in the engine compartment fuse
box.
2Engine Compartment Fuse Box P. 470
3. Store the fuses in a safe place so you do not
lose them.
uMake sure to reinstall the fuses before
you start driving your vehicle.
4. Shift to (N.
5. Turn the ignition switch to ACCESSORY
(q.
uMake sure the steering wheel does not
lock.
1Towing Your Vehicle
Make sure to reinstall the fuses before you start
driving your vehicle.
Engine Compartment Fuse Box
10 A Back Up Fuse
Interior Fuse Box
20 A Accessory
Power Socket Fuse
7.5 A ACC fuse
Models without smart entry system
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 335 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
336
uuTowing a TraileruTowing Your Vehicle
Driving
1. Remove the 20 A accessory power socket and 7.5 A ACC fuses. These fuses are located in the
interior fuse box.
2Interior Fuse Boxes P. 472
2. Remove the 10 A Back up fuse. This fuse is located in the engine compartment fuse box.
2Engine Compartment Fuse Box P. 470
3. Store the fuses in a safe place so you do not lose them.
uMake sure to reinstall the fuses before you start driving your vehicle.
4. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button without depressing the clutch pedal.
uThe indicator on the ENGINE START/STOP button blinks.
5. Touch the center of the ENGINE START/STOP button with the H logo on the smart entry remote
while the indicator is blinking.
uThe indicator stop blinking, then stays on.
6. Shift to (N.
7. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button once without depressing the clutch pedal.
uMake sure the steering wheel does not lock.
Engine Compartment Fuse Box
10 A Back Up Fuse
Interior Fuse Box
20 A Accessory
Power Socket Fuse
7.5 A ACC fuse
Models with smart entry system
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 336 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
337
Driving
Off-Highway Driving Guidelines
General Information
Your vehicle has been designed primarily for use on pavement, however, its higher
ground clearance allows you to occasionally travel on unpaved roads. It is not
designed for trail-blazing, or other challenging off-road activities.
If you decide to drive on unpaved roads, you will find that it requires somewhat
different driving skills and that your vehicle will handle somewhat differently than it
does on pavement. Pay attention to the precautions and tips in this section, and get
acquainted with your vehicle before leaving the pavement.
Important Safety Precautions
To avoid loss of control or rollover, be sure to follow all precautions and
recommendations:
•Be sure to store cargo properly and do not exceed your cargo load limits.
2Maximum Load Limit P. 331
•Whenever you drive, make sure you and your passengers always wear seat belts.
•Keep your speed low, and never go faster than the conditions allow.
•It’s up to you to continually assess the situation and drive within the limits.
1Off-Highway Driving Guidelines
Failure to operate your vehicle correctly might result
in a crash or a rollover.
2Important Handling Information P. 32
2Precautions While Driving P. 346
3
WARNING
Improperly operating this vehicle on or off-
pavement can cause a crash or rollover in
which you and your passengers could be
seriously injured or killed.
•Follow all instructions and guidelines in
this owner’s manual.
•Keep your speed low, and don’t drive
faster than conditions permit.
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 337 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
338
uuOff-Highway Driving GuidelinesuAvoiding Trouble
Driving
Avoiding Trouble
•Check Out Your Vehicle before you leave the pavement and make sure that all
scheduled maintenance has been completed. Pay special attention to the
condition of the tires, and check the tire pressures.
•Remember the route you choose presents limits (too steep or bumpy), you have
limits (driving skill and comfort), and your vehicle has limits (traction, stability, and
power). Failing to recognize these limits will likely put you and your passengers in
a hazardous situation.
•Accelerating and Braking should be done slowly and gradually. Trying to start
or stop too fast can cause a loss of traction and you could lose control.
•Avoiding Obstacles and Debris in the road reduces the likelihood of a rollover
or damage to your suspension or other components.
•Driving on Slopes increases your risk of a rollover, particularly if you attempt to
drive across a slope that is too steep. Going straight up or down a slope is usually
the safest. If you can’t clearly see all conditions or obstacles on a slope, walk it
before you drive it. If there is any doubt whether you can safely pass, don’t try it.
Find another route. If you get stuck when climbing, do not try to turn around.
Back down slowly following the same route you took up the hill.
•Crossing a Stream - Avoid driving through deep water. If you encounter water
in your route (a small stream or large puddle, for example), evaluate it carefully
before going ahead. Make sure it is shallow, flowing slowly, and has firm ground
underneath. If you are not sure of the depth or the ground, turn around and find
another route. Driving through deep water can also damage your vehicle. The
water can get into the transmission and differential, diluting the lubricant and
causing an eventual failure. It can also wash the grease out of the wheel bearings.
•If You Get Stuck, carefully go in the direction that you think will get you
unstuck. Do not spin the tires as this will only make things worse and could
damage the transmission. If you are unable to free yourself, your vehicle will need
to be towed. Front and rear tow hooks are provided for this purpose.
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 338 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
339
Continued
Driving
When Driving
Starting the Engine
1. Make sure the parking brake is applied.
uThe electric parking brake indicator
comes on for 15 seconds when you pull
up to electric parking brake switch.
2. Check that the transmission is in (P, then
depress the brake pedal.
uAlthough it is possible to start the vehicle
in (N, it is safer to start it in (P.
2. Check that the shift lever is in (N. Then
depress the brake pedal with your right
foot, and the clutch pedal with your left
foot.
uThe clutch pedal must be fully depressed
to start the engine.
Models without smart entry system
1Starting the Engine
Keep your foot firmly on the brake pedal when
starting the engine.
The engine is harder to start in cold weather and in
thinner air found at altitudes above 8,000 feet (2,400
meters).
When starting the engine in cold weather, turn off all
electrical accessories such as the lights, heating and
cooling system*/climate control system*, and rear
defogger in order to reduce battery drain.
If you live in a region where winter is extremely cold,
an engine block heater will improve starting and
warming of the engine. Consult a dealer for details.
If the exhaust system sounds abnormal or you can
smell exhaust gas inside the vehicle, have your vehicle
checked by a dealer. There may be a problem with
the engine or exhaust system.
Electric Parking Brake Switch
Brake Pedal
Continuously variable transmission models
Brake Pedal
Clutch Pedal
Manual transmission models
* Not available on all models
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 339 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
uuWhen DrivinguStarting the Engine
340
Driving
3. Turn the ignition switch to START (e
without depressing the accelerator pedal.
1. Keeping your right foot on the brake pedal, put the shift lever in (D. Select (R
when reversing.
2. With the parking brake applied, release the brake pedal and gently depress the
accelerator pedal.
uMake sure the electric parking brake indicator goes off.
2Parking Brake P. 377
1Starting the Engine
Do not hold the key in START (e for more than 10
seconds.
•If the engine does not start right away, wait for at
least 30 seconds before trying again.
•If the engine starts, but then immediately stops,
wait at least 30 seconds before repeating step 3
while gently depressing the accelerator pedal.
Release the accelerator pedal once the engine
starts.
The immobilizer system protects your vehicle from
theft. If an improperly coded device is used, the
engine’s fuel system is disabled.
2Immobilizer System P. 118
■Starting to Drive
1Starting to Drive
You can also release the parking brake by pressing
the electric parking brake switch while depressing the
brake pedal.
When facing downhill, you can start your vehicle
more smoothly by manually releasing it with the
electric parking brake switch than by releasing it with
the accelerator pedal.
Continuously variable transmission models
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 340 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
341
uuWhen DrivinguStarting the Engine
Driving
■Hill start assist system
Hill start assist keeps the brake engaged briefly to help prevent the vehicle from
rolling on inclines as you move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator.
Depress the clutch pedal, and shift to one of the forward gears when facing uphill,
or (R when facing downhill, then release the brake pedal.
Move the shift lever to (D, (S, or (L when facing uphill, or (R when facing
downhill, then release the brake pedal.
1Hill start assist system
Hill start assist may not prevent the vehicle from
rolling downhill on a very steep or slippery slope, and
does not operate on small inclines.
Hill start assist is not a replacement for the parking
brake.
Manual transmission models
Continuously variable transmission models
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 341 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
342
uuWhen DrivinguStarting the Engine
Driving
Starting the Engine
1. Make sure the parking brake is applied.
uThe electric parking brake indicator
comes on for 15 seconds when you pull
up to electric parking brake switch.
2. Check that the transmission is in (P, then
depress the brake pedal.
uAlthough it is possible to start the vehicle
in (N, it is safer to start it in (P.
2. Check that the shift lever is in (N. Then
depress the brake pedal with your right
foot, and the clutch pedal with your left
foot.
uThe clutch pedal must be fully depressed
to start the engine.
Models with smart entry system
1Starting the Engine
Keep your foot firmly on the brake pedal when
starting the engine.
The engine is harder to start in cold weather and in
thinner air found at altitudes above 8,000 feet (2,400
meters).
When starting the engine in cold weather, turn off all
electrical accessories such as the lights, climate
control system, and rear defogger in order to reduce
battery drain.
If you live in a region where winter is extremely cold,
an engine block heater will improve starting and
warming of the engine. Consult a dealer for details.
If the exhaust system sounds abnormal or you can
smell exhaust gas inside the vehicle, have your vehicle
checked by a dealer. There may be a problem with
the engine or exhaust system.
The immobilizer system protects your vehicle from
theft.If an improperly coded device is used, the
engine’s fuel system is disabled.
2Immobilizer System P. 118
Electric Parking Brake Switch
Brake Pedal
Continuously variable transmission models
Brake Pedal
Clutch Pedal
Manual transmission models
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 342 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
Continued 343
uuWhen DrivinguStarting the Engine
Driving
3. Press the ENGINE START/STOP button
without depressing the accelerator pedal.
1Starting the Engine
Bring the smart entry remote close to the ENGINE
START/STOP button if the battery in the smart entry
remote is weak.
2If the Smart Entry Remote Battery is Weak
P. 458
The engine may not start if the smart entry remote is
subjected to strong radio waves.
Do not hold the ENGINE START/STOP button to
start the engine.
If the engine does not start, wait at least 30 seconds
before trying again.
ENGINE
START
STOP
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 343 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
uuWhen DrivinguStarting the Engine
344
Driving
You can turn the engine off when the vehicle is completely stopped.
1. Put the transmission into (P.
2. Press the ENGINE START/STOP button.
•If the transmission is in (N, press the ENGINE START/STOP button.
•If the transmission in any gear other than (N, depress the clutch pedal, then press
the ENGINE START/STOP button.
1. Keeping your right foot on the brake pedal, put the shift lever in (D. Select (R
when reversing.
2. With the parking brake applied, release the brake pedal and gently depress the
accelerator pedal.
uMake sure the electric parking brake indicator goes off.
2Parking Brake P. 377
■Stopping the Engine
■Starting to Drive
Continuously variable transmission models
Manual transmission models
1Starting to Drive
You can also release the parking brake by pressing
the electric parking brake switch while depressing the
brake pedal.
When facing downhill, you can start your vehicle
more smoothly by manually releasing it with the
electric parking brake switch than by releasing it with
the accelerator pedal.
Continuously variable transmission models
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 344 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
345
uuWhen DrivinguStarting the Engine
Driving
■Hill start assist system
Hill start assist keeps the brake engaged briefly to help prevent the vehicle from
rolling on inclines as you move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator.
Depress the clutch pedal, and shift to one of the forward gears when facing uphill,
or (R when facing downhill, then release the brake pedal.
Move the shift lever to (D or (S when facing uphill, or (R when facing downhill,
then release the brake pedal.
1Hill start assist system
Hill start assist may not prevent the vehicle from
rolling downhill on a very steep or slippery slope, and
does not operate on small inclines.
Hill start assist is not a replacement for the parking
brake.
Manual transmission models
Continuously variable transmission models
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 345 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
346
uuWhen DrivinguPrecautions While Driving
Driving
Precautions While Driving
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles.
To prevent rollovers or loss of control:
•Take corners at slower speeds than you would with a passenger vehicle.
•Avoid sharp turns and abrupt maneuvers whenever possible.
•Do not modify your vehicle in any way that you would raise the center of gravity.
•Do not carry heavy cargo on the roof.
Never carry more than 165 lbs (75 kg) of cargo on the roof rack (Honda accessory).
Avoid driving in deep water and on flooded roads. This can damage the engine or
driveline, or cause electrical component failure.
■Driving Guidelines for Your Utility Vehicle
■In Rain
1Precautions While Driving
NOTICE
Do not operate the shift lever while pressing the
accelerator pedal. You could damage the
transmission.
NOTICE
If you repeatedly turn the steering wheel at an
extremely low speed, or hold the steering wheel in
the full left or right position for a while, the electric
power steering (EPS) system heats up. The system
goes into a protective mode, and limits its
performance. The steering wheel becomes harder
and harder to operate. Once the system cools down,
the EPS system is restored. Repeated operation under
these conditions can eventually damage the system.
If the ignition switch is turned to ACCESSORY (q*1
while driving, the engine will shut down and all
steering and brake power assist functions will stop,
making it difficult to control the vehicle.
Do not put the shift lever in (N, as you will lose
engine braking (and acceleration) performance.
During the first 600 miles (1,000 km) of operation,
avoid sudden acceleration or full throttle operation so
as to not damage the engine or powertrain.
Avoid hard braking for the first 200 miles (300 km).
You should also follow this when the brake pads are
replaced.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an
ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition
switch.
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 346 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
347
uuWhen DrivinguContinuously Variable Transmission*
Driving
If there is a strong impact with something under the vehicle, stop in a safe location.
Check the underside of the vehicle for damage or any fluid leaks.
Continuously Variable Transmission*
The engine runs at a higher idle speed and creeping increases.
Keep the brake pedal firmly depressed when stopped.
Quickly depressing the accelerator pedal while driving uphill may cause the
transmission to drop to a lower gear, unexpectedly increasing vehicle speed. Depress
the accelerator pedal carefully, especially on slippery roads and curves.
■Other Precautions
■Creeping
■Kickdown
1Driving Guidelines for Your Utility Vehicle
Failure to operate your vehicle correctly might result
in a crash or a rollover.
2Important Handling Information P. 32
2Precautions While Driving P. 346
* Not available on all models
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 347 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
348
uuWhen DrivinguShifting
Driving
Shifting
Change the shift position in accordance with your driving needs.
■Shift lever positions
Continuously variable transmission models without paddle shifters
1Shifting
You cannot turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0 and
remove the key unless the shift lever is in (P.
The vehicle may move forward very slightly even in
(N while the engine is cold.
Depress the brake pedal firmly and, when necessary,
apply the parking brake.
When shifting positions in extremely low
temperatures (-22°F/-30°C), there may be a short
delay before the shift position is displayed. Always
confirm you are in the correct shift position before
driving.
Park
Used when parking or starting the
engine
Reverse
Used when reversing
Neutral
Transmission is not locked
Drive
Used for normal driving
Drive (S)
Used:
●For better acceleration
●To increase engine braking
●When going up or down hills
Release Button
Low
●Used to further increase engine
braking
●Used when going up or down hills
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 348 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
349
uuWhen DrivinguShifting
Driving
■Shift Lever Operation
1Shift Lever Operation
NOTICE
When you change the shift lever from (D to (R and
vice versa, come to a complete stop and keep the
brake pedal depressed.
Operating the shift lever before the vehicle has come
to a complete standstill can damage the transmission.
Use the shift lever position indicator to check the
lever position before pulling away.
If the transmission indicator blinks when driving, in
any shift position, there is a problem with the
transmission.
Avoid sudden acceleration and have the transmission
checked by a dealer as soon as possible.
The fuel supply may be cut off if you drive at engine
speeds in or over the tachometer red zone (engine
speed limit). If this happens, you may experience a
slight jolt.
It may not be possible to operate the shift lever if the
brake pedal is applied while the shift lever release
button is held down.
Depress the brake pedal first.
Shift Lever Position Indicator
Tachometer’s red zone
Depress the brake pedal and press
the shift lever release button to shift.
Shift without pressing the shift lever
release button.
Press the shift lever release button
and shift.
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 349 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
350
uuWhen DrivinguShifting
Driving
Shifting
Change the shift position in accordance with your driving needs.
■Shift lever positions
Continuously variable transmission models with paddle shifters
1Shifting
You cannot change the power mode from ON to
VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) unless the shift lever is in (P.
The vehicle may move forward very slightly even in
(N while the engine is cold.
Depress the brake pedal firmly and, when necessary,
apply the parking brake.
When shifting positions in extremely low
temperatures (-22°F/-30°C), there may be a short
delay before the shift position is displayed. Always
confirm you are in the correct shift position before
driving.
Park
Used when parking or starting the
engine
Reverse
Used when reversing
Neutral
Transmission is not locked
Drive
Used:
●For normal driving
●When temporarily driving in the
7-speed manual shift mode
Release Button
Drive (S)
Used for:
●For better acceleration
●To increase engine braking
●When going up or down hills
●When driving in the 7-speed manual
shift mode
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 350 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
Continued 351
uuWhen DrivinguShifting
Driving
■Shift Lever Operation
1Shift Lever Operation
NOTICE
When you change the shift lever from (D to (R and
vice versa, come to a complete stop and keep the
brake pedal depressed.
Operating the shift lever before the vehicle has come
to a complete standstill can damage the transmission.
Use the shift lever position indicator to check the
lever position before pulling away.
If the transmission indicator blinks when driving, in
any shift position, there is a problem with the
transmission.
Avoid sudden acceleration and have the transmission
checked by a dealer as soon as possible.
The fuel supply may be cut off if you drive at engine
speeds in or over the tachometer red zone (engine
speed limit). If this happens, you may experience a
slight jolt.
It may not be possible to operate the shift lever if the
brake pedal is applied while the shift lever release
button is held down.
Depress the brake pedal first.
M (7-Speed Manual Shift Mode)
Indicator/Shift Indicator
Tachometer’s red zone
Depress the brake pedal and press
the shift lever release button to shift.
Shift without pressing the shift lever
release button.
Press the shift lever release button
and shift.
Shift Lever Position Indicator
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 351 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
uuWhen DrivinguShifting
352
Driving
Use the paddle shifters to change between 1st and 7th speeds without removing
your hands from the steering wheel. The transmission switches to the 7-speed
manual shift mode when you pull a paddle shifter while driving. This mode is useful
when engine braking is needed.
■When the shift lever is in (D:
The shift mode goes into the 7-speed manual shift mode temporarily, and the
number is displayed in the shift indicator.
The 7-speed manual shift mode is canceled automatically if you drive at constant
speed or accelerate, and the number in the shift indicator goes off.
You can cancel this mode by pulling the paddle shifter for a few seconds.
The 7-speed manual shift mode is especially useful when reducing the vehicle speed
temporarily before making a turn.
■When the shift lever is in (S:
The shift mode goes into the 7-speed manual shift mode. The M indicator and the
speed number are displayed in the shift indicator. As the vehicle speed slows down,
the transmission automatically shifts down accordingly. When the vehicle comes to
a stop, it automatically shifts down into 1st.
If the vehicle speed increases and the engine speed reaches near the tachometer’s
red zone, the transmission automatically shifts up.
You can only pull away in 1st speed.
When canceling the 7-speed manual shift mode, move the shift lever from (S to
(D. When the 7-speed manual shift mode is canceled, the M indicator and shift
indicator go off.
■7-Speed Manual Shift Mode
17-Speed Manual Shift Mode
To improve fuel economy, the transmission may shift
up to a higher speed than the seventh under certain
circumstances. In this case, the number in the shift
indicator remains as 7.
In the 7-speed manual shift mode, the transmission
shifts up or down by operating either paddle shifter
under the following conditions:
Shift Up: The engine speed reaches the lowest
threshold of the higher speed position.
Shift Down: The engine speed reaches the highest
threshold of the lower speed position.
When the engine speed reaches near the
tachometer’s red zone, the transmission shifts up
automatically.
When the engine speed reaches the lowest threshold
of the selected speed position, the transmission shifts
down automatically.
Operating the paddle shifters on slippery surfaces
may cause the tires to lock up. In this case, the 7-
speed manual shift mode is canceled and goes back
to the normal D driving mode.
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 352 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
353
uuWhen DrivinguShifting
Driving
■7-Speed Manual Shift Mode Operation
17-Speed Manual Shift Mode Operation
Each paddle shift operation makes a single speed
change.
To change continuously, release the paddle shifter
before pulling it again for the next speed.
The shift indicator blinks when you cannot shift up or
down. It indicates that your vehicle speed is not in its
allowable shifting range.
Slightly accelerate to shift up and decelerate to shift
down while the indicator is blinking.
The shift indicator may also blink when you cannot
shift down while driving in low speed. This prevents
the transmission from being damaged.
Upshifting when pulling
the (+ paddle shifter
(Changes to higher speed
number)
Downshifting when pulling
the (- paddle shifter
(Changes to lower speed
number)
(- Paddle Shifter
(Shift down)
(+ Paddle Shifter
(Shift up)
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 353 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
354
uuWhen DrivinguShifting
Driving
Shifting
Fully depress the clutch pedal to operate the shift lever and change gears, then
slowly release the pedal.
Depress the clutch pedal, and pause for a few seconds before shifting into (R, or
shift into one of the forward gears for a moment. This stops the gears so they do not
“grind.”
■Shift Lever Operation
Manual transmission models
1Shifting
NOTICE
Do not shift to (R before the vehicle comes to a
complete stop.
Shifting to (R before stopping can damage the
transmission.
NOTICE
Before downshifting, make sure the engine will not
go into the tachometer’s red zone. Should this occur,
it can severely damage your engine.
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 354 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
Continued 355
uuWhen DrivinguShifting
Driving
When you are not shifting, do not rest your
foot on the clutch pedal. This can cause your
clutch to wear out faster.
1Shifting
If you exceed the maximum speed for the gear you
are in, the engine speed will enter into the
tachometer’s red zone. When this happens, you may
experience a slight jolt.
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 355 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
356
uuWhen DrivinguShifting
Driving
The manual transmission has a lockout mechanism that stops you from accidentally
shifting into (R from a forward gear while the vehicle is moving above a certain
speed.
If you cannot shift to (R when the vehicle is stopped, do the following:
1. Depress the clutch pedal, move the shift
lever all the way to the left, and shift to (R.
2. If you still cannot shift into (R, apply the
parking brake, and turn the ignition switch
to ACCESSORY (q or LOCK (0*1.
3. Depress the clutch pedal and shift into (R.
4. Keep depressing the clutch pedal and start
the engine.
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if you
have to go through this procedure repeatedly.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.
■Reverse Lockout
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 356 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
357
uuWhen DrivinguECON Button*
Driving
ECON Button*
The ECON button turns the ECON mode on
and off. The ECON mode helps you improve
your fuel economy by adjusting the
performance of the engine, transmission,
heating and cooling system*/climate control
system*, and cruise control.
1ECON Button*
While in ECON mode, the climate control system has
greater temperature fluctuations.
Models with climate control system
* Not available on all models
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 357 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
358
uuWhen DrivinguCruise Control
Driving
Cruise Control
Maintains a constant vehicle speed without having to keep your foot on the
accelerator. Use cruise control on freeways or open roads where you can travel at a
constant speed with little acceleration or deceleration.
1Cruise Control
It may not be possible to maintain a constant speed
when driving uphill or downhill.
When not using cruise control:
Turn off cruise control by pressing the CRUISE
button.
While in ECON mode, it may take relatively more time
to accelerate to maintain the set speed.
When the engine speed slows down, try to
downshift.
You can maintain the set speed if you change gear
within five seconds.
3
WARNING
Improper use of the cruise control can lead
to a crash.
Use the cruise control only when traveling
on open highways in good weather.
Models with ECON button
Manual transmission models
■Shift positions for cruise control:
In (D or (S
Always keep sufficient distance
between you and the vehicle in
front of you.
Continuously variable transmission models
■Vehicle speed for cruise control:
Desired speed in a range above
roughly 25 mph (40 km/h) ~
When to use
CRUISE MAIN is on in
the instrument panel.
Cruise control is ready to
use.
■Press the CRUISE
button on the
steering wheel.
How to use
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 358 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
359
uuWhen DrivinguCruise Control
Continued
Driving
Take your foot off the pedal and press the -/SET button when you reach the desired
speed.
The moment you release the -/SET button, the set speed is fixed, and cruise control
begins. The CRUISE CONTROL indicator comes on.
■To Set the Vehicle Speed
-/SET Button
On when cruise control begins
Press and release
On
On
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 359 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
uuWhen DrivinguCruise Control
360
Driving
Increase or decrease the vehicle speed using the RES/+ or -/SET buttons on the
steering wheel.
•Each time you press the button, the vehicle speed is increased or decreased by
about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
•If you keep the button pressed, the vehicle speed increases or decreases until you
release it. This speed is then set.
To cancel cruise control, do any of the following:
•Press the CANCEL button.
•Press the CRUISE button.
•Depress the brake pedal.
•Depress the clutch pedal for five seconds or
more.
The CRUISE CONTROL indicator goes off.
■To Adjust the Vehicle Speed
1To Adjust the Vehicle Speed
You can set the vehicle speed using the -/SET button
on the steering wheel when adjusting the speed with
the accelerator and brake pedals.
■To Cancel
To decrease speed
To increase speed
1To Cancel
Resuming the prior set speed:
After cruise control has been canceled, you can still
resume the prior set speed by pressing the RES/+
button while driving at a speed of at least 25 mph (40
km/h) or more.
You cannot set or resume in the following situations:
•When vehicle speed is less than 25 mph (40 km/h)
•When the CRUISE button is turned off
At vehicle speeds of 22 mph (35 km/h) or less, cruise
control is canceled automatically.
CRUISE Button
CANCEL
Button
Manual transmission models
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 360 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
361
uuWhen DrivinguForward Collision Warning (FCW)*
Continued
Driving
Forward Collision Warning (FCW)*
Alerts you when it determines there is a possibility of your vehicle colliding with the
vehicle detected in front of yours.
If the system determines a collision is possible, it gives both visual and audible alerts.
uTake appropriate action to prevent a collision (apply the brakes, change lanes,
etc.).
■How the system works
The system may give warnings of potential collisions when your vehicle speed is
above 10 mph (15 km/h).
Canadian models
1Forward Collision Warning (FCW)*
Important Safety Reminder
FCW cannot detect all objects ahead and may not
detect a given object; accuracy of the system will vary
based on weather, speed and other factors. FCW
does not include a braking function. It is always your
responsibility to safely operate the vehicle and avoid
collisions.
You can change the Forward Collision Warning
Distance setting or turn the system on and off.
2To change vehicle distance and to turn the
system on and off P. 363
The camera is shared with Lane Departure Warning
(LDW).
2LDW Camera P. 366
LONG
NORMAL
SHORT
Your Vehicle Vehicle Ahead
You can set Long, Normal or Short for when warnings start:
* Not available on all models
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 361 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
uuWhen DrivinguForward Collision Warning (FCW)*
362
Driving
1Forward Collision Warning (FCW)*
Never apply a film or attach any objects to the
windshield that could obstruct the FCW camera’s
field of vision.
Scratches, nicks, and other damage to the windshield
within the FCW camera’s field of vision can cause the
system to operate abnormally. If this occurs, we
recommend that you replace the windshield with a
genuine Honda replacement windshield. Making
even minor repairs within the camera’s field of vision
or installing an aftermarket replacement windshield
may also cause the system to operate abnormally.
After replacing the windshield, have a dealer
recalibrate the camera. Proper calibration of the FCW
camera is necessary for the system to operate
properly.
Beep
The camera is located behind
the rearview mirror.
The beeper sounds and
the FCW indicator
blinks until a possible
collision is avoided.
* Not available on all models
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 362 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
Continued 363
uuWhen DrivinguForward Collision Warning (FCW)*
Driving
■To change vehicle distance and to turn the system on and off
Press the (FCW) button to change FCW
range.
Each time you press the button, the warning
distance (the distance behind a vehicle
detected ahead of you) setting cycles through
FCW LONG, FCW NORMAL, and FCW
SHORT warning distance.
2Information Display Warning and
Information Messages P. 87
To turn the system on and off, press and hold
the button until you hear a beep.
■Automatic shutoff
FCW may automatically shut itself off and the FCW indicator comes and stays on
when:
•The temperature inside the system is high.
•The windshield is blocked by dirt, mud, leaves, wet snow, etc.
Once the conditions that caused FCW to shut off improve or are addressed (e.g.,
cleaning), the system comes back on.
1Automatic shutoff
To help reduce the likelihood that high interior
temperatures will cause the camera system to shut
off, when parking, find a shady area or face the front
of the vehicle away from the sun. If you use a
reflective sun shade, do not allow it to cover the
camera housing. Covering the camera can
concentrate heat on the camera.
If the CAMERA HOT message appears:
•Use the climate control system to cool down the
interior and, if necessary, the defroster mode when
windows are fogged.
•Start driving the vehicle to lower the windshield
temperature, which cools down the area around
the FCW system.
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 363 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
364
uuWhen DrivinguForward Collision Warning (FCW)*
Driving
FCW may not activate or may not detect a vehicle in front of your vehicle, and may activate even when you are aware of a vehicle ahead
of you, or when there is no vehicle ahead under the following conditions.
■FCW Limitations
Condition
●The distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of you is too short.
●A vehicle cuts in front of you at a slow speed, and it brakes suddenly.
●A vehicle suddenly crosses in front of you.
●When either your vehicle or the vehicle ahead of you accelerates rapidly.
●The vehicle ahead of you is a motorcycle, a small vehicle, or a unique vehicle such as a tractor.
●When you drive off-road or on a mountain road, or curved and winding road for an extended period that makes it difficult for the camera to properly
detect a vehicle in front of you.
●When there are pedestrians or animals in front of your vehicle.
●When you drive in bad weather (rain, fog, etc.).
●A heavy load in the rear or modifications to the suspension tilts your vehicle.
●An abnormal tire condition is detected (wrong tire size, flat tire, etc.).
●When the windshield is blocked by dirt, mud, leaves, wet snow, etc.
●When the temperature inside the system is high.
●A sudden change between light and dark such as an entrance or exit of a tunnel.
●You drive into the sunlight (e.g. at dawn or dusk).
●When the windshield is dirty or cloudy.
●When streetlights are perceived as the taillight of a vehicle in front of yours.
●When driving at night, the vehicle ahead of you is running with either taillight bulb burned out.
●When you drive in the shadows of trees, buildings, etc.
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 364 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
365
uuWhen DrivinguLane Departure Warning (LDW)*
Continued
Driving
Lane Departure Warning (LDW)*
Alerts you when the system determines it is possible of your vehicle unintentionally
crossing over detected left or right side lane markings.
If your vehicle is getting too close to detected
left or right side lane markings without a turn
signal activated, LDW will give audible and
visual alerts.
The beeper sounds and the LDW indicator
blinks, letting you know that you need to take
appropriate action.
■How the System Works
Canadian models
1Lane Departure Warning (LDW)*
Important Safety Reminder
Like all assistance systems, LDW has limitations.
Over-reliance on LDW may result in a collision. It is
always your responsibility to keep the vehicle within
your driving lane.
LDW only alerts you when lane drift is detected
without a turn signal in use. LDW may not detect all
lane markings or lane departures; accuracy will vary
based on weather, speed and lane marker condition.
It is always your responsibility to safely operate the
vehicle and avoid collisions.
* Not available on all models
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 365 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
uuWhen DrivinguLane Departure Warning (LDW)*
366
Driving
The system begins to search for lane markings when all the following conditions are
met:
•The vehicle is traveling between at 45-90 mph (72-145 km/h).
•The vehicle is on a straight or slightly curved road.
•The turn signals are off.
•The brake pedal is not pressed.
The camera is located behind the rearview
mirror.
Press the LDW button to turn the system on
and off.
uThe indicator in the button comes on
when the system is on.
■How the System Activates
■LDW Camera
1How the System Activates
LDW may automatically shut off and the LDW
indicator comes and stays on.
2Indicators P. 86
1LDW Camera
Never apply a film or attach any objects to the
windshield that could obstruct the LDW camera’s
field of vision.
Scratches, nicks, and other damage to the windshield
within the LDW camera’s field of vision can cause the
system to operate abnormally. If this occurs, we
recommend that you replace the windshield with a
genuine Honda replacement windshield. Making
even minor repairs within the camera’s field of vision
or installing an aftermarket replacement windshield
may also cause the system to operate abnormally.
After replacing the windshield, have a dealer
recalibrate the camera. Proper calibration of the LDW
camera is necessary for the system to operate
properly.
To help reduce the likelihood that high interior
temperatures will cause the camera system to shut
off, when parking, find a shady area or face the front
of the vehicle away from the sun. Also, do not use a
reflective sunshade that can concentrate heat on the
camera.
If the CAMERA HOT message appears:
•Use the climate control system to cool down the
interior and, if necessary, the defroster mode when
windows are fogged.
•Start driving the vehicle to lower the windshield
temperature, which cools down the area around
the LDW system.
LDW Camera
■LDW On and Off
LDW Button
Indicator
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 366 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
367
uuWhen DrivinguLane Departure Warning (LDW)*
Driving
LDW may not activate or may not recognize lanes, and may activate even when
keeping in the middle of a lane under the following conditions.
■LDW Limitations
Condition
●When you drive in bad weather (rain, fog, etc.).
●A heavy load in the rear or modifications to the suspension tilts your vehicle.
●An abnormal tire condition is detected (wrong tire size, flat tire, etc.).
●When the windshield is blocked by dirt, mud, leaves, wet snow, etc.
●When the temperature inside the system is high.
●A sudden change between light and dark such as an entrance or exit of a tunnel.
●You drive into the sunlight (e.g. at dawn or dusk).
●When the windshield is dirty or cloudy.
●When you drive in the shadows of trees, buildings, etc.
●When you drive on a wet road surface following another vehicle.
uThe camera may perceive the tire tracks in the water as lane lines.
●When there is snow or wheel tracks on the side of the road.
●When the road has many repaired areas or an erased lane line.
●When the vehicle is running over painted signs or crosswalk markings.
●When you drive in a lane with worn-out lane markups.
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 367 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
368
uuWhen DrivinguVehicle Stability Assist (VSA®), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System
Driving
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA®), aka Electronic
Stability Control (ESC), System
VSA® helps to stabilize the vehicle during cornering if the vehicle turns more or less
than what was intended. It also assists in maintaining traction on slippery surfaces.
It does so by regulating engine output and selectively applying the brakes.
When VSA® activates, you may notice that the
engine does not respond to the accelerator.
You may also notice some noise from the
hydraulic system. You will also see the
indicator blink.
■VSA® Operation
1Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA®), aka Electronic Stability Control
(ESC), System
The VSA® may not function properly if tire type and
size are mixed. Make sure to use the same size and
type of tire, and the air pressures as specified.
When the VSA® system indicator comes on and stays
on while driving, there may be a problem with the
system. While this may not interfere with normal
driving, have your vehicle checked by a dealer
immediately.
VSA® cannot enhance stability in all driving situations
and does not control the entire braking system. You
still need to drive and corner at speeds appropriate
for the conditions and always leave a sufficient
margin of safety.
The main function of the VSA® system is generally
known as Electronic Stability Control (ESC). The
system also includes a traction control function.
VSA® System
Indicator
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 368 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
369
uuWhen DrivinguVehicle Stability Assist (VSA®), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System
Driving
This button is on the driver side control panel.
To partially disable VSA® functionality/
features, press and hold it until you hear a
beep.
Your vehicle will have normal braking and
cornering ability, but traction control function
will be less effective.
To restore VSA® functionality/features, press
the (VSA® OFF) button until you hear a
beep.
VSA® is turned on every time you start the
engine, even if you turned it off the last time
you drove the vehicle.
■VSA® On and Off
1Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA®), aka Electronic Stability Control
(ESC), System
In certain unusual conditions when your vehicle gets
stuck in shallow mud or fresh snow, it may be easier
to free it with the VSA® temporarily switched off.
When the button is pressed, the traction control
function becomes less effective. This allows for the
wheels to spin more freely at low speed. You should
only attempt to free your vehicle with the VSA® off if
you are not able to free it when the VSA® is on.
Immediately after freeing your vehicle, be sure to
switch VSA® on again. We do not recommend driving
your vehicle with the VSA® system switched off.
You may hear a motor sound coming from the
engine compartment while system checks are being
performed immediately after starting the engine or
while driving. This is normal.
VSA® OFF Indicator
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 369 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
370
uuWhen DrivinguLaneWatchTM*
Driving
LaneWatchTM*
LaneWatch is an assistance system that allows you to check the passenger side rear
areas displayed on the audio/information screen when the turn signal is activated to
the passenger’s side. A camera in the passenger side door mirror monitors these
areas and allows you to check for vehicles, in addition to your visual check and use
of the passenger door mirror. You can also keep the system on for your convenience
while driving.
1LaneWatchTM*
Important Safety Reminder
Like all assistance systems, LaneWatch has
limitations. Over reliance on LaneWatch may result in
a collision.
The LaneWatch function can be affected by weather,
lighting (including headlights and low sun angle),
ambient darkness, camera condition, and loading.
The LaneWatch may not provide the intended display
of traffic to the side and rear under the following
conditions:
•Your vehicle’s suspension has been altered,
changing the height of the vehicle.
•Your tires are over or under inflated.
•Your tires or wheels are of varied size or
construction.
3
WARNING
Failure to visually confirm that it is safe to
change lanes before doing so may result in
a crash and serious injury or death.
Do not rely only on LaneWatch while
driving.
Always look in your mirrors, to either side
of your vehicle, and behind you for other
vehicles before changing lanes.
The system activates when you: The passenger side view
display appears on the
audio/information
screen.
Move the turn
signal lever to the
passenger side. Press the
LaneWatch
button.
The system deactivates when you:
Pull the turn signal
lever back.
Press the LaneWatch
button again.
Camera
Audio/Information Screen
* Not available on all models
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 370 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
371
uuWhen DrivinguLaneWatchTM*
Driving
■Customizing the LaneWatch settings
You can customize the following items using the audio/information screen.
•Show with Turn Signal: Selects whether LaneWatch monitor comes on when
you operate the turn signal light lever.
•Display Time after Turn Signal Off: Changes the remaining LaneWatch
display time after you pull the turn signal lever back.
•Reference Line: Selects whether the reference lines appear on the LaneWatch
monitor.
•Next Maneuver Pop up*: Selects whether a turn direction screen of the
navigation system interrupts the LaneWatch display.
•Display: Adjusts display settings.
2Customized Features P. 252
■Reference Lines
Three lines that appear on the screen can give
an idea of how far the vehicles or objects on
the screen are from your vehicle, respectively.
If an object is near line 1 (in red), it indicates
that it is close to your vehicle whereas an
object near line 3 farther away.
1LaneWatchTM*
The LaneWatch camera view is restricted. Its unique
lens makes objects on the screen slightly look
different from what they are.
LaneWatch display does not come on when the shift
lever is in (R.
For proper LaneWatch operation:
•
The camera is located in the passenger side door
mirror. Always keep this area clean. If the camera lens
is covered with dirt or moisture, use a soft, moist cloth
to keep the lens clean and free of debris.
•Do not cover the camera lens with labels or stickers
of any kind.
•Do not touch the camera lens.
1Reference Lines
The area around the reference line 1 (red) is very close to
your vehicle. As always, make sure to visually confirm
the safety of a lane change before changing lanes.
The distance between your vehicle and lines 1, 2 and
3 on the screen vary depending on road conditions
and vehicle loading. For example, the reference lines
on the screen may seem to appear closer than the
actual distances when the rear of your vehicle is more
heavily loaded.
Consult a dealer if:
•The passenger side door mirror, or area around it is
severely impacted, resulting in changing the
camera angle.
•The LaneWatch display does not come on at all.
* Not available on all models
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 371 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
372
uuWhen DrivinguReal Time AWD with Intelligent Control SystemTM*
Driving
Real Time AWD with Intelligent Control SystemTM*
Your vehicle is equipped with the AWD system. When the system senses a loss of
front wheel traction, it automatically transfers some power to the rear wheels. This
allows you to utilize all available traction and may increase mobility.
You still need to exercise the same care when accelerating, steering, and braking
that you would in a two wheel drive vehicle.
If you excessively spin all four wheels and overheat the AWD system, only the front
wheels receive power. Stop until the system cools down.
1Real Time AWD with Intelligent Control SystemTM*
NOTICE
Do not continuously spin the front tires of your
vehicle. Continuously spinning the front tires can
cause transmission or rear differential damage.
The AWD system may not function properly if tire
type and size are mixed. Make sure to use the same
size and type of tire, and the air pressures as
specified.
2Tire and Wheel Replacement P. 430
* Not available on all models
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 372 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
373
uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Continued
Driving
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Instead of directly measuring the pressure in each tire, the TPMS on this vehicle
monitors and compares the rolling radius and rotational characteristics of each
wheel and tire while you are driving to determine if one or more tires are
significantly under-inflated. This will cause the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator to
come on.
You must start TPMS calibration every time you:
•Adjust the pressure in one or more tires.
•Rotate the tires.
•Replace one or more tires.
Before calibrating the TPMS:
•Set the cold tire pressure in all four tires.
2Checking Tires P. 423
Make sure:
•The vehicle is at a complete stop.
•
The shift lever is in (N.
•
The shift lever is in (P.
•
The ignition switch is in ON (w*1.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.
■TPMS Calibration
U.S. models only
1Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
The system does not monitor the tires when driving
at low speed.
Conditions such as low ambient temperature and
altitude change directly affect tire pressure and can
trigger the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator to come
on.
Tire pressure checked and inflated in:
•Warm weather can become under-inflated in
colder weather.
•Cold weather can become over-inflated in warmer
weather.
The low tire pressure/TPMS indicator will not come
on as a result of over inflation.
The TPMS may not function properly if tire type and
size are mixed. Make sure to use the same size and
type of tire.
2Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 423
The low tire pressure/TPMS indicator may come on
with a delay or may not come on at all when:
•You rapidly accelerate, decelerate, or turn the
steering wheel.
•You drive on snowy or slippery roads.
•Snow chains are used.
The low tire pressure/TPMS indicator may come on
under the following conditions:
•A compact spare tire is used.
•There is a heavier and uneven load on the tires than
the condition at calibration.
•Snow chains are used.
Manual transmission models
Continuously variable transmission models
All models
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 373 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
374
Driving
Press and hold the TPMS button until the low
tire pressure/TPMS indicator blinks twice,
indicating the calibration process has begun.
•If the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator does
not blink, confirm the above conditions
then press and hold the TPMS button again.
•The calibration process finishes
automatically.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.
1TPMS Calibration
•TPMS cannot be calibrated if a compact spare tire is
installed.
•The calibration process requires approximately 30
minutes of cumulative driving at speeds between
30-60 mph (48-97 km/h).
•During this period, if the ignition is turned on*1 and
the vehicle is not moved within 45 seconds, you
may notice the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator
comes on briefly. This is normal and indicates that
the calibration process is not yet complete.
If the snow chains are installed, remove them before
calibrating the TPMS.
If the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator comes on even
when the properly inflated specified regular tires are
installed, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
We recommend that the tires be replaced with the
same brand, model, and size as the originals. Ask a
dealer for details.
TPMS Button
Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 374 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
375
uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) - Required Federal Explanation
Continued
Driving
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) - Required
Federal Explanation
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked
monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure
recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard
or tire inflation pressure label.
(If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should
determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with
a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low
tire pressure telltale
when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you
should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate
them to the proper pressure.
Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces
fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s
handling and stopping ability.
U.S. models
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 375 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
376
uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) - Required Federal Explanation
Driving
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the
level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction
indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly.
The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire
pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the
telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain
continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon
subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may
not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including
the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the
vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly.
Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or
more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to
continue to function properly.
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 376 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
377
Continued
Driving
Braking
Brake System
Use the parking brake to keep the vehicle stationary when parked. When the
parking brake is applied, you can manually or automatically release it.
■To apply
The electric parking brake can be applied any
time the vehicle has battery, no matter which
position the ignition switch*1 is in.
Pull the electric parking brake switch up gently
and securely.
uThe electric parking brake indicator
comes on.
■To release
The vehicle must be ON (w*1 in order to
release the electric parking brake.
1. Depress the brake pedal.
2. Press the electric parking brake switch.
uThe electric parking brake indicator goes
off.
Manually releasing the parking brake using
the switch helps your vehicle start slowly and
smoothly when facing downhill on steep hills.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.
■Parking Brake
1Parking Brake
You may hear the electric parking brake system
operating from the rear wheel area when you apply
or release the parking brake, or turn the ignition
switch to LOCK (0*1. This is normal.
The brake pedal may slightly move due to the electric
parking brake system operation when you apply or
release the parking brake. This is normal.
You cannot apply or release the parking brake if the
battery goes dead.
2Jump Starting P. 460
If you pull up and hold the electric parking brake
switch while driving, the brakes on all four
wheels are applied by the VSA system until the
vehicle come to a stop. The electric parking
brake then applies, and the switch should be
released.
In the following situations, the parking brake
automatically operates.
•When the vehicle stops with the automatic brake
hold system activated for more than 10 minutes.
•When the driver’s seat belt is unfastened while
your vehicle is stopped and the brake hold system
is applied.
•When the engine is turned off while the brake hold
system is applied.
Electric Parking
Brake Switch
Electric Parking
Brake Switch
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 377 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
uuBrakinguBrake System
378
Driving
■To release automatically
Use the accelerator pedal to release the brake when you are starting the vehicle
facing uphill, or in a traffic jam.
Depressing the accelerator pedal releases the parking brake.
Depressing the accelerator pedal while releasing the clutch pedal releases the
parking brake.
Gently depress the accelerator pedal.
uThe electric parking brake indicator goes
off.
Gently depress the accelerator pedal and
release the clutch pedal.
uThe electric parking brake indicator goes
off.
1Parking Brake
If the parking brake cannot be released
automatically, release it manually.
The parking brake cannot be released automatically
while the following indicators are on:
•Malfunction indicator lamp
•Transmission indicator
The parking brake may not be released automatically
while the following indicators are on:
•Electric parking brake system indicator
•VSA® system indicator
•ABS indicator
•Supplemental restraint system indicator
The clutch pedal must be fully depressed before
gently depressing the accelerator pedal and releasing
the clutch pedal.
Manual transmission models
Continuously variable transmission models
Manual transmission models
Accelerator Pedal
Continuously variable transmission models
Accelerator Pedal
Clutch Pedal
Manual transmission models
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 378 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
Continued 379
uuBrakinguBrake System
Driving
The parking brake automatically releases as you depress the accelerator pedal when:
•You are wearing the driver’s seat belt.
•The engine is running.
•The transmission is not in (P or (N.
•The transmission is not in (N.
Your vehicle is equipped with disc brakes at all four wheels. A vacuum power assist
helps to reduce the effort needed on the brake pedal. The brake assist system
increases the stopping force when you depress the brake pedal hard in an
emergency situation. The anti-lock brake system (ABS) helps you retain steering
control when braking very hard.
2Brake Assist System P. 384
2Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) P. 383
■Foot Brake
Continuously variable transmission models
Manual transmission models
1Foot Brake
Check the brakes after driving through deep water,
or if there is a buildup of road surface water. If
necessary, dry the brakes by lightly depressing the
pedal several times.
If you hear a continuous metallic friction sound when
applying the brakes, this is caused by the brake wear
indicator rubbing on the brake rotor and indicates
that the brake pads need to be replaced. Have the
vehicle checked by a dealer. If you hear only an
occasional squeak or squeal when you initially apply
the brake pedal, this may be normal and caused by
high frequency vibration of the brake pads against
the rotating brake disc.
Constantly using the brake pedal while going down a
long hill builds up heat, which reduces the brake
effectiveness. Apply engine braking by taking your
foot off the accelerator pedal and downshifting to a
lower gear/speed position. With manual transmission
use a lower gear for greater engine braking.
Do not rest your foot on the brake pedal while
driving, as it will lightly apply the brakes and cause
them to lose effectiveness over time and reduce pad
life. It will also confuse drivers behind you.
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 379 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
uuBrakinguBrake System
380
Driving
Keeps the brake applied after releasing the brake pedal until the accelerator pedal is
pressed. You can use this system while the vehicle is temporarily stopped, like at
traffic lights and in heavy traffic.
■Automatic Brake Hold
1Automatic Brake Hold
3
WARNING
Activating the automatic brake hold system
on steep hills or slippery roads may still
allow the vehicle to move if you remove
your foot from the brake pedal.
If a vehicle unexpectedly moves, it may
cause a crash resulting in serious injury or
death.
Never activate the automatic brake hold
system or rely on it to keep a vehicle from
moving when stopped on a steep hill or
slippery roads.
3
WARNING
Using the automatic brake hold system to
park the vehicle may result in the vehicle
unexpectedly moving.
If a vehicle moves unexpectedly, it may
cause a crash, resulting in serious injury or
death.
Never leave the vehicle when braking is
temporarily kept by automatic brake hold
and always park the vehicle by putting the
transmission in (P and applying the parking
brake.
Continuously variable transmission models
■Turning on the system
Fasten your seat belt
properly, then start the
engine. Press the
automatic brake hold
button.
●The automatic brake
hold system indicator
comes on. The system
is turned on.
■Activating the system
Depress the brake pedal
to come to a complete
stop. The shift lever must
be in other than (P or (R.
●The automatic brake
hold indicator comes
on. Braking is kept for
up to 10 minutes.
●Release the brake pedal
after the automatic
brake hold indicator
comes on.
■Canceling the system
Depress the accelerator
pedal while the shift
lever is in other than (P
or (N. The system is
canceled and the vehicle
starts to move.
●The automatic brake
hold indicator goes
off. The system
releases the brake
automatically.
Accelerator PedalBrake PedalAutomatic Brake
Hold Button
Goes
Off
Comes
On
On On
Comes
On
Comes
On
U.S.
Canada
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 380 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
381
uuBrakinguBrake System
Continued
Driving
Keeps the brake applied after releasing the brake pedal until you change a gear to a
position other than (N and:
•Release the clutch pedal on a level road or when facing downhill.
•Release the clutch pedal and depress the accelerator pedal when facing uphill.
You can use this system while the vehicle is temporarily stopped, like at traffic lights
and in heavy traffic.
Manual transmission models
■Turning on the system
Fasten your seat belt
properly, then start the
engine. Press the
automatic brake hold
button.
●The automatic brake
hold system indicator
comes on. The system
is turned on.
■Activating the system
Depress the brake pedal
to come to a complete
stop.
●The automatic brake
hold indicator comes
on. Braking is kept for
up to 10 minutes.
●Release the brake pedal
after the automatic
brake hold indicator
comes on.
■Canceling the system
Shift into one of the
gears other than (N and:
●Release the clutch
pedal on a level road
or when facing
downhill.
●Release the clutch
pedal and depress the
accelerator pedal
when facing uphill.
The system is canceled
and the vehicle starts to
move.
●
The automatic brake
hold indicator goes off.
The system releases the
brake automatically.
Accelerator Pedal
Brake Pedal
Automatic Brake
Hold Button
Goes
Off
Comes
On
On
On
Comes
On
Comes
On
U.S.
Canada
Clutch Pedal
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 381 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
uuBrakinguBrake System
382
Driving
■The system automatically cancels when:
•You engage the parking brake.
•You depress the brake pedal and move the shift lever to (P or (R.
■The system automatically cancels and the parking brake is applied when:
•Braking is kept for more than 10 minutes.
•The driver’s seat belt is unfastened.
•The engine is turned off.
•There is a problem with automatic brake hold system.
•The engine stalls.
■Turning off the automatic brake hold system
While the system is on, press the automatic
brake hold button again.
uThe automatic brake hold system
indicator goes off.
If you want to turn off automatic brake hold
while the system is in operation, press the
automatic brake hold button with the brake
pedal depressed.
1Automatic Brake Hold
While the system is activated, you can turn off the
engine or park the vehicle through the same
procedure as you normally do.
2When Stopped P. 385
Whether the system is on, or the system is activated,
the automatic brake hold turns off once the engine is
off.
The system turns off if the engine stalls while
automatic brake hold is active or the system is on.
Manual transmission models
Continuously variable transmission models
Manual transmission models
1Turning on the system
Make sure to turn off the automatic brake hold
system before using an automated car wash.
You may hear an operating noise if the vehicle moves
while the automatic brake hold system is in
operation. The system generates sound while holding
the vehicle and it moves.
Automatic Brake
Hold Button
Goes
Off
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 382 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
383
uuBrakinguAnti-lock Brake System (ABS)
Driving
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)
Helps prevent the wheels from locking up, and helps you retain steering control by
pumping the brakes rapidly, much faster than you.
The electronic brake distribution (EBD) system, which is part of the ABS, also
balances the front-to-rear braking distribution according to vehicle loading.
You should never pump the brake pedal. Let the ABS work for you by always
keeping firm, steady pressure on the brake pedal. This is sometimes referred to as
“stomp and steer.”
■ABS operation
The brake pedal may pulsate slightly when the ABS is working. Keep holding the
pedal firmly down. On dry pavement, you will need to press on the brake pedal very
hard before the ABS activates. However, you may feel the ABS activate immediately
if you are trying to stop on snow or ice.
ABS may activate when you depress the brake pedal when driving on:
•Wet or snow covered roads.
•Roads paved with stone.
•Roads with uneven surfaces, such as potholes, cracks, manholes, etc.
When the vehicle speed goes under 6 mph (10 km/h), the ABS stops.
■ABS
1Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)
NOTICE
The ABS may not function correctly if you use a tire of
the wrong size or type.
If the ABS indicator comes on while driving, there
may be a problem with the system.
While normal braking will not be affected, there is a
possibility that the ABS will not operating. Have your
vehicle checked by a dealer immediately.
The ABS is not designed for the purpose of reducing
the time or distance it takes for a vehicle to stop: It is
designed to limit brake lockup which can lead to
skidding and loss of steering control.
In the following cases, your vehicle may need more
distance to stop than a vehicle without the ABS:
•You are driving on rough or uneven road surfaces,
such as gravel or snow.
•The tires are equipped with snow chains.
The following may be observed with the ABS system:
•Motor sounds coming from the engine
compartment when the brakes are applied, or
when system checks are being performed after the
engine has been started and while vehicle is
accelerates.
•Brake pedal and/or the vehicle body vibration when
ABS activates.
These vibrations and sounds are normal to ABS
systems and are no cause for concern.
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 383 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
384
uuBrakinguBrake Assist System
Driving
Brake Assist System
Designed to assist the driver by generating greater braking force when you depress
the brake pedal hard during emergency braking.
■Brake assist system operation
Press the brake pedal firmly for more powerful braking.
When brake assist operates, the pedal may wiggle slightly and an operating noise
may be heard. This is normal. Keep holding the brake pedal firmly down.
■Brake Assist System
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 384 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
385
Driving
Parking Your Vehicle
When Stopped
1. Depress the brake pedal firmly.
2. With the brake pedal depressed, pull up the electric parking brake switch slowly,
but fully.
3. Move the shift lever from (D to (P.
3. Move the shift lever to (R or (1.
4. Turn off the engine.
uThe electric parking brake indicator goes off in about 15 seconds.
Always confirm the electric parking brake is set, in particular if you are parked on an
incline.
1Parking Your Vehicle
Do not park your vehicle near flammable objects,
such as dry grass, oil, or timber.
Heat from the exhaust can cause a fire.
1When Stopped
NOTICE
The following can damage the transmission:
•Depressing the accelerator and brake pedals
simultaneously.
•Holding the vehicle in place when facing uphill by
depressing the accelerator pedal.
•Moving the shift lever into (P before the vehicle
stops completely.
In extremely cold temperatures, the parking brake
may freeze up if applied. If such temperatures are
expected, do not apply the parking brake but, if
parking on a slope, either turn the front wheels so
they will contact the curb if the vehicle rolls down the
slope or block the wheels to keep the vehicle from
moving. If you do not take either precaution, the
vehicle may roll unexpectedly, leading to a crash.
Continuously variable transmission models
Continuously variable transmission models
Manual transmission models
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 385 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
386
Driving
Multi-View Rear Camera
About Your Multi-View Rear Camera
The audio/information screen can display your vehicle’s rear view.
The display automatically changes to a rear view when the transmission is put into
(R.
■Multi-View Rear Camera Display Area
1About Your Multi-View Rear Camera
The rear camera view is restricted. You cannot see
the corner ends of the bumper or what is underneath
the bumper. Its unique lens also makes objects
appear closer or farther than they actually are.
Visually confirm that it is safe to drive before backing
up. Certain conditions (such as weather, lighting, and
high temperatures) may also restrict the rear view. Do
not rely on the rearview display which does not give
you all information about conditions at the back of
your vehicle.
If the camera lens is covered with dirt or moisture,
use a soft, moist cloth to keep the lens clean and free
of debris.
You can change the Fixed Guideline and Dynamic
Guideline settings.
2Customized Features P. 259
Fixed Guideline
On: Guidelines appear when you put the
transmission into (R.
Off: Guidelines do not appear.
Dynamic Guideline
On: Guidelines move according to the steering wheel
direction.
Off: Guidelines do not move.
Models with display audio system
Guidelines
Bumper
Wide View Mode
Normal View Mode
Top Down View Mode
Camera
Approx. 20 inches (50 cm)
Approx. 39 inches (1 m)
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 386 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
387
uuMulti-View Rear CamerauAbout Your Multi-View Rear Camera
Driving
You can view three different camera angles on the rearview display.
Press the LIST/SELECT (selector) knob to switch the angle.
Touch the appropriate icon to switch the angle.
: Wide view
: Normal view
: Top down view
•If the last used viewing mode was Wide or Normal, the same mode is selected the
next time you put the transmission into (R.
•If Top down view was last used before you turned off the engine, Wide View
mode is selected next time you turn the ignition switch to ON (w*1 and put the
transmission into (R.
•If Top down view was last used more than 10 seconds after you put the
transmission from (R, Wide View mode is selected the next time you put the
transmission into (R.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.
Models with color audio system
Models with display audio system
All models
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 387 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
388
Driving
Refueling
Fuel Information
■Fuel recommendation
Use of lower octane gasoline can cause a persistent, heavy metallic knocking noise
that can lead to engine damage.
■Top tier detergent gasoline
Because the level of detergency and additives in gasoline vary in the market, Honda
endorses the use of “TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline” where available to help
maintain the performance and reliability of your vehicle. TOP TIER Detergent
Gasoline meets a new gasoline standard jointly established by leading automotive
manufacturers to meet the needs of today’s advanced engines.
Qualifying gasoline retailers will, in most cases, identify their gasoline as having met
“TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline” standards at the retail location. This fuel is
guaranteed to contain the proper level of detergent additives and be free of metallic
additives. The proper level of detergent additives, and absence of harmful metallic
additives in gasoline, help avoid build-up of deposits in your engine and emission
control system.
For further important fuel-related information for your vehicle, or on information on
gasoline that does not contain MMT, visit www.hondacars.com. In Canada, visit
www.honda.ca for additional information on gasoline. For more information on top
tier gasoline, visit www.toptiergas.com.
■Fuel tank capacity: 13.2 US gal (50 liters)
Unleaded gasoline, pump octane number 87 or higher
1Fuel Information
NOTICE
We recommend quality gasoline containing
detergent additives that help prevent fuel system and
engine deposits. In addition, in order to maintain
good performance, fuel economy, and emissions
control, we strongly recommend the use of gasoline
that does NOT contain harmful manganese-based
fuel additives such as MMT, if such gasoline is
available.
Use of gasoline with these additives may adversely
affect performance, and cause the malfunction
indicator lamp on your instrument panel to come on.
If this happens, contact a dealer for service.
Some gasoline today is blended with oxygenates such
as ethanol. Your vehicle is designed to operate on
oxygenated gasoline containing up to 15% ethanol
by volume. Do not use gasoline containing methanol.
If you notice any undesirable operating symptoms, try
another service station or switch to another brand of
gasoline.
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 388 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
389
uuRefuelinguHow to Refuel
Driving
How to Refuel
1. Stop your vehicle with the service station
pump on the left side of the vehicle in the
rear.
2. Turn off the engine.
3. Pull on the fuel fill door release handle
under the driver’s side lower outside corner
of the dashboard.
uThe fuel fill door opens.
4. Remove the fuel fill cap slowly. If you hear a
release of air, wait until this stops, then turn
the knob slowly to open the fuel fill cap.
5. Place the fuel fill cap in the holder.
6. Insert the fuel filler nozzle fully.
uWhen the tank is full, the filler nozzle will
click off automatically. This leaves space
in the fuel tank in case the fuel expands
with a change in the temperature.
7. After filling, replace the fuel fill cap,
tightening it until you hear it click at least
once.
uShut the fuel fill door by hand.
1How to Refuel
The filler nozzle automatically stops to leave space in
the fuel tank so that fuel does not overflow as a result
of changes in air temperature.
If the filler nozzle keeps turning off when the tank is
not full, there may be a problem with the pump’s fuel
vapor recovery system. Try filling at another pump. If
this does not fix the problem, consult a dealer.
Do not continue to add fuel after the filler nozzle has
automatically stopped. Additional fuel can exceed
the full tank capacity.
3
WARNING
Gasoline is highly flammable and explosive.
You can be burned or seriously injured
when handling fuel.
•Stop the engine, and keep heat, sparks,
and flame away.
•Handle fuel only outdoors.
•Wipe up spills immediately.
Fuel Fill Door
Release Handle
Pull
Cap
Cap
Holder
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 389 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
390
Driving
Fuel Economy and CO2 Emissions
Improving Fuel Economy and Reducing CO2
Emissions
Achieving fuel economy and reducing CO2 emissions is dependent on several
factors, including driving conditions, load weight, idling time, driving habits, and
vehicle condition. Depending on these and other factors, you may not achieve the
rated fuel economy of this vehicle.
You can optimize your fuel economy with proper maintenance of your vehicle.
Always maintain your vehicle in accordance with the messages displayed on the
information display.
•Use the recommended viscosity engine oil, displaying the API Certification Seal.
•Maintain the specified tire pressure.
•Do not load the vehicle with excess cargo.
•Keep your vehicle clean. A buildup of snow or mud on your vehicle’s underside
adds weight and increases wind resistance.
■Maintenance and Fuel Economy
1Improving Fuel Economy and Reducing CO2 Emissions
Direct calculation is the recommended method to
determine actual fuel consumed while driving.
In Canada, posted fuel economy numbers are
established following a simulated test. For more
information on how this test is performed, please visit
http://oee.nrcan.gc.ca/
Miles driven Gallons of
fuel
Miles per
Gallon
100 Liter Kilometers L per 100 km
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 390 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
391
Maintenance
This chapter discusses basic maintenance.
Before Performing Maintenance
Inspection and Maintenance ............ 392
Safety When Performing Maintenance .... 393
Parts and Fluids Used in Maintenance
Service ........................................... 394
Maintenance MinderTM ..................... 395
Maintenance Under the Hood
Maintenance Items Under the Hood .... 399
Opening the Hood ........................... 400
Recommended Engine Oil ................ 401
Oil Check......................................... 402
Adding Engine Oil............................ 403
Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter..... 404
Engine Coolant................................ 406
Transmission Fluid............................ 408
Brake/Clutch* Fluid.......................... 409
Refilling Window Washer Fluid......... 410
Replacing Light Bulbs ....................... 411
Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades
....419
Checking and Maintaining Tires
Checking Tires ................................. 423
Tire and Loading Information Label .. 425
Tire Labeling .................................... 425
DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles).. 427
Wear Indicators................................ 429
Tire Service Life................................ 429
Tire and Wheel Replacement ........... 430
Tire Rotation.................................... 431
Winter Tires ..................................... 432
Battery............................................... 433
Remote Transmitter Care
Replacing the Button Battery ........... 435
Heating and Cooling System*/Climate
Control System* Maintenance....... 437
Cleaning
Interior Care .................................... 438
Exterior Care.................................... 440
Accessories and Modifications ........ 443
* Not available on all models
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 391 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
392
Maintenance
Before Performing Maintenance
Inspection and Maintenance
For your safety, perform all listed inspections and maintenance to keep your vehicle
in good condition. If you become aware of any abnormality (noise, smell, insufficient
brake fluid, oil residue on the ground, etc.), have your vehicle inspected by a dealer.
(Note, however, that service at a dealer is not mandatory to keep your warranties in
effect.)
■Daily inspections
Perform inspections before long distance trips, when washing the vehicle, or when
refueling.
■Periodic inspections
•Check the brake/clutch* fluid level monthly.
2Brake/Clutch* Fluid P. 409
•Check the tire pressure monthly. Examine the tread for wear and foreign objects.
2Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 423
•Check the operation of the exterior lights monthly.
2Replacing Light Bulbs P. 411
•Check the condition of the wiper blades at least every six months.
2Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades P. 419
■Types of Inspection and Maintenance
1Inspection and Maintenance
Maintenance, replacement, or repair of
emissions control devices and systems may be
done by any automotive repair establishment or
individuals using parts that are “certified” to
EPA standards.
According to state and federal regulations, failure to
perform maintenance on the maintenance main
items marked with # will not void your emissions
warranties. However, all maintenance services should
be performed in accordance with the intervals
indicated by the information display.
2Maintenance Service Items P. 397
If you want to perform complex maintenance tasks
that require more skills and tools, you can purchase a
subscription to the Service Express website at
www.techinfo.honda.com.
2Authorized Manuals P. 489
If you want to perform maintenance yourself, make
sure that you have the necessary tools and skills first.
After performing maintenance, update the records in
the separate maintenance booklet.
U.S. models
* Not available on all models
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 392 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
393
uuBefore Performing MaintenanceuSafety When Performing Maintenance
Maintenance
Safety When Performing Maintenance
Some of the most important safety precautions are given here.
However, we cannot warn you of every conceivable hazard that can arise in
performing maintenance. Only you can decide whether you should perform a given
task.
•To reduce the possibility of fire or explosion, keep cigarettes, sparks, and flames
away from the battery and all fuel related parts.
•Never leave rags, towels, or other flammable objects under the hood.
uHeat from the engine and exhaust can ignite them, causing a fire.
•To clean parts, use a commercially available degreaser or parts cleaner, not
gasoline.
•Wear eye protection and protective clothing when working with the battery or
compressed air.
•Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide, which is poisonous and can kill you.
uOnly operate the engine if there is sufficient ventilation.
•The vehicle must be in a stationary condition.
uMake sure your vehicle is parked on level ground, the parking brake is set, and
the engine is off.
•Be aware that hot parts can burn you.
uMake sure to let the engine and exhaust system cool thoroughly before
touching vehicle parts.
•Be aware that moving parts can injure you.
uDo not start the engine unless instructed, and keep your hands and limbs away
from moving parts.
■Maintenance Safety
■Vehicle Safety
1Safety When Performing Maintenance
3
WARNING
Improperly maintaining this vehicle or
failing to correct a problem before driving
can cause a crash in which you can be
seriously hurt or killed.
Always follow the inspection and
maintenance recommendations according
to the schedules in this owner’s manual.
3
WARNING
Failure to properly follow maintenance
instructions and precautions can cause you
to be seriously hurt or killed.
Always follow the procedures and
precautions in this owner’s manual.
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 393 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
394
uuBefore Performing MaintenanceuParts and Fluids Used in Maintenance Service
Maintenance
Parts and Fluids Used in Maintenance Service
The use of Honda genuine parts and fluids is recommended when maintaining and
servicing your vehicle. Honda genuine parts are manufactured according to the
same high quality standards used in Honda vehicles.
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 394 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
395
Continued
Maintenance
Maintenance MinderTM
If the engine oil life is less than 15%, you will see the Maintenance Minder messages
appear on the information display every time you turn the ignition switch to ON
(w*1. The messages notify you when to change the engine oil, or when to bring your
vehicle to a dealer for indicated maintenance services.
To Use Maintenance MinderTM
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (w*1.
2. Press the (select/reset) knob repeatedly
until the engine oil life appears on the
information display.
The Maintenance Minder indicator ( ) stays
on in the instrument panel after the engine oil
life becomes 0%. Have the indicated
maintenance done by a dealer immediately.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.
■Displaying the Engine Oil Life
1Displaying the Engine Oil Life
Based on the engine operating conditions, the
remaining engine oil life is calculated and displayed
as a percentage.
Displayed Engine Oil
Life (%)
Calculated Engine Oil
Life (%)
100 100 to 91
90 90 to 81
80 80 to 71
70 70 to 61
60 60 to 51
50 50 to 41
40 40 to 31
30 30 to 21
20 20 to 16
15 15 to 11
10 10 to 6
55 to 1
00
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 395 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
396
uuMaintenance MinderTMuTo Use Maintenance MinderTM
Maintenance
To switch the display, press the (select/reset) knob.
■
Maintenance Minder Messages on the Information Display
Oil Life Display Explanation Information Maintenance Minder Indicator
The engine oil life indicator starts
to appear along with other due
soon maintenance item codes
when the remaining oil life
becomes 15 percent.
The engine oil is approaching the
end of its service life.
Starts to come on when the
remaining engine oil life becomes
15 percent.
It goes off when the display is
switched.
The SERVICE message also starts
to appear along with the engine oil
life indicator and the maintenance
item codes.
The engine oil has almost reached
the end of its service life, and the
maintenance items should be
inspected and serviced as soon as
possible.
The remaining engine oil life has
passed its service life, and a
negative distance appears after
driving over 10 miles (U.S. models)
or 10 km (Canadian models). The
negative distance on the display
blinks.
The engine oil life has passed.
The maintenance items must be
inspected and serviced
immediately. Stays on as a reminder even when
the display is switched.
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 396 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
397
uuMaintenance MinderTM uTo Use Maintenance MinderTM
Continued
Maintenance
■Maintenance Service Items
1Maintenance Service Items
•Independent of the Maintenance Minder
information, replace the brake fluid every 3 years.
•Adjust the valves during services A, B, 1, 2, or 3 if
they are noisy.
Maintenance Minder MessageMaintenance
Minder Indicator
Sub Items
Main Item
*1: If a message SERVICE does not appear more than 12 months after the display is reset, change the
engine oil every year.
# : See information on maintenance and emissions warranty.
CODE Maintenance Main Items
A●Replace engine oil*1
B●Replace engine oil*1 and oil filter
●Inspect front and rear brakes
●Inspect tie rod ends, steering gearbox, and boots
●Inspect suspension components
●Inspect driveshaft boots
●Inspect brake hoses and lines (Including ABS/VSA)
●Inspect all fluid levels and condition of fluids
●Inspect exhaust system#
●Inspect fuel lines and connections#
*2: If you drive in dusty conditions, replace the air cleaner element every 15,000 miles (24,000 km).
*3: If you drive primarily in urban areas that have high concentrations of soot in the air from industry and
from diesel-powered vehicles, replace the dust and pollen filter every 15,000 miles (24,000 km).
*4: Driving in mountainous areas at very low vehicle speeds results in higher transmission temperatures.
This requires transmission fluid changes more frequently than recommended by the Maintenance
Minder. If you regularly drive your vehicle under these conditions, have the transmission fluid changed
every 25,000 miles (40,000 km).
CODE Maintenance Sub Items
1●Rotate tires
2●Replace air cleaner element*2
●Replace dust and pollen filter*3
●Inspect drive belt
3●Replace transmission fluid*4
4●Replace spark plugs
●Inspect valve clearance
5●Replace engine coolant
6●Replace rear differential fluid*
Continuously variable transmission models only
* Not available on all models
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 397 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
uuMaintenance MinderTMuTo Use Maintenance MinderTM
398
Maintenance
Reset the engine oil life display if you have performed the maintenance service.
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (w*1.
2. Display the engine oil life by repeatedly
pressing the (select/reset) knob.
3. Press and hold the knob for 10 seconds
or more.
uThe engine oil life indicator and the
maintenance item codes blink.
4. Press the knob for five seconds or more.
uThe displayed maintenance items
disappear, and the engine oil life display
returns to 100%.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.
■Resetting the Display
1Resetting the Display
NOTICE
Failure to reset the engine oil life after a maintenance
service results in the system showing incorrect
maintenance intervals, which can lead to serious
mechanical problems.
The dealer will reset the engine oil life display after
completing the required maintenance service. If
someone other than a dealer performs maintenance
service, reset the engine oil life display yourself.
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 398 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
399
Maintenance
Maintenance Under the Hood
Maintenance Items Under the Hood
Brake/Clutch* Fluid
(Black Cap)
Engine Coolant Reserve Tank
Radiator Cap
Washer Fluid
(Blue Cap)
Engine Oil Dipstick
(Orange)
Engine Oil Fill Cap
Battery
* Not available on all models
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 399 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
400
uuMaintenance Under the HooduOpening the Hood
Maintenance
Opening the Hood
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface, and set
the parking brake.
2. Pull the hood release handle under the
driver’s side lower corner of the dashboard.
uThe hood will pop up slightly.
3. Push the hood latch lever (located under
the front edge of the hood to the center) to
the side and raise the hood. Once you have
raised the hood slightly, you can release the
lever.
4. Remove the support rod from the clamp
using the grip. Mount the support rod in
the hood.
When closing, remove the support rod, and
stow it in the clamp, then gently lower the
hood. Remove your hand at a height of
approximately 12 inches (30 cm) and let the
hood close.
1Opening the Hood
NOTICE
Do not open the hood when the wiper arms are
raised.
The hood will strike the wipers, and may damage
either the hood or the wipers.
When closing the hood, check that the hood is
securely latched.
If the hood latch lever moves stiffly, or if you can
open the hood without lifting the lever, the latch
mechanism should be cleaned and lubricated.
Hood Release Handle
Lever
Support Rod
Grip
Clamp
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 400 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
401
uuMaintenance Under the HooduRecommended Engine Oil
Maintenance
Recommended Engine Oil
Oil is a major contributor to your engine’s
performance and longevity. If you drive the
vehicle with insufficient or deteriorated oil,
the engine may fail or be damaged.
This seal indicates the oil is energy conserving
and that it meets the American Petroleum
Institute’s latest requirements.
Use a Genuine Honda Motor Oil or another
commercial engine oil of suitable viscosity for
the ambient temperature as shown.
■Synthetic oil
You may also use synthetic motor oil if it is labeled with the API Certification Seal
and is the specified viscosity grade.
•Genuine Honda Motor Oil
•Premium-grade 0W-20 detergent oil with an API Certification Seal on the
container.
1Recommended Engine Oil
Engine Oil Additives
Your vehicle does not require oil additives. In fact,
they may adversely affect the engine performance
and durability.
0W-20
Ambient Temperature
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 401 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
402
uuMaintenance Under the HooduOil Check
Maintenance
Oil Check
We recommend that you check the engine oil level every time you refuel.
Park the vehicle on level ground.
Wait approximately three minutes after turning the engine off before you check the
oil.
1. Remove the dipstick (orange).
2. Wipe the dipstick with a clean cloth or
paper towel.
3. Insert the dipstick back all the way into its
hole.
4. Remove the dipstick again, and check the
level. It should be between the upper and
lower marks. Add oil if necessary.
1Oil Check
If the oil level is near or below the lower mark, slowly
add oil, being careful not to overfill.
Upper Mark
Lower Mark
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 402 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
403
uuMaintenance Under the HooduAdding Engine Oil
Maintenance
Adding Engine Oil
1. Unscrew and remove the engine oil fill cap.
2. Add oil slowly.
3. Reinstall the engine oil fill cap, and tighten
it securely.
4. Wait for three minutes and recheck the
engine oil dipstick.
1Adding Engine Oil
NOTICE
Do not fill the engine oil above the upper mark.
Overfilling the engine oil can result in leaks and
engine damage.
If any oil spills, wipe it away immediately. Spilled oil
may damage the engine compartment components.
Engine Oil Fill Cap
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 403 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
404
uuMaintenance Under the HooduChanging the Engine Oil and Oil Filter
Maintenance
Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter
You must change the engine oil and oil filter regularly in order to maintain the
engine’s lubrication. The engine may be damaged if they are not changed regularly.
Change the oil and filter in accordance with the Maintenance Minder message on
the information display.
1. Run the engine until it reaches normal
operating temperature, and then turn the
engine off.
2. Open the hood and remove the engine oil
fill cap.
3. Remove the bolts and clips on the
undercarriage and remove the under
cover.
4. Remove the drain bolt and washer from
the bottom of the engine, and drain the
oil into a suitable container.
1Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter
NOTICE
You may damage the environment if you do not
dispose of the oil in a suitable way. If you are
changing the oil by yourself, appropriately dispose of
the used oil. Put the oil in a sealed container and take
it to a recycling center. Do not throw the oil away
into a garbage can or onto the ground.
Under
Cover
Bolt
Clip
2WD models
Washer
Drain Bolt
All models
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 404 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
405
uuMaintenance Under the HooduChanging the Engine Oil and Oil Filter
Maintenance
5. Remove the oil filter and dispose of the
remaining oil.
6. Check that the filter gasket is not stuck to
the engine contact surface.
uIf it is stuck, you must detach it.
7. Wipe away dirt and dust adhering to the
contact surface of the engine block, and
install a new oil filter.
uApply a light coat of new engine oil to
the filter gasket.
8. Put a new washer on the drain bolt, then
reinstall the drain bolt.
uTightening torque:
30 lbf∙ft (40 N∙m, 4.0 kgf∙m)
9. Pour the recommended engine oil into the
engine.
uEngine oil change capacity (including
filter):
3.9 US qt (3.7 L)
10. Reinstall the engine oil fill cap securely and
start the engine.
11. Run the engine for a few minutes, and
then check that there is no leak from the
drain bolt or oil filter.
12. Stop the engine, wait for three minutes,
and then check the oil level on the
dipstick.
uIf necessary, add more engine oil.
1Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter
You will need a special wrench to replace the oil
filter. You can buy this wrench from a dealer.
When installing the new oil filter, follow the
instructions supplied with the oil filter.
Reinstall the engine oil fill cap. Start the engine. The
low oil pressure indicator should go off within five
seconds. If it does not, turn off the engine, and check
your work.
Oil Filter
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 405 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
406
uuMaintenance Under the HooduEngine Coolant
Maintenance
Engine Coolant
This coolant is premixed with 50% antifreeze and 50% water. Do not add any
straight antifreeze or water.
We recommend you check the engine coolant level every time you refuel. Check the
reserve tank first. If it is completely empty, also check the coolant level in the
radiator. Add the engine coolant accordingly.
1. Make sure the engine and radiator are
cool.
2. Check the amount of coolant in the reserve
tank.
uIf the coolant level is below the MIN
mark, add the specified coolant until it
reaches the MAX mark.
3. Inspect the cooling system for leaks.
Specified coolant: Honda Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2
■Reserve Tank
1Engine Coolant
NOTICE
Genuine Honda engine coolant is a 50/50 mixture of
antifreeze and water that can withstand freezing at
temperatures as low as about -31°F (-35°C). If your
vehicle is consistently subjected to temperatures
below this, the concentration of antifreeze in the
coolant should be increased. Consult a dealer for
details.
If Honda antifreeze/coolant is not available, you may
use another major brand of non-silicate coolant as a
temporary replacement. Check that it is a high quality
coolant recommended for aluminum engines.
Continued use of any non-Honda coolant can result
in corrosion, causing the cooling system to
malfunction or fail. Have the cooling system flushed
and refilled with Honda antifreeze/coolant as soon as
possible.
Do not add rust inhibitors or other additives to your
vehicle’s cooling system. They may not be compatible
with the coolant or with the engine components.
3
WARNING
Removing the radiator cap while the
engine is hot can cause the coolant to spray
out, seriously scalding you.
Always let the engine and radiator cool
down before removing the radiator cap.
Reserve Tank
MAX
MIN
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 406 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
407
uuMaintenance Under the HooduEngine Coolant
Maintenance
1. Make sure the engine and radiator are
cool.
2. Turn the radiator cap 1/8 turn counter-
clockwise and relieve any pressure in the
cooling system. Do not push the cap down
when turning.
3. Push down and turn the radiator cap
counter-clockwise to remove it.
4. The coolant level should be up to the base
of the filler neck. Add coolant if it is low.
5. Put the radiator cap back on, and tighten it
fully.
■Radiator
1Radiator
NOTICE
Pour the fluid slowly and carefully so you do not spill
any. Clean up any spills immediately; they can
damage components in the engine compartment.
Radiator Cap
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 407 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
408
uuMaintenance Under the HooduTransmission Fluid
Maintenance
Transmission Fluid
Have a dealer check the fluid level and replace if necessary.
Have a dealer check the fluid level and replace if necessary.
■Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) Fluid
Specified fluid: Honda HCF-2 Transmission Fluid
■Manual Transmission Fluid
Specified fluid: Honda Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF)
Continuously variable transmission models
1Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) Fluid
NOTICE
Do not mix HCF-2 with other transmission fluids
Using a transmission fluid other than HCF-2 may
adversely affect the operation and durability of your
vehicle's transmission, and damage the transmission.
Any damage caused by using a transmission fluid that
is not equivalent to HCF-2 is not covered by Honda's
new vehicle limited warranty.
Manual transmission models
1Manual Transmission Fluid
If Honda MTF is not available, you may use the API
certificated SAE 0W-20 or 5W-20 viscosity motor oil
as a temporary measure.
Replace with MTF as soon as possible. Motor oil does
not contain the proper additives for the transmission
and continued use can cause decreased shifting
performance and lead to transmission damage.
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 408 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
409
uuMaintenance Under the HooduBrake/Clutch* Fluid
Maintenance
Brake/Clutch* Fluid
Use the same fluid for both the brakes and clutch.
The fluid level should be between the MIN
and MAX marks on the side of the reserve
tank.
The brake fluid reserve tank is also used for
your vehicle’s clutch fluid. As long as you keep
the brake fluid level as instructed above, there
is no need for checking the clutch fluid level.
Specified fluid: Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3
■Checking the Brake/Clutch* Fluid
1Brake/Clutch* Fluid
NOTICE
Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is not compatible with your
vehicle’s braking system and can cause extensive
damage.
If the specified brake fluid is not available, you should
use only DOT 3 or DOT 4 fluid from a sealed
container as a temporary replacement.
Using any non-Honda brake fluid can cause corrosion
and decrease the longevity of the system. Have the
brake system flushed and refilled with Honda Heavy
Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3 as soon as possible.
If the brake fluid level is at or below the MIN mark,
have a dealer inspect the vehicle for leaks or worn
brake pads as soon as possible.
MIN
MAX
Manual transmission models
* Not available on all models
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 409 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
410
uuMaintenance Under the HooduRefilling Window Washer Fluid
Maintenance
Refilling Window Washer Fluid
Check the amount of window washer fluid by
looking at the reservoir.
If the level is low, fill the washer reservoir.
If the washer fluid is low, the washer level
indicator comes on.
Pour the washer fluid carefully. Do not overflow the reservoir.
1Refilling Window Washer Fluid
NOTICE
Do not use engine antifreeze or a vinegar/water
solution in the window washer reservoir.
Antifreeze can damage your vehicle’s paint. A
vinegar/water solution can damage the window
washer pump.
Use only commercially available windshield washer
fluid.
Avoid prolonged use of hard water to prevent lime
scale build up.
Window Washer Reservoir
Models without washer level sensor
Canadian models
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 410 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
411
Maintenance
Replacing Light Bulbs
Headlight Bulbs
When replacing, use the following bulbs.
1. Remove the coupler.
2. Remove the rubber weather seal.
3. Remove the hold-down wire, then remove
the bulb.
4. Insert a new bulb.
5. Reinstall the hold-down wire. Hook the end
of the wire on the knob in the slot.
6. Reinstall the rubber weather seal.
7. Insert the coupler into the connector of the
bulb.
High/Low beam headlight: 60/55 W (HB2 for halogen bulb type)
■High/Low Beam Headlight
1Headlight Bulbs
NOTICE
Halogen bulbs get very hot when lit.
Oil, perspiration, or a scratch on the glass can cause
the bulb to overheat and shatter.
The headlight aim is set by the factory, and does not
need to be adjusted. However, if you regularly carry
heavy items in the cargo area, have the aiming
readjusted at a dealer or by a qualified technician.
When replacing a halogen bulb, handle it by its base,
and protect the glass from contact with your skin or
hard objects. If you touch the glass, clean it with
denatured alcohol and a clean cloth.
Rubber Weather Seal
Coupler
Hold-Down Wire
Bulb
Slot
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 411 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
412
uuReplacing Light BulbsuFront Turn Signal/Parking Light Bulbs
Maintenance
Front Turn Signal/Parking Light Bulbs
When replacing, use the following bulbs.
1. Turn the socket counter-clockwise and
remove it.
2. Remove the old bulb and insert a new bulb.
Front Turn Signal/Parking Light: 28/8 W (Amber)
Bulb
Socket
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 412 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
413
uuReplacing Light BulbsuFront Side Marker Light Bulbs
Continued
Maintenance
Front Side Marker Light Bulbs
When replacing, use the following bulbs.
1. Turn the socket counter-clockwise and
remove it.
2. Remove the old bulb and insert a new bulb.
Fog Light Bulbs*
When replacing, use the following bulbs.
1. Remove the clip using a flat-tip screwdriver,
and push up the inner fender.
Front Side Marker Light: 5 W
Bulb
Socket
Fog Light: 35 W (H8 for halogen bulb type)
1Fog Light Bulbs*
NOTICE
Halogen bulbs get very hot when lit. Oil, perspiration,
or a scratch on the glass can cause the bulb to
overheat and shatter.
When replacing a halogen bulb, handle it by its
plastic case, and protect the glass from contact with
your skin or hard objects. If you touch the glass, clean
it with denatured alcohol and a clean cloth.
Clip
Inner Fender
* Not available on all models
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 413 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
uuReplacing Light BulbsuSide Turn Signal/Emergency Indicator Lights*
414
Maintenance
2. Push the tab to remove the coupler.
3. Rotate the old bulb counter-clockwise on
driver side and clockwise on passenger side
to remove.
4. Insert a new bulb into the fog light
assembly and turn it clockwise on driver
side and counter-clockwise on passenger
side.
5. Insert the coupler into the connector of the
bulb.
Side Turn Signal/Emergency Indicator Lights*
Side turn lights are LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace
the light assembly.
1Fog Light Bulbs*
Insert a flat-tip screwdriver, lift and remove the center
pin to remove the clip.
Insert the clip with the center pin raised, and push
until it is flat.
Push until the pin
is flat.
Tab
Bulb
Coupler
Driver side
Passenger side
Tab
Bulb
Coupler
* Not available on all models
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 414 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
415
uuReplacing Light BulbsuRear Turn Signal Light Bulbs
Maintenance
Rear Turn Signal Light Bulbs
When replacing, use the following bulbs.
1. Use a Phillips-head screwdriver to remove
the bolts.
2. Pull the light assembly out of the rear pillar.
3. Turn the socket counter-clockwise and
remove it.
4. Remove the old bulb.
5. Insert a new bulb.
6. Slide the light assembly onto the guide on
the body.
Rear Turn Signal Light: 21 W (Amber)
Bolt
Bulb
Socket
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 415 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
416
uuReplacing Light BulbsuBack-Up Light Bulbs
Maintenance
Back-Up Light Bulbs
When replacing, use the following bulbs.
1. Remove the cover by prying on the edge
using a flat-tip screwdriver.
uWrap the flat-tip screwdriver with a cloth
to prevent scratches.
2. Turn the socket counter-clockwise and
remove it.
3. Remove the old bulb.
4. Insert a new bulb.
Back-Up Light: 16 W
Cover
Bulb
Socket
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 416 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
417
uuReplacing Light Bulbs uBrake/Tail/Rear Side Marker Lights
Maintenance
Brake/Tail/Rear Side Marker Lights
Brake/tail/rear side marker lights are the LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer
inspect and replace the light assembly.
High-Mount Brake Light
High-mount brake light is a LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and
replace the light assembly.
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 417 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
418
uuReplacing Light BulbsuRear License Plate Light Bulbs
Maintenance
Rear License Plate Light Bulbs
When replacing, use the following bulbs.
1. Push the lens on the left and pull out the
lens and the socket attached to it.
2. Remove the license plate light assembly by
squeezing the tabs on both sides of the
socket.
3. Remove the old bulb and insert a new bulb.
Rear License Plate Light: 5 W
Lens
Bulb
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 418 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
419
Continued
Maintenance
Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades
Checking Wiper Blades
If the wiper blade rubber has deteriorated, it will leave streaks and the hard surfaces
of the blade may scratch the window glass.
Changing the Front Wiper Blade Rubber
1. Lift the driver side wiper arm first, then the
passenger side.
2. Press and hold the tab, then slide the holder
off the wiper arm.
1Changing the Front Wiper Blade Rubber
NOTICE
Avoid dropping the wiper arm onto the windshield, it
may damage the wiper arm and/or the windshield.
Lock Tab
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 419 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
420
uuChecking and Maintaining Wiper BladesuChanging the Front Wiper Blade Rubber
Maintenance
3. Slide the wiper blade out of the holder by
pulling the tabbed end out.
4. Slide the new wiper blade onto the holder
from the bottom end.
uThe tab on the blade should fit in the
indent of the top of the wiper holder.
5. Slide the holder onto the wiper arm
securely.
6. Lower the passenger side wiper arm first,
then the driver side.
Blade
Tab
Blade
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 420 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
421
uuChecking and Maintaining Wiper BladesuChanging the Rear Wiper Blade Rubber
Continued
Maintenance
Changing the Rear Wiper Blade Rubber
1. Raise the wiper arm off.
2. Pivot up the bottom end of the wiper blade
until it comes off from the wiper arm.
3. Slide the wiper blade out of the end with
the indent.
1Changing the Rear Wiper Blade Rubber
NOTICE
Avoid dropping the wiper arm; it may damage the
rear window.
Wiper Arm
Blade
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 421 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
422
uuChecking and Maintaining Wiper BladesuChanging the Rear Wiper Blade Rubber
Maintenance
4. Remove the retainers from the rubber blade
that has been removed, and mount to a
new rubber blade.
5. Slide the new wiper blade onto the holder.
uMake sure it is engaged correctly, then
install the wiper blade assembly onto the
wiper arm.
Retainers
Holder
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 422 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
423
Continued
Maintenance
Checking and Maintaining Tires
Checking Tires
To safely operate your vehicle, your tires must be of the proper type and size, in
good condition with adequate tread, and properly inflated.
■Inflation guidelines
Properly inflated tires provide the best combination of handling, tread life, and
comfort. Refer to the driver’s doorjamb label or specification’s page for the specified
pressure.
Underinflated tires wear unevenly, adversely affect handling and fuel economy, and
are more likely to fail from overheating.
Overinflated tires make your vehicle ride harshly, are more prone to road hazards,
and wear unevenly.
Every day before you drive, look at each of the tires. If one looks lower than the
others, check the pressure with a tire gauge.
At least once a month or before long trips, use a gauge to measure the pressure in
all tires, including the spare. Even tires in good condition can lose 1-2 psi (10-20 kPa,
0.1-0.2 kgf/cm2) per month.
1Checking Tires
Measure the air pressure when tires are cold. This
means the vehicle has been parked for at least three
hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km). If
necessary, add or release air until the specified
pressure is reached.
If checked when hot, tire pressure can be as much as
4–6 psi (30–40 kPa, 0.3–0.4 kgf/cm2) higher than if
checked when cold.
Have a dealer check the tires if you feel a consistent
vibration while driving. New tires and any that have
been removed and reinstalled should be properly
balanced.
3
WARNING
Using tires that are excessively worn or
improperly inflated can cause a crash in
which you can be seriously hurt or killed.
Follow all instructions in this owner’s
manual regarding tire inflation and
maintenance.
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 423 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuChecking Tires
424
Maintenance
■Inspection guidelines
Every time you check inflation, also examine the tires and valve stems.
Look for:
•Bumps or bulges on the side or in the tread. Replace the tire if you find any cuts,
splits, or cracks in the side of the tire. Replace it if you see fabric or cord.
•Remove any foreign objects and inspect for air leaks.
•Uneven tread wear. Have a dealer check the wheel alignment.
•Excessive tread wear.
2Wear Indicators P. 429
•Cracks or other damage around valve stem.
1Checking Tires
Whenever tire pressure is adjusted, you must
calibrate the TPMS.
2TPMS Calibration P. 373
Check the spare tire pressure once a month or before
long trips.
U.S. models
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 424 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
425
uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire and Loading Information Label
Continued
Maintenance
Tire and Loading Information Label
The label attached to the driver’s doorjamb provides necessary tire and loading
information.
Tire Labeling
The tires that came on your vehicle have a
number of markings. Those you should be
aware of are described below.
Whenever tires are replaced, they should be replaced with tires of the same size.
1Tire and Loading Information Label
The tire and loading information label attached to the
driver’s doorjamb contains:
aThe number of people your vehicle can carry.
bThe total weight your vehicle can carry. Do not
exceed this weight.
cThe original tire sizes for front, rear, and spare.
dThe proper cold tire pressure for front, rear, and
spare.
Label
Example
Example Tire Size
Tire
Identification
Number (TIN)
Maximum
Tire Load
Maximum
Tire Pressure
Tire Size
■Tire Sizes
1Tire Sizes
Following is an example of tire size with an
explanation of what each component means.
215/55R17 94V
215: Tire width in millimeters.
55: Aspect ratio (the tire’s section height as a
percentage of its width).
R: Tire construction code (R indicates radial).
17: Rim diameter in inches.
94: Load index (a numerical code associated with the
maximum load the tire can carry).
V: Speed symbol (an alphabetical code indicating the
maximum speed rating).
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 425 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire Labeling
426
Maintenance
The tire identification number (TIN) is a group of numbers and letters that look like
the example in the side column. TIN is located on the sidewall of the tire.
Cold Tire Pressure – The tire air pressure when the vehicle has been parked for at
least three hours or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km).
Load Rating – Means the maximum load that a tire is rated to carry for a given
inflation pressure.
Maximum Inflation Pressure – The maximum tire air pressure that the tire can
hold.
Maximum Load Rating – Means the load rating for a tire at the maximum
permissible inflation pressure for that tire.
Recommended Inflation Pressure – The cold tire inflation pressure recommended
by the manufacturer.
Treadwear Indicators (TWI) – Means the projections within the principal grooves
designed to give a visual indication of the degrees of wear of the tread.
■Tire Identification Number (TIN)
■Glossary of Tire Terminology
1Tire Identification Number (TIN)
DOT B97R FW6X 2209
DOT: This indicates that the tire meets all
requirements of the U.S. Department of
Transportation.
B97R: Manufacturer’s identification mark.
FW6X: Tire type code.
22 09: Date of manufacture.
Year
Week
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 426 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
427
uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuDOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
Continued
Maintenance
DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
The tires on your vehicle meet all U.S. Federal Safety
Requirements. All tires are also graded for treadwear, traction,
and temperature performance according to Department of
Transportation (DOT) standards. The following explains these
gradings.
Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall
between tread shoulder and maximum section width.
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear
rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150
would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the
government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance
of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however,
and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in
driving habits, service practices and differences in road
characteristics and climate.
■Uniform Tire Quality Grading
■Treadwear
1Uniform Tire Quality Grading
For example:
Treadwear 200
Traction AA
Temperature A
All passenger car tires must conform
to Federal Safety Requirements in
addition to these grades.
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 427 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuDOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
428
Maintenance
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C.
Those grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement
as measured under controlled conditions on specified
government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked
C may have poor traction performance.
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its
ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high
temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and
reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire
failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which
all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels
of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum
required by law.
■Traction
■Temperature
1Traction
Warning: The traction grade
assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests,
and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak
traction characteristics.
1Temperature
Warning: The temperature grade for
this tire is established for a tire that is
properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive loading,
either separately or in combination,
can cause heat buildup and possible
tire failure.
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 428 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
429
uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuWear Indicators
Maintenance
Wear Indicators
The groove where the wear indicator is
located is 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) shallower than
elsewhere on the tire. If the tread has worn so
that the indicator is exposed, replace the tire.
Worn out tires have poor traction on wet
roads.
Tire Service Life
The life of your tires is dependent on many factors, including driving habits, road
conditions, vehicle loading, inflation pressure, maintenance history, speed, and
environmental conditions (even when the tires are not in use).
In addition to regular inspections and inflation pressure maintenance, it is
recommended that you have annual inspections performed once the tires reach five
years old. All tires, including the spare, should be removed from service after 10
years from the date of manufacture, regardless of their condition or state of wear.
Example of a Wear
Indicator mark
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 429 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
430
uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire and Wheel Replacement
Maintenance
Tire and Wheel Replacement
Replace your tires with radials of the same size, load range, speed rating, and
maximum cold tire pressure rating (as shown on the tire’s sidewall). Using tires of a
different size or construction can cause certain vehicle systems such as the ABS and
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA®) system to work incorrectly.
It is best to replace all four tires at the same time. If that isn’t possible, replace the
front or rear tires in pairs.
Make sure that the wheel’s specifications match those of the original wheels.
1Tire and Wheel Replacement
3
WARNING
Installing improper tires on your vehicle can
affect handling and stability. This can cause
a crash in which you can be seriously hurt or
killed.
Always use the size and type of tires
recommended in this owner’s manual.
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 430 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
431
uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire Rotation
Maintenance
Tire Rotation
Rotating tires according to the Maintenance Minder message on the information
display helps to distribute wear more evenly and increase tire life.
■Tires without rotation marks
Rotate the tires as shown here.
■Tires with rotation marks
Rotate the tires as shown here.
1Tire Rotation
Tires with directional tread patterns should only be
rotated front to back (not from one side to the other).
Directional tires should be mounted with the rotation
indication mark facing forward, as shown below.
Whenever tires are rotated, you must calibrate the
TPMS.
2TPMS Calibration P. 373
Front
Direction Mark
U.S. models
Front
Front
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 431 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
432
uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuWinter Tires
Maintenance
Winter Tires
If driving on snowy or frozen roads, mount all season marked M+S tires, snow tires,
or tire chains; reduce speed; and maintain sufficient distance between vehicles when
driving.
Be particularly careful when operating the steering wheel or brakes to prevent
skidding.
Use tire chains, snow tires, or all season tires when necessary or according to the
law.
When mounting, refer to the following points.
For winter tires:
•Select the size and load ranges that are the same as the original tires.
•Mount the tires to all four wheels.
For tire chains:
•Install them on the front tires only.
•Because your vehicle has limited tire clearance, we strongly recommend using the
chains listed below:
•Follow the chain manufacturer’s instruction when installing. Mount them as
tightly as you can.
•Check that the chains do not touch the brake lines or suspension.
•Drive slowly.
Cable-type: SCC Radial Chain SC1036
1Winter Tires
NOTICE
Traction devices that are the wrong size or improperly
installed can damage your vehicle’s brake lines,
suspension, body, and wheels. Stop driving if they are
hitting any part of the vehicle.
When tire chains are mounted, follow the chain
manufacturer’s instructions regarding vehicle
operational limits.
If your vehicle is equipped with summer tires, be
aware that these tires are not designed for winter
driving conditions. For more information, contact a
dealer.
3
WARNING
Using the wrong chains, or not properly
installing chains, can damage the brake
lines and cause a crash in which you can be
seriously injured or killed.
Follow all instructions in this owner’s
manual regarding the selection and use of
tire chains.
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 432 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
433
Maintenance
Battery
Checking the Battery
The condition of the battery is monitored by a sensor located on the negative
terminal of the battery. If there is a problem with this sensor, the information display
will display a warning message. If this happens, have your vehicle inspected by a
dealer.
Check the battery terminals for corrosion monthly.
If your vehicle’s battery is disconnected or goes dead:
•The audio system is disabled.
2Audio System Theft Protection P. 181
•The clock resets.
2Clock P. 96
•The navigation system* is disabled.
2Refer to the navigation system manual
1Battery
WARNING: Battery post, terminals,
and related accessories contain lead
and lead compounds.
Wash your hands after handling.
When replacing the battery, the replacement must be
of the same specifications.
Consult a dealer for more information.
3
WARNING
The battery gives off explosive hydrogen
gas during normal operation.
A spark or flame can cause the battery to
explode with enough force to kill or
seriously hurt you.
When conducting any battery
maintenance, wear protective clothing and
a face shield, or have a skilled technician do
it.
* Not available on all models
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 433 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
434
uuBatteryuCharging the Battery
Maintenance
Charging the Battery
Disconnect both battery cables to prevent damaging your vehicle’s electrical system.
Always disconnect the negative (–) cable first, and reconnect it last.
1Battery
When you find corrosion, clean the battery terminals
by applying a baking powder and water solution.
Clean the terminals with a damp towel. Cloth/towel
dry the battery. Coat the terminals with grease to
help prevent future corrosion.
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 434 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
435
Continued
Maintenance
Remote Transmitter Care
Replacing the Button Battery
If the indicator does not come on when the button is pressed, replace the battery.
1. Unscrew the cover with a small Phillips-
head screwdriver.
2. Open the remote transmitter.
uWrap the small flat-tip screwdriver with a
cloth to prevent scratching the
transmitter.
3. Remove the button battery with the small
flat-tip screwdriver.
4. Make sure to replace the battery with the
correct polarity.
■Keys with Remote Transmitter*
1Replacing the Button Battery
NOTICE
An improperly disposed of battery can damage the
environment. Always confirm local regulations for
battery disposal.
Replacement batteries are commercially available or
at a dealer.
3
WARNING
CHEMICAL BURN HAZARD
The battery that powers the remote
transmitter can cause severe internal burns
and can even lead to death if swallowed.
Keep new and used batteries away from
children.
If you suspect that a child has swallowed
the battery, seek medical attention
immediately.
Screw
Battery type: CR1620
Battery
* Not available on all models
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 435 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
436
uuRemote Transmitter CareuReplacing the Button Battery
Maintenance
1. Remove the built-in key.
2. Remove the upper half of the cover by
carefully prying on the edge with a coin.
uRemove carefully to avoid losing the
buttons.
uWrap a coin with a cloth to prevent
scratching the smart entry remote.
3. Make sure to replace the battery with the
correct polarity.
■Smart Entry Remote*
Battery type: CR2032
Battery
* Not available on all models
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 436 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
437
Maintenance
Heating and Cooling System
*
/Climate Control System
*
Maintenance
Dust and Pollen Filter
The heating and cooling system*/climate control system* is equipped with a dust
and pollen filter that collects pollen, dust, and other debris in the air. The
Maintenance MinderTM messages will let you know when to replace the filter.
We recommend that you replace the dust and pollen filter sooner when using your
vehicle in areas with high concentrations of dust.
1Dust and Pollen Filter
If the airflow from the heating and cooling system*/
climate control system* deteriorates noticeably, and
the windows fog up easily, the filter may need to be
replaced. Please contact a dealer for replacement.
* Not available on all models
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 437 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
438
Maintenance
Cleaning
Interior Care
Use a damp cloth with a mixture of mild detergent and warm water to remove dirt.
Use a clean cloth to remove detergent residue.
Use a soft brush with a mixture of mild soap and warm water to clean the seat belts.
Let the belts air dry. Wipe the loop of the seat belt anchors using a clean cloth.
Wipe using a glass cleaner.
■Cleaning Seat Belts
1Interior Care
Do not spill liquids inside the vehicle. Electrical
devices and systems may malfunction if liquids are
splashed on them.
Do not use silicone based sprays on electrical devices
such as audio devices and switches.
Doing so may cause the items to malfunction or
cause a fire inside the vehicle.
If a silicone based spray is inadvertently used on
electrical devices, consult a dealer.
Depending on their composition, chemicals and
liquid aromatics may cause discoloration, wrinkles,
and cracking to resin-based parts and textiles.
Do not use alkali solvents or organic solvents such as
benzene or gasoline.
After using chemicals, make sure to gently wipe them
away using a dry cloth.
Do not place used cloths on top of resin based parts
or textiles for long periods of time without washing.
Loop
■Cleaning the Window
1Cleaning the Window
Wires are mounted to the inside of the rear window.
Wipe along the same direction as the wires with a
soft cloth so as not to damage them.
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 438 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
439
uuCleaninguInterior Care
Maintenance
The driver’s floor mat hooks over the floor
anchors, which keep the mat from sliding
forward. To remove a mat for cleaning, turn
the anchor knobs to the unlock position.
When reinstalling the mat after cleaning, turn
the knobs to the lock position.
Do not put additional floor mats on top of
the anchored mats.
To properly clean leather:
1. Use a vacuum or soft dry cloth first to remove any dirt or dust.
2. Clean the leather with a soft cloth dampened with a solution comprised of 90%
water and 10% neutral soap.
3. Wipe away any soap residue with a clean damp cloth.
4. Wipe away residual water and allow leather to air dry in the shade.
■Floor Mats
1Floor Mats
If you use any floor mats that were not originally
provided with your vehicle, make sure they are
designed for your specific vehicle, fit correctly, and
are securely anchored by the floor anchors.
Position the rear seat floor mats properly. If they are
not properly positioned, the floor mats can interfere
with the front seat functions.
Lock
Unlock
■Maintaining Genuine Leather*
1Maintaining Genuine Leather*
It is important to clean or wipe away dirt or dust as
soon as possible. Spills can soak into leather resulting
in stains. Dirt or dust can cause abrasions in the
leather. In addition, please note that some dark
colored clothing can rub onto the leather seats
resulting in discoloration or stains.
* Not available on all models
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 439 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
440
uuCleaninguExterior Care
Maintenance
Exterior Care
Dust off the vehicle body after you drive.
Regularly inspect your vehicle for scratches on painted surfaces. A scratch on a
painted surface can result in body rust. If you find a scratch, promptly repair it.
Wash the vehicle regularly. Wash more frequently when driving in the following
conditions:
•If driving on roads with road salt.
•If driving in coastal areas.
•If tar, soot, bird droppings, insects, or tree sap are stuck to painted surfaces.
•Fold in the door mirrors.
•Make sure to follow the instructions indicated on the automated car wash.
•Keep sufficient distance between the cleaning nozzle and the vehicle body.
•Take particular care around the windows. Standing too close may cause water to
enter the vehicle interior.
•Do not spray high pressure water directly into the engine compartment. Instead,
use low pressure water and a mild detergent.
■Washing the Vehicle
■Using an Automated Car Wash
■Using High Pressure Cleaners
1Washing the Vehicle
Do not spray water into the air intake vents.
It can cause a malfunction.
Air Intake Vents
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 440 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
Continued 441
uuCleaninguExterior Care
Maintenance
A good coat of automotive body wax helps protect your vehicle’s paint from the
elements. Wax will wear off over time and expose your vehicle’s paint to the
elements, so reapply as necessary.
If you get gasoline, oil, engine coolant, or battery fluid on resin coated parts, they
may be stained or the coating may peel. Promptly wipe it away using a soft cloth and
clean water.
Wipe using a glass cleaner.
Aluminum is susceptible to deterioration caused by salt and other road
contaminants. When necessary, as early as possible use a sponge and mild detergent
to wipe away these contaminants. Do not use a stiff brush or harsh chemicals
(including some commercial wheel cleaners). These can damage the protective finish
on aluminum alloy wheels, resulting in corrosion. Depending on the type of finish,
the wheels also may lose their luster or appear burnished. To avoid water stains,
wipe the wheels dry with a cloth while they are still wet.
■Applying Wax
■Maintaining the Bumpers and Other Resin Coated Parts
■Cleaning the Window
■Maintaining Aluminum Wheels
1Applying Wax
NOTICE
Chemical solvents and strong cleaners can damage
the paint, metal, and plastic on your vehicle. Wipe
away spills immediately.
1Maintaining the Bumpers and Other Resin Coated Parts
Ask a dealer about the correct coating material when
you want to repair the painted surface of the parts
made of resin.
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 441 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
442
uuCleaninguExterior Care
Maintenance
The inside lenses of exterior lights (headlights, brake lights etc.) may fog temporarily
if you have driven in the rain, or after the vehicle has been run through a car wash.
Dew condensation also may build up inside the lenses when there is a significant
enough difference between the ambient and inside lens temperatures (similar to
vehicle windows fogging up in rainy conditions). These conditions are natural
processes, not structural design problems in the exterior lights.
Lens design characteristics may result in moisture developing on the light lens frame
surfaces. This also is not a malfunction.
However, if you see large amounts of water accumulation, or large water drops
building up inside the lenses, have your vehicle inspected by a dealer.
■Fogged Exterior Light Lenses
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 442 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
443
Maintenance
Accessories and Modifications
Accessories
When installing accessories, check the following:
•Do not install accessories on the windshield. They can obstruct your view and
delay your reaction to driving conditions.
•Do not install any accessories over areas marked SRS AIRBAG, on the sides or
backs of the front seats, on front or side pillars, or near the side windows.
Accessories installed in these areas may interfere with proper operation of the
vehicle’s airbags or may be propelled into you or another occupant if the airbags
deploy.
•Be sure electronic accessories do not overload electrical circuits or interfere with
proper operation of your vehicle.
2Fuses P. 470
•Before installing any electronic accessory, have the installer contact a dealer for
assistance. If possible, have a dealer inspect the final installation.
1Accessories and Modifications
Honda Genuine accessories are recommended to
ensure proper operation on your vehicle.
3
WARNING
Improper accessories or modifications can
affect your vehicle’s handling, stability, and
performance, and cause a crash in which
you can be seriously hurt or killed.
Follow all instructions in this owner’s
manual regarding accessories and
modifications.
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 443 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
444
uuAccessories and ModificationsuModifications
Maintenance
Modifications
Do not modify your vehicle in a manner that may affect its handling, stability, or
reliability, or install non-genuine Honda parts or accessories that may have a similar
effect.
Even minor modifications to vehicle systems can affect overall vehicle performance.
Always make sure all equipment is properly installed and maintained, and do not
make any modification to your vehicle or its systems that might cause your vehicle
to no longer meet federal, state, province, territory, and local regulations.
The on-board diagnostic port (OBD-II/SAE J1962 connector) installed on this vehicle
is intended to be used with automobile system diagnostic devices or with other
devices that Honda has approved. Use of any other type of device may adversely
affect the vehicle’s electronic systems or allow them to be compromised, possibly
resulting in a system malfunction, drained battery, or other unexpected problems.
Do not modify or attempt to repair any of the electrical components.
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 444 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
445
Handling the Unexpected
This chapter explains how to handle unexpected troubles.
Tools
Types of Tools.................................. 446
If a Tire Goes Flat
Changing a Flat Tire......................... 448
Engine Does Not Start
Checking the Engine........................ 457
If the Smart Entry Remote Battery is Weak....458
Emergency Engine Stop ................... 459
Jump Starting.................................... 460
Shift Lever Does Not Move.............. 462
Overheating
How to Handle Overheating............. 463
Indicator, Coming On/Blinking
If the Low Oil Pressure Indicator Comes
On ............................................. 465
If the Charging System Indicator Comes
On ................................................. 465
If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes
On or Blinks..................................... 466
If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes
On...................................................... 467
If the Electric Power Steering (EPS) System
Indicator Comes On ....................... 467
If the Electric Parking Brake System
Indicator Comes On ....................... 468
If the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator
Comes On or Blinks ....................... 469
Fuses
Fuse Locations ................................. 470
Inspecting and Changing Fuses........ 474
Emergency Towing........................... 475
When You Cannot Open the Tailgate
.....476
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 445 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
447
uuToolsuTypes of Tools
Handling the Unexpected
Wheel Nut Wrench/
Jack Handle
Jack Handle Bar
Detachable Towing Hook
Tool Case
Jack
Jack
AWD models
Storage Bag
Storage Bag
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 447 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
448
Handling the Unexpected
If a Tire Goes Flat
Changing a Flat Tire
If a tire goes flat while driving, grasp the steering wheel firmly, and brake gradually
to reduce speed. Then, stop in a safe place. Replace the flat tire with a compact
spare tire. Go to a dealer as soon as possible to have the full-size tire repaired or
replaced.
1. Park the vehicle on firm, level, and non-slippery surface and apply the parking
brake.
2. Move the shift lever to (P.
2. Move the shift lever to (R.
3. Turn on the hazard warning lights and turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0*1.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.
1Changing a Flat Tire
Follow compact spare precautions:
Periodically check the tire pressure of the compact
spare. It should be set to the specified pressure.
Specified Pressure: 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm2)
When driving with the compact spare tire, keep the
vehicle speed under 50 mph (80 km/h). Replace with
a full-size tire as soon as possible.
The compact spare tire and wheel in your vehicle are
specifically for this model. Do not use them with
another vehicle. Do not use another type of compact
spare tire or wheel with your vehicle.
Do not mount tire chains on a compact spare tire.
If a chain-mounted front tire goes flat, remove one of
the full-size rear tires and replace it with the compact
spare tire. Remove the flat front tire and replace it
with the full-size tire that was removed from the rear.
Mount the tire chains on the front tire.
Do not use the jack if it doesn’t work properly. Call
your dealer or a professional towing service.
Continuously variable transmission models
Manual transmission models
All models
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 448 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
Continued 449
uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire
Handling the Unexpected
1. Open the cargo area floor lid.
2. Take the tool case out of the cargo area.
Take the wheel nut wrench, jack handle bar
and jack out of the tool case.
Take the wheel nut wrench and jack handle
bar out of the tool case.
3. Unscrew the wing bolt, and remove the
spacer cone. Then, remove the spare tire.
■Getting Ready to Replace the Flat Tire
1Getting Ready to Replace the Flat Tire
The wheel nut wrench supplied with your vehicle is
specially adapted to fit the holder shaft. Do not use
any other tool.
The shape of the tool case varies by model.
Floor Lid
Tool Case
Jack
Spare Tire
2WD models
AWD models
Tool Case
Spare Tire
2WD models
AWD models
All models
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 449 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
450
uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire
Handling the Unexpected
4. Turn the jack's end bracket anti-clockwise
to loosen it, then remove the jack.
5. Place a wheel block or rock in front and rear
of the wheel diagonal to the flat tire.
Jack
AWD models
Wheel
Blocks
The tire to be replaced.
All models
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 450 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
451
uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire
Continued
Handling the Unexpected
6. Place the compact spare tire (wheel side up)
under the vehicle body, near the tire that
needs to be replaced.
7. Loosen each wheel nut about one turn
using the wheel nut wrench.
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 451 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire
452
Handling the Unexpected
1. Place the jack under the jacking point
closest to the tire to be changed.
2. Turn the end bracket clockwise as shown in
the image until the top of the jack contacts
the jacking point.
uMake sure that the jacking point tab is
resting in the jack notch.
3. Raise the vehicle, using the jack handle bar
and the jack handle, until the tire is off the
ground.
■How to Set Up the Jack
1How to Set Up the Jack
Do not use the jack with people or luggage in the
vehicle.
Use the jack provided in your vehicle.
Other jacks may not support the weight (“load”) or
their shape may not match.
The following instructions must be followed to use
the jack safely:
•Do not use while the engine is running.
•Use only where the ground is firm and level.
•Use only at the jacking points.
•Do not get in the vehicle while using the jack.
•Do not put anything on top of or underneath the
jack.
Store the wheel, jack, and tools securely before
driving.
Loose items can fly around the interior in a crash and
can seriously injure the occupants.
3
WARNING
The vehicle can easily roll off the jack,
seriously injuring anyone underneath.
Follow the directions for changing a tire
exactly, and never get under the vehicle
when it is supported only by the jack.
Jack
Handle
Bar Wheel Nut
Wrench as Jack Handle
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 452 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
Continued 453
uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire
Handling the Unexpected
1. Remove the wheel nuts and flat tire.
2. Wipe the mounting surfaces of the wheel
with a clean cloth.
3. Mount the compact spare tire.
4. Screw the wheel nuts until they touch the
lips around the mounting holes, and stop
rotating.
5. Lower the vehicle and remove the jack.
Tighten the wheel nuts in the order
indicated in the image. Go around,
tightening the nuts, two to three times in
this order.
Wheel nut torque:
80 lbf∙ft (108 N∙m, 11 kgf∙m)
■Replacing the Flat Tire
1Replacing the Flat Tire
Do not over tighten the wheel nuts by applying extra
torque using your foot or a pipe.
Wheel
Nut
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 453 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire
454
Handling the Unexpected
1. Remove the center cap.
2. Place the flat tire face down in the spare tire
well.
3. Remove the spacer cone from the wing
bolt, flip it over, and insert it back on the
bolt. Secure the flat tire with the wing bolt.
4. Securely store the wheel nut wrench, jack
handle bar and jack back in the tool case.
Store the case in the cargo area under the
cargo floor lid.
■Storing the Flat Tire
2WD models
1Storing the Flat Tire
3
WARNING
Loose items can fly around the interior in a
crash and can seriously injure the
occupants.
Store the wheel, jack, and tools securely
before driving.
For full-size
tire
For compact
spare tire
Wing Bolt
Spacer
Cone
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 454 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
Continued 455
uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire
Handling the Unexpected
1. Put the flat tire in the storage bag provided
with your vehicle.
uThe storage bag is in the tool case.
2. Knot the top of the storage bag.
3. Store the jack in its holder. Turn the jack’s
end bracket to lock it in place.
4. Securely put the wheel nut wrench and jack
handle bar back in the tool case.
5. Bore through the bag, and pass the holding
belt through the hole of the bag and the
wheel of the flat tire as shown.
6. Place the flat tire in the cargo area, and
thread the belt through the rear anchor as
shown.
7. Pass the belt through the ring, and tighten
the belt to secure the flat tire in place.
■Storing the Flat Tire
AWD models
1Storing the Flat Tire
3
WARNING
Loose items can fly around the interior in a
crash and can seriously injure the
occupants.
Store the wheel, jack, and tools securely
before driving.
Belt
Rear Anchor
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 455 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
456
uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire
Handling the Unexpected
If you replace a flat tire with the spare tire, the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator
comes on while you are driving. After driving for a few miles (kilometers), the
indicator will start blinking for a short time and then stay on, but this is normal.
Calibrate the TPMS when you replace the tire with a specified regular tire.
2TPMS Calibration P. 373
■TPMS and the Spare Tire
U.S. models
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 456 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
457
Handling the Unexpected
Engine Does Not Start
Checking the Engine
If the engine does not start, check the starter.
Starter condition Checklist
Starter doesn’t turn or turns
over slowly.
The battery may be dead. Check
each of the items on the right and
respond accordingly.
Check the brightness of the interior lights.
Turn on the interior lights and check the brightness.
●If the interior lights are dim or do not come on at all
2Battery P. 433
●If the interior lights come on normally 2 Fuses P. 470
The starter turns over normally
but the engine doesn’t start.
There may be a problem with the
fuse. Check each of the items on
the right and respond accordingly.
Review the engine start procedure.
Follow its instructions, and try to start the engine again. 2 Starting the Engine P. 339, 342
Check the immobilizer system indicator.
When the immobilizer system indicator is blinking, the engine cannot be started.
2Immobilizer System P. 118
Check the fuel level.
There should be enough fuel in the tank. 2 Fuel Gauge P. 93
Check the fuse.
Check all fuses, or have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
2Inspecting and Changing Fuses P. 474
If the problem continues:
2Emergency Towing P. 475
1Checking the Engine
If you must start the vehicle immediately, use an
assisting vehicle to jump start it.
2Jump Starting P. 460
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 457 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
458
uuEngine Does Not StartuIf the Smart Entry Remote Battery is Weak
Handling the Unexpected
If the Smart Entry Remote Battery is Weak
If the beeper sounds, the indicator on the ENGINE START/STOP button flashes,
and the engine won’t start.
Start the engine as follows.
1. Touch the center of the ENGINE START/
STOP button with the H logo on the smart
entry remote while the indicator on the
ENGINE START/STOP button is flashing.
The buttons on the smart entry remote
should be facing you.
uThe indicator flashes for about 30
seconds.
2. Depress the brake pedal (continuously
variable transmission) or clutch pedal
(manual transmission) and press the
ENGINE START/STOP button within 10
seconds after the beeper sounds while the
indicator stays on.
uIf you don’t depress the pedal, the mode
will change to ACCESSORY.
Models with smart entry system
ENGINE
START
STOP
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 458 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
459
uuEngine Does Not StartuEmergency Engine Stop
Handling the Unexpected
Emergency Engine Stop
The ENGINE START/STOP button may be used to stop the engine due to an
emergency situation even while driving. If you must stop the engine, do either of the
following operations:
•Press and hold the ENGINE START/STOP button for two seconds.
•Firmly press the ENGINE START/STOP button twice.
The steering wheel will not lock. However, because turning off the engine disables
the power assist the engine provides to the steering and braking systems, it will
require significantly more physical effort and time to steer and slow the vehicle. Use
both feet on the brake pedal to slow down the vehicle and stop immediately in a
safe place. With manual transmission models you can also downshift the
transmission to utilize engine braking.
The power mode is in ACCESSORY when the engine is stopped.
To change the mode to VEHICLE OFF, move the shift lever to (P after the vehicle
comes to a complete stop.
Then press the ENGINE START/STOP button twice without depressing the brake
pedal.
The power mode changes to VEHICLE OFF.
Models with smart entry system
1Emergency Engine Stop
Do not press the button while driving unless it is
absolutely necessary for the engine to be switched
off.
Continuously variable transmission models
Canadian continuously variable transmission models
Manual transmission models
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 459 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
460
Handling the Unexpected
Jump Starting
Turn off the power to electric devices, such as audio and lights. Turn off the engine,
then open the hood.
1. Connect the first jumper cable to your
vehicle’s battery + terminal.
uRemove the cover from the under-hood
fuse box.
2Engine Compartment Fuse Box P. 470
2. Connect the other end of the first jumper
cable to the booster battery + terminal.
uUse a 12-volt booster battery only.
uConnect when using the automotive
battery charger to boost your 12-volt
battery, select a lower charging voltage
than 15-volt. Check the charger manual
for the proper setting.
3. Connect the second jumper cable to the
booster battery - terminal.
4. Connect the other end of the second
jumper cable to the stud bolt as shown. Do
not connect this jumper cable to any other
part.
5. If your vehicle is connected to another
vehicle, start the assisting vehicle’s engine
and increase its rpm slightly.
6. Attempt to start your vehicle’s engine. If it
turns over slowly, check that the jumper
cables have good metal-to-metal contact.
■Jump Starting Procedure
1Jump Starting
Securely attach the jumper cables clips so that they
do not come off when the engine vibrates. Also be
careful not to tangle the jumper cables or allow the
cable ends to touch each other while attaching or
detaching the jumper cables.
Battery performance degrades in cold conditions and
may prevent the engine from starting.
3
WARNING
A battery can explode if you do not follow
the correct procedure, seriously injuring
anyone nearby.
Keep all sparks, open flames, and smoking
materials away from the battery.
Booster
Battery
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 460 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
461
uuJump Startingu
Handling the Unexpected
Once your vehicle’s engine has started, remove the jumper cables in the following
order.
1. Disconnect the jumper cable from your vehicle’s stud bolt.
2. Disconnect the other end of the jumper cable from the booster battery -
terminal.
3. Disconnect the jumper cable from your vehicle’s battery + terminal.
4. Disconnect the other end of the jumper cable from the booster battery +
terminal.
Have your vehicle inspected by a nearby service station or a dealer.
■What to Do After the Engine Starts
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 461 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
462
Handling the Unexpected
Shift Lever Does Not Move
Follow the procedure below if you cannot move the shift lever out of the (P
position.
1. Set the parking brake.
2. Remove the key from the ignition switch.
2. Remove the built-in key from the smart
entry remote.
3. Wrap a cloth around the tip of a small flat-
tip screwdriver. Put it into the shift lock
release slot as shown in the image, and
remove the cover.
4. Insert the key into the shift lock release slot.
5. While pushing the key down, press the shift
lever release button, and place the shift
lever into (N.
uThe lock is now released. Have the shift
lever checked by a dealer as soon as
possible.
■Releasing the Lock
Continuously variable transmission models
Slot
Cover
Models without smart entry system
Models with smart entry system
All models
Release Button
Shift Lock
Release Slot
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 462 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
463
Continued
Handling the Unexpected
Overheating
How to Handle Overheating
Overheating symptoms are as follows:
•The high temperature indicator (red) comes on or the engine suddenly loses
power.
•Steam or spray comes out of the engine compartment.
■First thing to do
1. Immediately park the vehicle in a safe place.
2. Turn off all accessories and turn on the hazard warning lights.
uNo steam or spray present: Keep the engine running and open the hood.
uSteam or spray is present: Turn off the engine and wait until it subsides.
Then open the hood.
1How to Handle Overheating
NOTICE
Continuing to drive with the high temperature
indicator on may damage the engine.
3
WARNING
Steam and spray from an overheated
engine can seriously scald you.
Do not open the hood if steam is coming
out.
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 463 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
uuOverheatinguHow to Handle Overheating
464
Handling the Unexpected
■Next thing to do
1. Check that the cooling fan is operating and
stop the engine once the high temperature
indicator goes off.
uIf the cooling fan is not operating,
immediately stop the engine.
2. Once the engine has cooled down, inspect
the coolant level and check the cooling
system components for leaks.
uIf the coolant level in the reserve tank is
low, add coolant until it reaches the
MAX mark.
uIf there is no coolant in the reserve tank,
check that the radiator is cool. Cover the
radiator cap with a heavy cloth and open
the cap. If necessary, add coolant up to
the base of the filler neck, and put the
cap back on.
■Last thing to do
Once the engine has cooled sufficiently, restart it and check the high temperature
indicator.
If the high temperature indicator is off, resume driving. If it stays on, contact a dealer
for repairs.
1How to Handle Overheating
If the coolant is leaking, contact a dealer for repairs.
Use water as an emergency/temporary measure only.
Have a dealer flush the system with proper antifreeze
as soon as possible.
3
WARNING
Removing the radiator cap while the
engine is hot can cause the coolant to spray
out, seriously scalding you.
Always let the engine and radiator cool
down before removing the radiator cap.
MAX
Reserve Tank
MIN
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 464 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
465
Handling the Unexpected
Indicator, Coming On/Blinking
If the Low Oil Pressure Indicator Comes On
■Reasons for the indicator to come on
Comes on when the engine oil pressure is low.
■What to do as soon as the indicator comes on
1. Immediately park the vehicle on level ground in a safe place.
2. If necessary, turn the hazard warning lights on.
■What to do after parking the vehicle
1. Stop the engine and let it sit for about three minutes.
2. Open the hood and check the oil level.
uAdd oil as necessary.
2Oil Check P. 402
3. Start the engine and check the low oil pressure indicator.
uThe indicator goes off: Start driving again.
uThe indicator does not go off within 10 seconds: Stop the engine
and contact a dealer for repairs immediately.
If the Charging System Indicator Comes On
■Reasons for the indicator to come on
Comes on when the battery is not being charged.
■What to do when the indicator comes on
Turn off the heating and cooling system*/climate control system*, rear
defogger, and other electrical systems, and immediately contact a dealer
for repairs.
1If the Low Oil Pressure Indicator Comes On
NOTICE
Running the engine with low oil pressure can cause
serious mechanical damage almost immediately.
1If the Charging System Indicator Comes On
If you need to stop temporarily, do not turn off the
engine. Restarting the engine may rapidly discharge
the battery.
* Not available on all models
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 465 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
466
uuIndicator, Coming On/BlinkinguIf the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On or Blinks
Handling the Unexpected
If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On or
Blinks
■Reasons for the indicator lamp to come on or blink
•Comes on when there is a problem with the engine emissions control
system, or the fuel fill cap is missing, or loose.
•Blinks when engine misfiring is detected.
■What to do when the indicator lamp comes on
Avoid high speeds and immediately get your vehicle inspected at a
dealer.
■What to do when the indicator lamp blinks
Park the vehicle in a safe place with no flammable items and wait at least
10 minutes or more with the engine stopped until it cools.
■The message appears on when:
An evaporative system leak is detected. This may be caused by the fuel fill cap being
loose or not being installed.
■What to do when the message appears:
1. Stop the engine.
2. Check that the fuel fill cap is fully installed.
uIf not, loosen the cap, and then retighten it until it clicks at least once.
3. Drive for several days of normal driving.
uThe message should go off.
■When the malfunction indicator lamp comes on
The malfunction indicator lamp comes on if the system continues to detect a leak of
gasoline vapor. If this happens, check the fuel fill cap using the procedures described
above.
■Check Fuel Cap Message
1If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On or Blinks
NOTICE
If you drive with the malfunction indicator lamp on,
the emissions control system and the engine could be
damaged.
If the malfunction indicator lamp blinks again when
restarting the engine, drive to the nearest dealer at
31 mph (50 km/h) or less. Have your vehicle
inspected.
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 466 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
467
uuIndicator, Coming On/BlinkinguIf the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On
Handling the Unexpected
If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On
■Reasons for the indicator to come on
•The brake fluid is low.
•There is a malfunction in the brake system.
■What to do when the indicator comes on while driving
Depress the brake pedal lightly to check pedal pressure.
•If normal, check the brake fluid level the next time you stop.
•If abnormal, take immediate action. If necessary, downshift the
transmission to slow the vehicle using engine braking.
If the Electric Power Steering (EPS) System Indicator
Comes On
■Reasons for the indicator to come on
•Comes on when there is a problem with the EPS system.
•If you depress the accelerator pedal repeatedly to increase the engine
speed while the engine is idling, the indicator comes on, and
sometimes the steering wheel becomes harder to operate.
■What to do when the indicator comes on
Stop the vehicle in a safe place and restart the engine.
If the indicator comes on and stays on, immediately have your vehicle
inspected by a dealer.
1If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On
Have your vehicle repaired immediately.
It is dangerous to drive with low brake fluid. If there
is no resistance from the brake pedal, stop
immediately in a safe place. If necessary downshift
the gears.
If the brake system indicator and ABS indicator come
on simultaneously, the electronic brake distribution
system is not working. This can result in vehicle
instability under sudden braking.
Have your vehicle inspected by a dealer immediately.
U.S.
Canada
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 467 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
468
uuIndicator, Coming On/BlinkinguIf the Electric Parking Brake System Indicator Comes On
Handling the Unexpected
If the Electric Parking Brake System Indicator Comes
On
■Reasons for the indicator to come on
Comes on when there is a problem with the electric parking brake
system.
■What to do when the indicator comes on
Avoid using the parking brake and immediately get your vehicle
inspected at a dealer.
■What to do when the electric parking brake indicator comes on
or blinks at the same time.
Release the parking brake.
2Parking Brake P. 377
•If the electric parking brake indicator remains on or blinks even after
releasing the parking brake, immediately stop the vehicle in a safe
place and call a dealer.
uTo prevent your vehicle from moving,
Move the shift lever to (P
Move the shift lever to (1 or (R
•If only the electric parking brake indicator goes off, immediately get
your vehicle inspected at a dealer.
1If the Electric Parking Brake System Indicator Comes On
If you apply the parking brake, it may not release.
If the electric parking brake indicator also turns on,
the parking brake is still applied.
When the electric parking brake indicator blinks at
the same time as the electric parking brake system
indicator, the system must be checked. The parking
brake may not operate under these conditions.
Continuously variable transmission models
Manual transmission models
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 468 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
469
uuIndicator, Coming On/BlinkinguIf the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator Comes On or Blinks
Handling the Unexpected
If the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator Comes On or
Blinks
■Reasons for the indicator to come on or blink
A tire pressure is significantly low, or the TPMS has not been calibrated.
If there is a problem with the TPMS or the compact spare tire is installed,
the indicator blinks for about one minute, and then stays on.
■What to do when the indicator comes on
Drive carefully and avoid abrupt cornering and hard braking.
Stop your vehicle in a safe place. Check the tire pressure and adjust the
pressure to the specified level. The specified tire pressure is on a label on
the driver side doorjamb.
uCalibrate the TPMS after the tire pressure is adjusted.
■What to do when the indicator blinks, then remains on
Have the tire inspected by a dealer as soon as possible. If the compact
spare tire causes the indicator to blink, change the tire to a full-size tire.
The indicator goes off after driving for a few miles (kilometers).
U.S. models
1If the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator Comes On or Blinks
NOTICE
Driving on an extremely underinflated tire can cause
it to overheat. An overheated tire can fail. Always
inflate your tires to the prescribed level.
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 469 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
470
Handling the Unexpected
Fuses
Fuse Locations
If any electrical devices are not working,
turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0*1 and
check to see if any applicable fuse is blown.
■Fuse box A
Located near the brake fluid reservoir. Push
the tabs to open the box.
Fuse locations are shown on the fuse box
cover. Locate the fuse in question by the
fuse number and box cover number.
■
Engine Compartment Fuse Box
Tab
■Circuit protected and fuse rating
Circuit Protected Amps
1Headlight Low Beam Main 20 A
2CDC*(30 A)
3Hazard 10 A
4DBW 15 A
5Wiper*(30 A)
6Stop 10 A
7IGP 15 A
8IG Coil 15 A
9EOP*(10 A)
10 INJ*(20 A)
11 VST2*(30 A)
12 Main Fan 30 A
13 Starter SW*(30 A)
14 MG Clutch 7.5 A
15 Battery Sensor (7.5 A)
16 Small Light 10 A
17 AFP Main*(10 A)
18 Horn 10 A
19 Fog Light*(10 A)
20 SBW*(10 A)
*1:Models with the smart entry system have
an ENGINE START/STOP button
instead of an ignition switch.
Circuit Protected Amps
21 Back Up Main 10 A
22 Audio (10 A)
23 Sub Fan (30 A)
24 VST1*(30 A)
25 STRLD*(7.5 A)
26 IGP CAM*(7.5 A)
27 – –
28 – –
29 Back Up*(30 A)
30 IGP LAF (7.5 A)
31 IGPS (7.5 A)
32 Right Headlight Low Beam 10 A
33 Left Headlight Low Beam 10 A
* Not available on all models
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 470 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
471
uuFusesuFuse Locations
Continued
Handling the Unexpected
■Fuse box B
Tab
a
b c d
Pull up the cover on the + terminal, then
remove it while pulling out the tab as
shown.
Replacement of engine compartment fuses
should be done by a dealer.
■Circuit protected and fuse rating
Circuit Protected Amps
aBattery Main 100 A
bRB Main 1 70 A
cRB Main 2 80 A
dCAP Main 70 A
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 471 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
472
uuFusesuFuse Locations
Handling the Unexpected
■Fuse box A
Located behind the instrument panel.
Fuse locations are shown on the label under
the steering column.
Locate the fuse in question by the fuse
number and label number.
■Interior Fuse Boxes
Fuse Label
■Circuit protected and fuse rating
Circuit Protected Amps
1Door Lock 20 A
2 – –
3Smart*(10 A)
4Driver Side Door Unlock 10 A
5
Passenger Side Door Unlock
10 A
6Driver Door Unlock 10 A
7Driver Door Lock 10 A
8Driver’s Power Window 20 A
9Passenger’s Power Window 20 A
10 Rear Left Power Window 20 A
11 Rear Right Power Window 20 A
12 Driver Side Door Lock 10 A
13 Passenger Side Door Lock 10 A
14 – –
15 Right Headlight High Beam 10 A
16 STS*(7.5 A)
17 Sunshade*(20 A)
18 Moonroof*(20 A)
19 Front Seat Heater*(20 A)
20 – –
Circuit Protected Amps
21 MP Camera*(10 A)
22 Washer 15 A
23 Rear Wiper*(10 A)
24 A/C 7.5 A
25 Daytime Running Lights 7.5 A
26 Starter Cut*(7.5 A)
27 ABS/VSA 7.5 A
28 SRS 10 A
29 Left Headlight High Beam 10 A
30 ACG 10 A
31 IG Relay 10 A
32 Fuel Pump 15 A
33 SRS (7.5 A)
34 Meter 7.5 A
35 Mission SOL 7.5 A
36 Front ACC Socket 20 A
37 ACC (7.5 A)
38 ACC*(7.5 A)
39 Option 10 A
40 Rear Wiper 10 A
41 − −
42 − −
* Not available on all models
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 472 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
473
uuFusesuFuse Locations
Handling the Unexpected
■Fuse box B
Remove the cover by putting the flat-tip
screwdriver into the side slot as shown.
Fuse Label
Cover
■Circuit protected and fuse rating
Circuit Protected Amps
1
EPS 70 A
IG Main 30 A*1
50 A*2
Fuse Box Main 2 50 A
ABS/VSA Motor 40 A
Fuse Box Main 1 30 A
Fuse Box Main 3*40 A
2
Rear Defogger 30 A
EPB L 30 A
IG Main2*1
–*2
30 A
30 A
HTR 40 A
EPB R 30 A
AWD*30 A
*1:Models with smart entry system
*2:Models without smart entry system
Circuit Protected Amps
3 – –
4– –
5ABS/VSA FSR 30 A
6 Deicer*(10 A)
7RR ACC SOCKET*(20 A)
8– –
9Interior Light 7.5 A
10 ACC Socket (Console) (20 A)
11 − −
12*1 −−
12*2 ACC Key Lock (7.5 A)
13 Heated Door Mirror*(10 A)
14 A/C Blower SW*(7.5 A)
15*1 – –
15*2 Wiper 30 A
* Not available on all models
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 473 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
474
uuFusesuInspecting and Changing Fuses
Handling the Unexpected
Inspecting and Changing Fuses
1. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0*1. Turn
headlights and all accessories off.
2. Check the fuses on the battery in the
engine compartment.
uIf the fuse is blown, have it replaced by a
dealer.
3. Remove the fuse box cover.
4. Inspect the small fuses in the engine
compartment and the vehicle interior.
uIf there is a burned out fuse, remove it
with the fuse puller and replace it with a
new one.
5. Check the large fuse in the vehicle interior.
uIf the fuse is blown, use a Phillips-head
screwdriver to remove the screw and
replace it with a new one.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.
1Inspecting and Changing Fuses
NOTICE
Replacing a fuse with one that has a higher rating
greatly increases the chances of damaging the
electrical system.
Replace fuse with a spare fuse of the same specified
amperage.
Confirm the specified amperage using the charts on
2Fuse Locations P. 470
There is a fuse puller in the back of the engine
compartment fuse box cover.
Fuse Box on the Battery
Blown
Fuse Puller
Combined Fuse
Blown Fuse
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 474 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
475
Handling the Unexpected
Emergency Towing
Call a professional towing service if you need to tow your vehicle.
■Flat bed equipment
The operator loads your vehicle on the back of a truck.
This is the best way to transport your vehicle.
■Wheel lift equipment
The tow truck uses two pivoting arms that go under the front tires and lift them off
the ground. The rear tires remain on the ground. This is an acceptable way to
tow your vehicle.
1Emergency Towing
NOTICE
Trying to lift or tow your vehicle by the bumpers will
cause serious damage. The bumpers are not designed
to support the vehicle’s weight.
NOTICE
Improper towing such as towing behind a
motorhome or other motor vehicle can damage the
transmission.
Never tow your vehicle with just a rope or chain.
It is very dangerous, since ropes or chains may shift
from side to side or break.
Make sure the parking brake is released. If you
cannot release the parking brake, your vehicle must
be transported by the flat bed equipment.
2Parking Brake P. 377
2WD models
All models
2WD models
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 475 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
476
Handling the Unexpected
When You Cannot Open the Tailgate
If you cannot open the tailgate, use the following procedure.
1. Wrap a cloth around the flat-tip
screwdriver. Put it into the cover as shown
in the image, and open it.
2. Wrap a cloth around the flat-tip
screwdriver. Put it into the lid as shown in
the image, and open the lid.
■What to Do When Unable to Open the Tailgate
1When You Cannot Open the Tailgate
Follow Up:
After taking these steps, contact a dealer to have
your vehicle checked.
When you open the tailgate from inside, make sure
there is enough space around the tailgate, and it
does not hit anyone or any object.
Cover
Lid
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 476 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
477
uuWhen You Cannot Open the Tailgateu
Handling the Unexpected
3. To open the tailgate, push the tailgate
while sliding the lever to the right.
Lever
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 477 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
478
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 478 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
479
Information
This chapter includes your vehicle’s specifications, locations of identification numbers, and other
information required by regulation.
Specifications .................................... 480
Identification Numbers
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN),
Engine Number, and Transmission
Number ......................................... 482
Devices that Emit Radio Waves ....... 483
Reporting Safety Defects ................. 484
Emissions Testing
Testing of Readiness Codes.............. 485
Warranty Coverages ........................ 487
Authorized Manuals......................... 489
Customer Service Information......... 490
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 479 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
480
Information
Specifications
■Vehicle Specifications
*1: 2WD
*2: AWD
■Air Conditioning
Model HR-V
No. of Passengers:
Front 2
Rear 3
Total 5
Weights:
Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating
4,001 lbs (1,815 kg)*1
4,166 lbs (1,890 kg)*2
Gross Axle Weight
Rating (Front)
2,127 lbs (965 kg)*1
2,178 lbs (988 kg)*2
Gross Axle Weight
Rating (Rear)
1,873 lbs (850 kg)*1
1,988 lbs (902 kg)*2
Refrigerant Type HFC-134a (R-134a)
Charge Quantity 14.3 - 16.0 oz (405 - 455 g)
Lubricant Type ND-OIL8
Quantity 4.27-5.00 cu-in (70-82 cm3)
■Engine Specifications
■Fuel
■Washer Fluid
Displacement 109.8 cu-in (1,799 cm3)
Spark Plugs NGK DILZKR7B11GS
DENSO DXU22HCR-D11S
Fuel:
Type
Unleaded gasoline, Pump octane number
of 87 or higher
Fuel Tank Capacity 13.2 US gal (50 L)
Tank Capacity U.S.: 2.6 US qt (2.5 L)
Canada: 4.8 US qt (4.5 L)
■Light Bulbs
Headlights (High/Low Beam) 60/55W (HB2)
Fog Lights*35W (H8)
Side Marker Lights 5W
Front Turn Signal/Parking Lights 28/8W (Amber)
Brake/Tail/Side Marker Lights LED
Back-Up Lights 16W
Rear Turn Signal Lights 21W (Amber)
High-Mount Brake Light LED
Side Turn Signal Lights*LED
Rear License Plate Lights 5W
Interior Lights
Vanity Mirror Light*1.8W
Map Lights 8W
Ceiling Light 8W
Cargo Area Light 5W
* Not available on all models
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 480 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
481
uuSpecificationsu
Information
■Brake/Clutch* Fluid
■Continuously Variable Transmission
Fluid*
*1: 2WD
*2: AWD
■Manual Transmission Fluid*
■Rear Differential Fluid*
Specified Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3
Specified Honda HCF-2 Transmission Fluid
Capacity Change 3.7 US qt (3.5 L)*1
4.2 US qt (4.0 L)*2
Specified Honda Manual Transmission Fluid
Capacity Change 2.0 US qt (1.9 L)
Specified Honda DPSF II
Capacity Change 1.318 US qt (1.247 L)
■Engine Oil
■Engine Coolant
*1: Continuously variable transmission models
*2: Manual transmission models
Recommended ·Genuine Honda Motor Oil 0W-20
·API Premium-grade 0W-20 detergent oil
Capacity
Change 3.7 US qt (3.5 L)
Change
including
filter
3.9 US qt (3.7 L)
Specified Honda Long-Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type2
Ratio 50/50 with distilled water
Capacity
1.39 US gal (5.25 L)*1
(change including the remaining
0.13 US gal (0.5 L) in the reserve tank)
1.38 US gal (5.24 L)*2
(change including the remaining
0.13 US gal (0.5 L) in the reserve tank)
■Tire
Regular
Size 215/55R17 94V
Pressure
psi (kPa[kgf/cm2])
Front 32 (220 [2.2])
Rear 30 (210 [2.1])
Compact
Spare
Size T135/90D16 102M
Pressure
psi (kPa[kgf/cm2]) 60 (420 [4.2])
Wheel Size Regular 17 x 7 1/2J
Compact Spare 16 x 4T
* Not available on all models
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 481 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
482
Information
Identification Numbers
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), Engine Number,
and Transmission Number
Your vehicle has a 17-digit vehicle identification number (VIN) used to register your
vehicle for warranty purposes, and for licensing and insuring your vehicle.
The locations of your vehicle’s VIN, engine number, and transmission number are
shown as follows.
1Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), Engine Number, and
Transmission Number
The interior vehicle identification number (VIN) is
located under the cover.
Cover
Vehicle Identification NumberEngine Number
Certification Label/
Vehicle Identification
Number
Manual Transmission Number/
Continuously Variable Transmission
Number
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 482 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
483
Information
Devices that Emit Radio Waves
The following products and systems on your vehicle emit radio waves when in
operation.
Each of the above complies with the appropriate requirements or the required
standards of FCC (Federal Communications Commission) and Industry Canada
Standard, described below:
As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is
subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not
cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to
operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference
that may cause undesired operation of the device.
HondaLink*
Audio System
Bluetooth® Audio
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®
Immobilizer System
Smart Entry System*
Remote Transmitter
* Not available on all models
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 483 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
484
Information
Reporting Safety Defects
In the U.S.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to
notifying American Honda Motor Co., Inc.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists
in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between you, your dealer, or American Honda Motor Co., Inc.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-
9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE.,
Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://
www.safercar.gov.
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform Honda Canada Inc. and you may also inform Transport Canada.
If Transport Canada receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety
defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may lead to a recall and remedy campaign. However, Transport Canada
cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Honda Canada Inc.
To contact Transport Canada’s Defect Investigations and Recalls Division, you may call 1-800-333-0510. For
more information on reporting safety defects or about motor vehicle safety, go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/
roadsafety.
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 484 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
485
Continued
Information
Emissions Testing
Testing of Readiness Codes
Your vehicle has readiness code as part of the onboard self diagnostic system. Some
states use these codes for testing to verify whether your vehicle’s emissions
components are working properly.
The codes may not be read properly if testing is performed just after the battery has
gone dead or been disconnected.
To check if they are set, turn the ignition switch to ON (w*1, without starting the
engine. The malfunction indicator lamp will come on for several seconds. If it then
goes off, the readiness codes are set. If it blinks five times, the readiness codes are
not set.
If you are required to have your vehicle tested before the readiness codes are ready,
prepare the vehicle for retesting by doing the following:
1. Fill the gas tank to approximately 3/4 full.
2. Park the vehicle and leave the engine off for 6 hours or more.
3. Make sure the ambient temperature is between 40°F and 95°F (4°C and 35°C).
4. Start the engine without touching the accelerator pedal, and let it idle for 20
seconds.
5. Keep the vehicle in (P (continuously variable transmission) or (N (manual
transmission). Increase the engine speed to 2,000 rpm, and hold it there for about
three minutes.
6. Let the engine idle with your foot off the accelerator for 20 seconds.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.
1Testing of Readiness Codes
The readiness codes are erased when the battery is
disconnected, and set again only after several days of
driving under a variety of conditions.
If a testing facility determines that the readiness
codes are not set, you may be requested to return at
a later date to complete the test.
If the testing facility determines the readiness codes
are still not set, see a dealer.
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 485 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
486
uuEmissions TestinguTesting of Readiness Codes
Information
7. Select a nearby, lightly traveled major highway where you can maintain a speed
of 50 to 60 mph (80 to 97 km/h) for at least 20 minutes. Drive on the highway in
(D (continuously variable) or 5th (manual). Do not use cruise control. When
traffic allows, drive for 90 seconds without moving the accelerator pedal. (Vehicle
speed may vary slightly; this is okay.) If you cannot do this for a continuous 90
seconds because of traffic conditions, drive for at least 30 seconds, then repeat it
two more times (for a total of 90 seconds).
8. Drive in city or suburban traffic for at least 10 minutes. When traffic conditions
allow, let the vehicle coast for several seconds without using the accelerator pedal
or the brake pedal.
9. Park the vehicle and leave the engine off for 30 minutes.
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 486 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
487
Continued
Information
Warranty Coverages
■U.S. Owners
Your new vehicle is covered by these warranties:
New Vehicle Limited Warranty – covers your new vehicle, except for the
emissions control systems and accessories, against defects in materials and
workmanship.
Emissions Control Systems Defects Warranty and Emissions Performance
Warranty – these two warranties cover your vehicle’s emissions control systems.
Time, mileage, and coverage are conditional. Please read your warranty booklet for
exact information.
Seat Belt Limited Warranty – a seat belt that fails to function properly is covered
by a limited warranty. Please read your warranty booklet for details.
Rust Perforation Limited Warranty – all exterior body panels are covered against
rusting from the inside out for the specified time period, regardless of mileage.
Accessory Limited Warranty – Honda accessories are covered under this
warranty. Time and mileage limits depend on the type of accessory and other
factors. Please read your warranty booklet for details.
Replacement Parts Limited Warranty – covers all Honda replacement parts
against defects in materials and workmanship.
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 487 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
488
uuWarranty Coveragesu
Information
Replacement Battery Limited Warranty – provides prorated coverage for a
replacement battery purchased from your dealer.
Replacement Muffler Lifetime Limited Warranty – provides coverage for as
long as the purchaser of the muffler owns the vehicle.
Restrictions and exclusions apply to all these warranties. Please read the Honda
warranty information booklet that came with your vehicle for precise information on
warranty coverages. Your vehicle’s original tires are covered by their manufacturer.
Tire warranty information is in a separate booklet.
■Canadian Owners
Please refer to the warranty manual that came with your vehicle.
■EPA Contact Information
An owner may obtain further information concerning emission warranties or report
violations of the terms of the emission warranties by contacting:
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
Office of Transportation and Air Quality
Compliance Division, Light-Duty Vehicle Group
Attn: Warranty Complaints
2000 Traverwood Drive
Ann Arbor, MI 48105
Email: complianceinfo@epa.gov
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 488 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
489
Information
Authorized Manuals
■Service Express
For electronic copies of service publications, you can purchase a subscription to
Service Express. Visit www.techinfo.honda.com for pricing and options.
■For U.S. Owners
Manuals can be purchased from Helm Incorporated. You can order a manual by
phone at 1 (800) 782-4356 (credit card orders only), or online at www.helminc.com.
■For Canadian Owners
Please contact a dealer to order any manuals that you may require.
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 489 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
490
Information
Customer Service Information
Honda dealership personnel are trained professionals who should be able to deal
with any problems you may encounter with your vehicle. If, however, you are faced
with a problem that they cannot resolve to your satisfaction, contact Honda
Customer Services.
U.S. Owners
American Honda Motor Co., Inc.
Honda Automobile Customer Services
Mail Stop 100-5E-8A
1919 Torrance Blvd.
Torrance, CA 90501-2746
Tel: 1 (800) 999-1009
Canadian Owners
Honda Canada Inc.
Customer Relations
180 Honda Boulevard
Markham, ON
L6C 0H9
Tel: 1-888-9-HONDA-9
Fax: 1-877-939-0909
E-mail: Honda_cr@ch.honda.com
In Puerto Rico and the U.S. Virgin
Islands
Bella International
P.O. Box 190816
San Juan, PR 00919-0816
Tel: 1 (787) 620-7546
1Customer Service Information
When you call or write, please give us the following
information:
•Vehicle Identification Number
2Vehicle Identification Number (VIN),
Engine Number, and Transmission
Number P. 482
•Date of purchase
•Odometer reading of your vehicle
•Your name, address, and telephone number
•A detailed description of the problem
•Name of the dealer who sold the vehicle to you
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 490 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
491
uuCustomer Service Informationu
Information
Requirements to access Pandora®
•Latest version of the Pandora app
installed on your Android, Blackberry, or
iPhone.
•Registered Pandora account (you can
create a free account at
www.pandora.com <http://
www.pandora.com/> or on your
smartphone)
•Connection to the internet via WiFi or
cellular data network.
•Android devices must be connected to
the vehicle via Bluetooth, iPhone devices
may be connected via Bluetooth or USB.
■Disclaimer of Pandora®*Limitations
•Access to Pandora requires an active
internet connection
•Ability to access Pandora through this
system is subject to change without
notice
•Certain functionality of Pandora service is
not available when accessing the service
through this system including, but not
limited to, creating new stations, deleting
stations, emailing current stations,
buying songs, viewing additional text
information, logging in to Pandora, and
adjusting Cell Network Audio Quality.
Pandora internet radio is a music service
not affiliated with HONDA. More
information is available at http://
www.pandora.com <http://
www.pandora.com/>. Pandora, the
Pandora logo, and the Pandora trade
dress are trademarks or registered
trademarks of Pandora Media, Inc., used
with permission.
•Mobile access requires a smartphone
with an active data plan. Standard data
rates may apply.
•Pandora is only available in the United
States.
* Not available on all models
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 491 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
Index
492
Index
Index
Numbers
7-Speed Manual Shift Mode .................... 352
A
ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)................... 383
Accessories and Modifications................. 443
Accessory Power Sockets .......................... 158
Additives
Coolant ................................................... 406
Engine Oil................................................ 401
Washer.................................................... 410
Additives, Engine Oil................................ 401
Adjusting
Armrest ................................................... 151
Front Seats .............................................. 142
Head Restraints........................................ 144
Headlights ............................................... 411
Mirrors .................................................... 140
Rear Seats................................................ 148
Steering Wheel........................................ 139
Adjusting the Sound......................... 189, 211
Air Conditioning System
Climate Control System ........................... 167
Defrosting the Windshield and
Windows ....................................... 166, 170
Dust and Pollen Filter ............................... 437
Heating and Cooling System.................... 163
Air Conditioning System (Climate Control
System)
Synchronization Mode............................. 174
Air Conditioning System (Heating and
Cooling System)
Cooling ................................................... 166
Heating ................................................... 165
Air Pressure....................................... 425, 481
Airbags........................................................ 44
Advanced Airbags ..................................... 50
Airbag Care............................................... 56
Event Data Recorder.................................... 0
Front Airbags (SRS).................................... 47
Indicator.............................................. 54, 79
Passenger Front Airbag Off Indicator ......... 55
Sensors ..................................................... 44
Side Airbags .............................................. 51
Side Curtain Airbags.................................. 53
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) ............................ 372
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) .................. 383
Indicator.................................................... 79
Armrest ..................................................... 151
Audio Remote Controls ........................... 182
Audio System ........................................... 178
Adjusting the Sound ....................... 189, 211
Auxiliary Input Jack ................................. 180
Error Messages ....................................... 233
General Information................................ 237
HDMI® Port............................................. 180
iPod ................................................ 196, 219
MP3/WMA/AAC ............. 193, 199, 216, 224
Recommended CDs ................................ 237
Recommended Devices ........................... 239
Remote Controls..................................... 182
Security Code ......................................... 181
Theft Protection ...................................... 181
USB Flash Drives...................................... 239
USB Port(s).............................................. 179
Audio/Information Screen ............... 185, 206
Authorized Manuals ................................ 489
Auto Door Locking/Unlocking ................ 111
Customize .............................................. 112
Automatic Brake Hold ............................. 380
Indicator ........................................... 76, 380
Automatic Brake Hold System
Indicator ........................................... 75, 380
Automatic Climate Control Sensors ........ 175
Auxiliary Input Jack ................................. 180
Average Fuel Economy .............................. 92
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 492 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
493
Index
B
Battery ...................................................... 433
Charging System Indicator ................ 77, 465
Jump Starting ......................................... 460
Maintenance (Checking the Battery) ....... 433
Maintenance (Replacing)......................... 435
Belts (Seat).................................................. 35
Beverage Holders..................................... 155
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®............ 274, 297
Booster Seats (For Children)...................... 69
Brake System ............................................ 377
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) .................. 383
Automatic Brake Hold............................. 380
Brake Assist System................................. 384
Foot Brake .............................................. 379
Indicator (Amber)...................................... 74
Indicator (Red) .................................. 74, 467
Parking Brake.......................................... 377
Brake System Indicator (Amber) ............... 74
Brake System Indicator (Red) .................... 74
Brake/Clutch System
Fluid ....................................................... 409
Brightness Control (Instrument Panel) ... 136
Bulb Replacement .................................... 411
Back-Up Lights ........................................ 416
Brake/Tail/Rear Side Marker Lights ........... 417
Fog Lights................................................ 413
Front Side Marker Lights .......................... 413
Front Turn Signal/Parking Lights............... 412
Headlights ............................................... 411
High-Mount Brake Light .......................... 417
Rear License Plate Lights .......................... 418
Rear Turn Signal Lights ............................ 415
Side Turn Signal, Emergency Indicator
Lights .................................................... 414
Bulb Specifications ................................... 480
C
Carbon Monoxide Gas................................ 70
Cargo Cover .............................................. 161
Cargo Floor Box ........................................ 157
Carrying Cargo.................................. 329, 331
CD Player........................................... 193, 216
Certification Label .................................... 482
Changing Bulbs......................................... 411
Charging System Indicator................. 77, 465
Child Safety................................................. 57
Childproof Door Locks ............................. 110
Child Seat.................................................... 57
Booster Seats ............................................ 69
Child Seat for Infants................................. 59
Child Seat for Small Children..................... 60
Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat
Belt ......................................................... 64
Larger Children ......................................... 68
Rear-facing Child Seat ............................... 59
Selecting a Child Seat................................ 61
Childproof Door Locks ............................. 110
Cleaning the Exterior ............................... 440
Cleaning the Interior................................ 438
Climate Control System............................ 167
Synchronization Mode............................. 174
Clock............................................................ 96
Coat Hook................................................. 159
Compact Spare Tire .......................... 448, 481
Continuously Variable Transmission ....... 347
7-Speed Manual Shift Mode.................... 352
Creeping................................................. 347
Kickdown................................................ 347
Operating the Shift Lever........... 21, 349, 351
Shift Lever Does Not Move ...................... 462
Shifting ........................................... 348, 350
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)
Fluid........................................................ 408
Controls....................................................... 95
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 493 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
494
Index
Coolant (Engine)....................................... 406
Adding to the Radiator ............................ 407
Adding to the Reserve Tank ..................... 406
High Temperature Indicator ....................... 79
Low Temperature Indicator ........................ 79
Overheating............................................. 463
Creeping (Continuously Variable
Transmission)........................................... 347
Cruise Control ........................................... 358
Indicator.................................................... 84
Cup Holders............................................... 155
Customer Service Information ................. 490
D
Daytime Running Lights........................... 133
Dead Battery............................................. 460
Defrosting the Windshield and
Windows.......................................... 166, 170
Devices that Emit Radio Waves................ 483
Dimming
Headlights ............................................... 129
Rearview Mirror ....................................... 140
Dipstick (Engine Oil) ................................. 402
Directional Signals (Turn Signal).............. 129
Display Setup .................................... 190, 212
Door Mirrors ............................................. 141
Doors........................................................... 98
Auto Door Locking .................................. 111
Auto Door Unlocking .............................. 111
Door and Tailgate Open Indicator........ 34, 80
Keys .......................................................... 98
Locking/Unlocking the Doors from
the Inside .............................................. 107
Locking/Unlocking the Doors from
the Outside ........................................... 101
Lockout Prevention System...................... 106
DOT Tire Quality Grading ........................ 427
Driving ...................................................... 327
Braking ................................................... 377
Continuously Variable Transmission......... 347
Cruise Control......................................... 358
Shifting Gear........................................... 354
Shifting Position .............................. 348, 350
Starting the Engine.......................... 339, 342
Dust and Pollen Filter............................... 437
E
ECO Assist® System ....................................... 9
ECON Button ............................................ 357
ECON Mode Indicator ................................ 83
Electric Parking Brake
Indicator.................................................... 75
Electric Parking Brake System
Indicator............................................ 75, 468
Electric Power Steering (EPS) System
Indicator ........................................... 80, 467
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ............ 368
Emergency................................................ 475
Emissions Testing (Readiness Codes) ...... 485
Engine
Coolant .................................................. 406
Jump Starting ......................................... 460
Number .................................................. 482
Oil .......................................................... 401
Starting........................................... 339, 342
Switch Buzzer ......................................... 124
Engine Coolant ........................................ 406
Adding to the Radiator ........................... 407
Adding to the Reserve Tank .................... 406
High Temperature Indicator ...................... 79
Low Temperature Indicator ....................... 79
Overheating............................................ 463
Engine Oil................................................. 401
Adding ................................................... 403
Checking ................................................ 402
Displaying Oil Life ................................... 395
Low Oil Pressure Indicator ................. 77, 465
Recommended Engine Oil ....................... 401
Exhaust Gas Hazard (Carbon
Monoxide) ................................................ 70
Exterior Care (Cleaning) .......................... 440
Exterior Mirrors ........................................ 141
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 494 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
495
Index
F
Features .................................................... 177
Filters
Dust and Pollen....................................... 437
Oil .......................................................... 404
Flat Tire..................................................... 448
Floor Mats ................................................ 439
Fluids
Brake/Clutch ........................................... 409
Continuously Variable Transmission
(CVT) .................................................... 408
Engine Coolant ....................................... 406
Manual Transmission .............................. 408
Windshield Washer ................................. 410
FM/AM Radio ................................... 191, 213
Fog Light Indicator .................................... 82
Folding Down the Rear Seats.................. 149
Folding the Rear Seat Up ........................ 150
Foot Brake ................................................ 379
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) .......... 361
Indicator ................................................... 85
Front Airbags (SRS) .................................... 47
Front Seats
Adjusting ................................................ 142
Fuel...................................................... 22, 388
Economy ................................................. 390
Gauge ....................................................... 93
Low Fuel Indicator ..................................... 78
Recommendation .................................... 388
Refueling........................................... 22, 388
Fuel Economy............................................ 390
Fuel Fill Cap......................................... 22, 389
Message.................................................. 466
Fuel Fill Door....................................... 22, 389
Fuses .......................................................... 470
Inspecting and Changing......................... 474
Locations................................................. 470
G
Gasoline (Fuel)
Economy ................................................. 390
Gauge ....................................................... 93
Information ............................................. 388
Low Fuel Indicator ..................................... 78
Refueling................................................. 388
Gauges ........................................................ 90
Gear Shift Lever Positions
Manual Transmission ............................... 355
Glass (care) ........................................ 438, 441
Glove Box .................................................. 154
H
Halogen Bulbs .................................. 411, 413
Handling the Unexpected........................ 445
HandsFreeLink® (HFL)....................... 274, 297
Menus............................................. 276, 300
Phone Setup.................................... 280, 305
Hazard Warning Button .............................. 4
Head Restraints ........................................ 144
Headlights................................................. 129
Aiming.................................................... 411
Dimming ......................................... 129, 133
Operating................................................ 129
Heated Door Mirrors................................ 137
Heated Windshield................................... 138
Heating and Cooling System ................... 163
Cooling................................................... 166
Defrosting the Windshield and
Windows............................................... 166
Dust and Pollen Filter............................... 437
Heating ................................................... 165
HFL (HandsFreeLink®)....................... 274, 297
High Beam Indicator .................................. 82
Hill Start Assist System ..................... 341, 345
Honda App License Agreement .............. 240
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 495 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
496
Index
I
Identification Numbers
Engine and Transmission.......................... 482
Vehicle Identification ............................... 482
Ignition Switch.......................................... 124
Illumination Control
Knob ....................................................... 136
Immobilizer System .................................. 118
Indicator.................................................... 83
Important Handling Information .............. 32
Indicators..................................................... 74
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) .............................. 84
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) ..................... 79
Automatic Brake Hold........................ 76, 380
Automatic Brake Hold System............ 75, 380
Brake Depressing ....................................... 76
Brake System (Amber)................................ 74
Brake System (Red) ............................ 74, 467
Charging System ............................... 77, 465
CRUISE CONTROL.............................. 84, 359
CRUISE MAIN .................................... 84, 358
Door and Tailgate Open....................... 34, 80
ECON Mode .............................................. 83
Electric Parking Brake................................. 75
Electric Parking Brake System............. 75, 468
Electric Power Steering (EPS)
System............................................. 80, 467
Fog Light ................................................... 82
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) .............. 85
High Beam ................................................ 82
High Temperature ..................................... 79
Immobilizer System ................................... 83
Lane Departure Warning (LDW)................. 86
Lights On .................................................. 82
Low Fuel ................................................... 78
Low Oil Pressure................................ 77, 465
Low Temperature ...................................... 79
Low Tire Pressure/TPMS............. 81, 373, 469
Maintenance MinderTM ...................... 84, 395
Malfunction Indicator Lamp............... 77, 466
Seat Belt Reminder .............................. 36, 78
Security System Alarm ............................... 84
Shift Lever Position .................................... 77
Smart Entry System ................................... 81
Starter System ........................................... 82
Supplemental Restraint System............ 54, 79
Transmission ............................................. 78
Turn Signal................................................ 82
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA®)
System ............................................ 80, 368
VSA® OFF .......................................... 80, 369
Washer Level............................................. 84
Information .............................................. 479
Information Display ................................... 91
Instrument Panel ........................................ 73
Brightness Control................................... 136
Interior Lights ........................................... 152
Interior Rearview Mirror.......................... 140
Internet Radio .................................. 222, 223
J
Jack (Wheel Nut Wrench)................ 446, 452
Jump Starting........................................... 460
K
Keyless Lockout Prevention..................... 106
Keys............................................................. 98
Lockout Prevention ................................. 106
Number Tag.............................................. 99
Rear Door Won’t Open ........................... 110
Remote Transmitter ................................ 103
Types and Functions.................................. 98
Won’t Turn ............................................... 25
Kickdown (Continuously Variable
Transmission).......................................... 347
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 496 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
497
Index
L
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) ............. 365
Indicator ................................................... 86
LaneWatchTM ............................................ 370
LATCH (Child Seats) ................................... 62
Lights ................................................ 129, 411
Bulb Replacement ................................... 411
Daytime Running Lights .......................... 133
Fog Lights ............................................... 132
High Beam Indicator ................................. 82
Interior.................................................... 152
Light Switches......................................... 129
Lights On Indicator.................................... 82
Turn Signals ............................................ 129
Load Limits ............................................... 331
Locking/Unlocking ..................................... 98
Auto Door Locking/Unlocking ................. 111
Childproof Door Locks ............................ 110
From Inside ............................................. 107
From Outside .......................................... 101
Keys.......................................................... 98
Lockout Prevention System ..................... 106
Using a Key............................................. 105
Lockout Prevention System ..................... 106
Low Battery Charge ................................. 465
Low Fuel Indicator ..................................... 78
Low Oil Pressure Indicator................. 77, 465
Lower Anchors ........................................... 62
Lubricant Specifications Chart ................ 481
Luggage (Maximum Load Limit)............. 331
M
Maintenance............................................. 391
Battery .................................................... 433
Brake/Clutch Fluid ................................... 409
Cleaning.................................................. 438
Coolant ................................................... 406
Heating and Cooling System/Climate Control
System................................................... 437
Maintenance MinderTM ............................ 395
Oil ........................................................... 402
Precautions.............................................. 393
Radiator .................................................. 407
Remote Transmitter ................................. 435
Replacing Light Bulbs............................... 411
Safety...................................................... 393
Service Items ........................................... 397
Tires ........................................................ 423
Transmission Fluid ................................... 408
Under the Hood ...................................... 399
Malfunction Indicator Lamp .............. 77, 466
Manual Transmission................................ 354
Reverse Lockout ...................................... 356
Map Lights ................................................ 153
Maximum Load Limit ............................... 331
Meters, Gauges........................................... 90
Mirrors....................................................... 140
Adjusting................................................. 140
Door........................................................ 141
Exterior.................................................... 141
Interior Rearview ..................................... 140
Modifications (and Accessories) .............. 443
Moonroof ................................................. 123
MP3 ................................... 193, 199, 216, 224
Multi-View Rear Camera.......................... 386
N
Numbers (Identification).......................... 482
O
Odometer ................................................... 92
Off-Highway Driving Guidelines ............. 337
Oil (Engine)............................................... 401
Adding.................................................... 403
Checking................................................. 402
Displaying Oil Life.................................... 395
Low Oil Pressure Indicator ................. 77, 465
Recommended Engine Oil ....................... 401
Viscosity.................................................. 401
Opening and Closing the Moonroof....... 123
Opening/Closing
Hood....................................................... 400
Moonroof ............................................... 123
Power Windows...................................... 121
Tailgate ................................................... 115
Overheating.............................................. 463
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 497 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
498
Index
P
Paddle Shifters (7-Speed Manual Shift
Mode) ........................................ 21, 352, 353
Pandora®................................................... 223
Panic Mode ............................................... 120
Parking ...................................................... 385
Parking Brake............................................ 377
Passenger Front Airbag Off Indicator ....... 55
Passing Indicators ..................................... 129
Playing Bluetooth® Audio ................ 202, 227
Power Windows........................................ 121
Precautions While Driving
Driving Guidelines for Your Utility
Vehicle................................................... 346
Rain......................................................... 346
Pregnant Women ....................................... 42
Puncture (Tire) .......................................... 448
R
Radiator .................................................... 407
Radio (FM/AM) ................................. 191, 213
Radio Data System (RDS) ................. 192, 214
RDS (Radio Data System) ................. 192, 214
Readiness Codes (Emissions Testing)....... 485
Real Time AWD with Intelligent Control
SystemTM .................................................. 372
Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror
Button ..................................................... 137
Rear Seats (Folding Down) ...................... 149
Rearview Mirror ....................................... 140
Refueling .................................................. 388
Fuel Gauge................................................ 93
Gasoline.......................................... 388, 480
Low Fuel Indicator ..................................... 78
Regulations............................... 375, 427, 483
Remote Transmitter ................................. 103
Replacement
Battery .................................................... 435
Bulbs....................................................... 411
Fuses............................................... 470, 472
Tires ........................................................ 430
Wiper Blade Rubber ........................ 419, 421
Reporting Safety Defects ......................... 484
Resetting a Trip Meter ............................... 92
S
Safe Driving................................................ 29
Safety Check............................................... 34
Safety Labels .............................................. 71
Safety Message ............................................ 1
Seat Belts .................................................... 35
Adjusting the Shoulder Anchor ................. 40
Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners ................. 37
Checking .................................................. 43
Detachable Anchor ................................... 41
Fastening .................................................. 38
Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat
Belt ......................................................... 64
Pregnant Women...................................... 42
Reminder .................................................. 36
Warning Indicator ............................... 36, 78
Seat Heaters ............................................. 162
Seats.......................................................... 142
Adjusting ................................................ 142
Front Seats.............................................. 142
Rear Seats............................................... 148
Security System ........................................ 118
Immobilizer System Indicator..................... 83
Security System Alarm Indicator ................ 84
Select/Reset Knob ...................................... 91
Selecting a Child Seat ................................ 61
Selector Knob (Audio) ............................. 184
Setting the Clock........................................ 96
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 498 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
499
Index
Shift Lever .......................... 21, 348, 350, 354
Operation ................................. 21, 349, 351
Releasing ................................................ 462
Won’t Move ........................................... 462
Shift Lever Position Indicator .... 77, 349, 351
Shifting (Transmission) ............ 348, 350, 354
Shoulder Anchor ........................................ 40
Side Airbags ............................................... 51
Side Curtain Airbags .................................. 53
Siri® Eyes Free........................................... 232
Snow Tires ................................................ 432
Spare Tire ......................................... 448, 481
Spark Plugs ............................................... 480
Specifications ........................................... 480
Specified Fuel ................................... 388, 480
Speedometer.............................................. 90
SRS Airbags (Airbags) ................................ 47
Starter System Indicator ............................ 82
Starting the Engine.......................... 339, 342
Does Not Start ........................................ 457
Engine Switch Buzzer...................... 124, 127
Jump Starting ......................................... 460
Steering Wheel
Adjusting ................................................ 139
Stopping ................................................... 385
Summer Tires............................................ 432
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) ....... 47
Switches (Around the Steering
Wheel) ............................................ 4, 5, 124
T
Tachometer................................................. 90
Tailgate ..................................................... 115
Unable to Open....................................... 476
Temperature
High Temperature Indicator ....................... 79
Low Temperature Indicator ........................ 79
Tie-down Anchors .................................... 160
Time (Setting) ............................................. 96
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) ..................................................... 373
Indicator............................................ 81, 469
Tires ........................................................... 423
Air Pressure ..................................... 425, 481
Checking and Maintaining....................... 423
Inspection................................................ 424
Labeling .................................................. 425
Puncture (Flat Tire)................................... 448
Regulations ............................................. 427
Rotation .................................................. 431
Spare Tire ........................................ 448, 481
Summer .................................................. 432
Tire Chains .............................................. 432
Wear Indicators ....................................... 429
Winter..................................................... 432
Tools .......................................................... 446
Towing a Trailer ....................................... 333
Towing Your Vehicle ................................ 334
Emergency .............................................. 475
TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring
System).................................................... 373
Indicator............................................ 81, 469
Transmission ............................. 348, 350, 354
7-Speed Manual Shift Mode.................... 352
Continuously Variable ............................. 347
Fluid........................................................ 408
Manual ................................................... 354
Number................................................... 482
Shift Lever Position Indicator...... 77, 349, 351
Trip Meter................................................... 92
Troubleshooting....................................... 445
Blown Fuse...................................... 470, 472
Brake Pedal Vibrates.................................. 25
Buzzer Sounds When Opening Door.......... 26
Emergency Towing.................................. 475
Engine Won’t Start.................................. 457
Noise When Braking.................................. 26
Overheating ............................................ 463
Puncture/Flat Tire .................................... 448
Rear Door Won’t Open...................... 26, 110
Shift Lever Won’t Move........................... 462
Warning Indicators .................................... 74
Turn Signals .............................................. 129
Indicators (Instrument Panel) ..................... 82
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 499 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
500
Index
U
Unlocking the Doors......................... 101, 107
USB Flash Drives........................................ 239
USB Port(s)................................................. 179
V
Vanity Mirrors............................................... 7
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ....... 482
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA®).................. 368
Off Button ............................................... 369
Off Indicator .............................................. 80
System Indicator ........................................ 80
Viscosity (Oil)..................................... 401, 481
VSA® (Vehicle Stability Assist) .................. 368
W
Wallpaper ......................................... 187, 209
Warning Indicator On/Blinking ............... 465
Warning Labels........................................... 71
Warranties (Warranty Manual provided
separately) .............................................. 487
Watts......................................................... 480
Wear Indicators (Tire) .............................. 429
Wheel Nut Wrench (Jack Handle) ... 446, 452
Window Washers ..................................... 134
Adding/Refilling Fluid .............................. 410
Switch..................................................... 134
Windshield................................................ 134
Cleaning ......................................... 438, 441
Defrosting/Defogging.............. 138, 166, 170
Washer Fluid ........................................... 410
Wiper Blades ........................................... 419
Wipers and Washers................................ 134
Winter Tires
Snow Tires .............................................. 432
Tire Chains .............................................. 432
Wipers and Washers................................. 134
Checking and Replacing Wiper
Blades ........................................... 419, 421
WMA ................................. 193, 199, 216, 224
Worn Tires ........................................ 423, 429
18 HR-V-31T7A6200.book 500 ページ ２０１７年６月３０日 金曜日 午後１時２３分
owners.honda.com (U.S.)
myhonda.ca (Canada)
2018 Honda HR-V Owner’s Manual
©2017 Honda Motor Co., Ltd. — All Rights Reserved
31T7A620
OM-06208
00X31-T7A-6200 Printed in U.S.A.
